<?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub EntList bull rArr sect hyphen><BOOK FPI="-//Sun Microsystems//DOCUMENT SOLINSTALLADV Version 2.0//en" ROLE="UNNUMBERED" LABEL="FCS" LANG="EN" USERLEVEL="USER-ADMIN"><?Pub Tag atict:info
tracking="on" ref="3"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="lynnet" fullname=""><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="barb1" fullname="Barbara Lundquist"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Solaris Express Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations</TITLE>
<BOOKINFO>
<AUTHORGROUP>
<AUTHOR>
<FIRSTNAME>Lynne</FIRSTNAME>
<SURNAME>Thompson</SURNAME>
</AUTHOR>
</AUTHORGROUP>
<PUBSNUMBER>819-2396-03</PUBSNUMBER>
<RELEASEINFO></RELEASEINFO>
<PUBDATE>May 2007</PUBDATE>
<PUBLISHER>
<PUBLISHERNAME>Sun Microsystems, Inc.</PUBLISHERNAME>
<ADDRESS>
<STREET>4150 Network Circle</STREET>
<CITY>Santa Clara</CITY>
<STATE>CA</STATE>
<POSTCODE>95054</POSTCODE>
<COUNTRY>U.S.A.</COUNTRY>
</ADDRESS>
</PUBLISHER>
<COPYRIGHT>
<YEAR>2007</YEAR>
<HOLDER>Sun Microsystems, Inc.</HOLDER>
</COPYRIGHT>
<ABSTRACT><?Entity Ref abstract><?Entity Start Abstract.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo(authorgroup()pubsnumber()releaseinfo()pubdate()publisher()copyright()abstract(>
<PARA><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">This book describes how to
create the files and directories necessary  to perform an unattended custom
JumpStart installation. This book also  describes how to create RAID-1 volumes
during a JumpStart installation.</PARA><?Pub *0000000753 0><?Entity End Abstract.sgm>
</ABSTRACT>
<LEGALNOTICE><?Entity Ref legal><?Entity Start legal.sgm><?Pub CX book(title()bookinfo(bookbiblio()legalnotice(>
<PARA>Sun Microsystems, Inc. has intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in the product that is described in this document. In particular, and without limitation, these intellectual
property rights may include one or more U.S. patents or pending patent applications in the U.S. and in other countries.</PARA>
<PARA>U.S. Government Rights &ndash; Commercial software.  Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems, Inc. standard license agreement and applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements.</PARA>
<PARA>This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.</PARA>
<PARA>Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S. and other countries, exclusively
licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.</PARA>
<PARA>Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo,
the Solaris logo, the Java Coffee Cup logo, docs.sun.com, <?Entity Ref sun-trademarks><?Entity Start sun-trademarks.sgm>
<?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo(authorgroup()pubsnumber()releaseinfo()pubdate()publisher()copyright()abstract()legalnotice(para()para(><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin">
  <?Pub *0000000913 0><?Entity End sun-trademarks.sgm>
Java, and
Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S.
and other countries. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks
or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun
Microsystems, Inc. <?Entity Ref other-trademarks><?Entity Start other-trademarks.sgm>
<?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo(authorgroup()pubsnumber()releaseinfo()pubdate()publisher()copyright()abstract()legalnotice(para()para(><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin">
    <?Pub *0000000554 0><?Entity End other-trademarks.sgm></PARA>
<PARA>The OPEN LOOK and <TRADEMARK>Sun</TRADEMARK> Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for
its users and licensees. Sun acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching
and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer
industry. Sun holds a non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User
Interface, which license also covers Sun's licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs
and otherwise comply with Sun's written license agreements.</PARA>
<PARA>Products covered by and information contained in this publication are controlled by U.S. Export Control
laws and may be subject to the export or import laws in other countries. Nuclear,
missile, chemical or biological weapons or nuclear maritime end uses or end users,
whether direct or indirect, are strictly prohibited. Export or reexport to countries
subject to U.S. embargo or to entities identified on U.S. export exclusion lists,
including, but not limited to, the denied persons and specially designated nationals
lists is strictly prohibited.</PARA>
<PARA>DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED &ldquo;AS IS&rdquo; AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT,
ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.</PARA><?Entity End legal.sgm><?Entity Ref fr-legal><?Entity Start fr-legal.sgm><?Pub CX book(title()bookinfo(bookbiblio()legalnotice(para()>
<PARA LANG="FR"></PARA>
<PARA>Sun Microsystems, Inc. d&eacute;tient les droits de propri&eacute;t&eacute;
intellectuelle relatifs &agrave; la technologie incorpor&eacute;e dans
le produit qui est
d&eacute;crit dans ce document. En particulier, et ce sans limitation,
ces droits de
propri&eacute;t&eacute; intellectuelle peuvent inclure un ou plusieurs
brevets am&eacute;ricains ou des
applications de brevet en attente aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres
pays.</PARA>
<PARA>Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants
d&eacute;velopp&eacute;s par des tierces personnes.</PARA>
<PARA>Certaines composants de ce produit peuvent &ecirc;tre
d&eacute;riv&eacute;es du logiciel Berkeley BSD, licenci&eacute;s par
l'Universit&eacute; de
Californie. UNIX est une marque d&eacute;pos&eacute;e aux Etats-Unis et
dans d'autres pays; elle est
licenci&eacute;e exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd. </PARA>
<PARA>Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, le logo Solaris, le logo Java
Coffee Cup, docs.sun.com, <?Entity Ref sun-trademarks><?Entity Start sun-trademarks.sgm>
<?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo(authorgroup()pubsnumber()releaseinfo()pubdate()publisher()copyright()abstract()legalnotice(para()para(><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin">
  <?Pub *0000000913 0><?Entity End sun-trademarks.sgm>
 Java et Solaris sont des
marques de fabrique ou des marques d&eacute;pos&eacute;es
de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Toutes
les marques
SPARC sont utilis&eacute;es sous licence et sont des marques de fabrique
ou des
marques d&eacute;pos&eacute;es de SPARC International, Inc. aux
Etats-Unis et dans
d'autres pays. Les produits portant les marques SPARC sont bas&eacute;s
sur une
architecture d&eacute;velopp&eacute;e par Sun Microsystems, Inc.<?Entity Ref fr-other-trademarks><?Entity Start fr-other-trademarks.sgm>
<?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo(authorgroup()pubsnumber()releaseinfo()pubdate()publisher()copyright()abstract()legalnotice(para()para(><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin">
    <?Pub *0000000554 0><?Entity End fr-other-trademarks.sgm></PARA>
<PARA>L'interface d'utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et
<TRADEMARK>Sun</TRADEMARK> a &eacute;t&eacute;
d&eacute;velopp&eacute;e par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses
utilisateurs et
licenci&eacute;s. Sun reconna&icirc;t les efforts de pionniers de Xerox
pour la
recherche et le d&eacute;veloppement du concept des interfaces
d'utilisation
visuelle ou graphique pour l'industrie de l'informatique. Sun
d&eacute;tient une licence non exclusive de Xerox sur
l'interface d'utilisation graphique Xerox, cette licence couvrant
&eacute;galement les
licenci&eacute;s de Sun qui mettent en place l'interface d'utilisation
graphique OPEN LOOK et
qui, en outre, se conforment aux licences &eacute;crites de Sun.</PARA>
<PARA>Les produits qui font l'objet de cette publication et les
informations qu'il contient sont r&eacute;gis par la legislation
am&eacute;ricaine en mati&egrave;re de contr&ocirc;le des exportations et peuvent &ecirc;tre soumis au droit
d'autres pays dans le domaine des exportations et importations. Les utilisations finales, ou
utilisateurs finaux, pour des armes nucl&eacute;aires, des missiles, des armes
chimiques ou biologiques ou pour le nucl&eacute;aire maritime, directement ou
indirectement, sont strictement interdites. Les exportations ou r&eacute;exportations vers
des pays sous embargo des Etats-Unis, ou vers des entit&eacute;s figurant sur les
listes d'exclusion d'exportation am&eacute;ricaines, y compris, mais de mani&egrave;re non
exclusive, la liste de personnes qui font objet d'un ordre de ne pas participer, d'une fa&ccedil;on
directe ou
indirecte, aux exportations des produits ou des services qui sont
r&eacute;gis par la
legislation am&eacute;ricaine en mati&egrave;re de contr&ocirc;le des
exportations et la
liste de ressortissants sp&eacute;cifiquement design&eacute;s, sont
rigoureusement interdites.</PARA>
<PARA>LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE "EN L'ETAT" ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS,
DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES,
DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT
TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L'APTITUDE A UNE
UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON. </PARA><?Entity End fr-legal.sgm>
</LEGALNOTICE>
<SUBJECTSET>
<SUBJECT>
<SUBJECTTERM>Installation &amp; Setup</SUBJECTTERM>
</SUBJECT>
</SUBJECTSET>
</BOOKINFO><?Entity Ref preface><?Entity Start preface.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<PREFACE ID="PREFACE-1"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="lynnet" fullname=""><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Preface</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This book describes how to install and upgrade the <TRADEMARK>Solaris</TRADEMARK> Operating
System (OS) on both networked and nonnetworked <TRADEMARK CLASS="REGISTERED">SPARC</TRADEMARK> and x86 architecture based systems. This book covers using the
custom JumpStart installation method and the creation of RAID-1 volumes during
installation.</PARA>
<PARA>This book does not include instructions about how to set up system hardware
or other peripherals.</PARA><?Entity Ref platformnote><?Entity Start platformnote.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX book(title()bookinfo()preface(title()highlights(para()>
<NOTE>
<PARA>This <TRADEMARK>Solaris</TRADEMARK> release
supports systems that use the <TRADEMARK CLASS="REGISTERED">SPARC</TRADEMARK> and
x86  families of processor architectures:  <TRADEMARK CLASS="REGISTERED">UltraSPARC</TRADEMARK>, SPARC64, AMD64, Pentium, and Xeon EM64T. The supported systems appear
in the <CITETITLE>Solaris 10 Hardware Compatibility List</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/hcl" TYPE="URL"></ULINK>. This document cites any implementation differences
between the platform types.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>In this document these x86 related terms mean the following:</PARA>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>&ldquo;x86&rdquo; refers to the larger family of 64-bit and 
32-bit x86 compatible products.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>&ldquo;x64&rdquo; points out specific 64-bit information about
AMD64 or EM64T systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>&ldquo;32-bit x86&rdquo; points out specific 32-bit information about
x86 based systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>For supported systems, see the <CITETITLE>Solaris 10 Hardware Compatibility List</CITETITLE>.</PARA>
</NOTE><?Pub *0000001230 0><?Entity End platformnote.sgm>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="PREFACE-9">
<TITLE ID="PREFACE-2">Who Should Use This Book</TITLE>
<PARA>This book is intended for system administrators responsible for installing
the Solaris OS. This book provides both of the following types of information.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Advanced Solaris installation information for enterprise system
administrators who manage multiple Solaris machines in a networked environment </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Basic Solaris installation information for system administrators
who perform infrequent Solaris installations or upgrades</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREFACE-5">
<TITLE>Related Books</TITLE>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="GETSL">
<TITLE>Are You a Developer Installing
on a Single System?</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Information</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need system requirements or other planning information, such
as how to partition or backup your system?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><CITETITLE><ULINK URL="http://developers.sun.com/sxde/sys_req.jsp" TYPE="TEXT">x86: Solaris
Express Developer Edition Getting Started</ULINK></CITETITLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need step-by-step installation instructions?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLDEVELINSTALL"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Developer Edition Installation Guide: Laptop Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need a roadmap to learn about the numerous interfaces, frameworks,
and tools to take advantage of Solaris technologies?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com/" TYPE="TEXT">Introduction to the Solaris
Development Environment</ULINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need troubleshooting information?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLDEVERN"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Developer Edition Release Notes</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREFACE-TBL-3">Table P&ndash;2</OLINK> lists documentation
for system administrators.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="PREFACE-TBL-3">
<TITLE>Are You a System
Administrator Who is Installing Solaris?</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN3" COLWIDTH="191*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="160.00*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Information</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need system requirements or high-level planning information?
Or want a  high-level overview of GRUB based booting, Solaris Zones partitioning
technology, or creating RAID-1 volumes?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="0">
<PARA>Do you need to install a single system from DVD or CD media? The Solaris
installation program steps you through an installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLARISINSTALL"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Basic Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need to upgrade or patch your system with almost no downtime?
 Save system downtime when upgrading by using Solaris Live Upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="0">
<PARA>Do you need to install a secure installation over the network or Internet?
 	Use WAN boot to install a remote client. Or, do you need to install over
the network from a network installation image?	The Solaris installation
program steps you through an installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need to install or patch multiple systems quickly? 	Use Solaris
Flash software to create a Solaris Flash archive and install a copy of the
OS on clone systems.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLFLASH"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and Installation)</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY ROWSEP="0">
<PARA>Do you need to back up your system?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="0">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SAGDFS" TARGETPTR="BKUPCONCEPTS-57422">Chapter 23, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Backing Up and Restoring File Systems (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need troubleshooting information, a list of known problems, or
a list of patches for this release?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><CITETITLE>Solaris Release Notes</CITETITLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need to verify that your system works on Solaris?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>SPARC: <CITETITLE>Solaris Sun Hardware Platform Guide</CITETITLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need to check on which packages have been added, removed, or
changed in this release?</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><CITETITLE>Solaris Package List</CITETITLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW ROWSEP="0">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Do you need to verify that your system and devices work with Solaris
SPARC and x86 based systems and other third-party vendors.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ULINK URL="http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/hcl" TYPE="TEXT">Solaris Hardware
Compatibility List for x86 Platforms</ULINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1><?Entity Ref sundocs><?Entity Start sundocs.sgm><?Pub CX book(title()bookinfo()preface(title()highlights()sect1()>
<SECT1>
<TITLE>Documentation, Support,
and Training</TITLE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The Sun web site provides information
about the following additional
resources:</PARA>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><ULINK URL="http://www.sun.com/documentation/" TYPE="TEXT_URL">Documentation</ULINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><ULINK URL="http://www.sun.com/support/" TYPE="TEXT_URL">Support</ULINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><ULINK URL="http://www.sun.com/training/" TYPE="TEXT_URL">Training</ULINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT1><?Pub *0000001210 0><?Entity End sundocs.sgm><?Entity Ref typeconv><?Entity Start typeconv.sgm><?Pub CX book(title()bookinfo()preface(title()highlights()sect1()>
<SECT1>
<TITLE>Typographic
Conventions</TITLE>
<PARA>The following table describes the typographic
conventions that are used in this book.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="FWBJP">
<TITLE>Typographic
Conventions</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="80*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="179*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="137*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY ALIGN="LEFT">
<PARA>Typeface</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ALIGN="LEFT">
<PARA>Meaning</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ALIGN="LEFT">
<PARA>Example</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>AaBbCc123</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The names of commands, files, and directories,
and onscreen computer output</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Edit your <FILENAME>.login</FILENAME> file. </PARA>
<PARA>Use <COMMAND>ls <OPTION>a</OPTION></COMMAND> to
list all files. </PARA>
<PARA><COMPUTEROUTPUT>machine_name% you have
mail.</COMPUTEROUTPUT></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><USERINPUT>AaBbCc123</USERINPUT></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>What you type, contrasted with onscreen
computer output</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><COMPUTEROUTPUT>machine_name%</COMPUTEROUTPUT> <USERINPUT>su</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><COMPUTEROUTPUT>Password:</COMPUTEROUTPUT></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>aabbcc123</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Placeholder: replace with a real name
or value</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The command to remove a file is <COMMAND>rm</COMMAND> <REPLACEABLE>filename</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><EMPHASIS>AaBbCc123</EMPHASIS></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Book titles, new terms, and terms to
be emphasized</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Read Chapter 6 in the <CITETITLE>User's
Guide</CITETITLE>. </PARA>
<PARA>A <EMPHASIS>cache</EMPHASIS> is a copy
that is stored locally.</PARA>
<PARA>Do <EMPHASIS>not</EMPHASIS> save the
file.</PARA>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Note:</EMPHASIS> Some
emphasized items appear bold online.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="FWBSD">
<TITLE>Shell Prompts
in Command Examples</TITLE>
<PARA>The following table shows the default <TRADEMARK CLASS="REGISTERED">UNIX</TRADEMARK> system
prompt and superuser prompt for the C shell,
Bourne shell, and Korn shell.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="FWBSZ">
<TITLE>Shell
Prompts</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="198*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="198*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Shell</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Prompt</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>C shell</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>machine_name%</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>C shell for superuser</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>machine_name#</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Bourne shell and Korn shell</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>$</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Bourne shell and Korn shell for superuser</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1><?Pub *0000003359 0><?Entity End typeconv.sgm>
</PREFACE><?Pub *0000008047 0><?Entity End preface.sgm>
<PART ID="EPUCY">
<TITLE>Using Custom JumpStart</TITLE>
<PARTINTRO>
<PARA>This part provides instructions for creating, preparing, and performing
custom JumpStart installations.</PARA>
</PARTINTRO><?Entity Ref introduction><?Entity Start introduction.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<CHAPTER ID="INTRO-1"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="lynnet" fullname=""><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist">
<TITLE>Where to Find Solaris Installation Planning
Information</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This book provides information on how to use the automated JumpStart
installation program to install the Solaris operating system. This book provides
all you need to know about installing with the JumpStart program, but a planning
book in our collection of installation documentation might be useful to read
before you begin preparing for a JumpStart installation. The following references
provide useful information before you install your system.</PARA>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="GDLYQ">
<TITLE>Where to Find Planning and System Requirement Information</TITLE>
<PARA>The <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK> provides system requirements and high-level planning information, such
as planning guidelines for file systems, and upgrade planning and much more.
This section provides an overview of the chapters for this book.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="100">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="61.61*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="38.39*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Chapter Descriptions From the Planning Guide</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Reference</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>This chapter describes new features in the Solaris installation programs.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="GAUFD">Chapter 2, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">What&rsquo;s New in Solaris Installation,</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>This chapter provides you with information about decisions you need
to make before you install or upgrade the Solaris OS. Examples are deciding
when to use a network installation image or DVD media and descriptions of
all the Solaris installation programs.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="PLANNING-8">Chapter 3, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Roadmap),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>This chapter describes system requirements to install or upgrade to
the Solaris OS. General guidelines for planning the disk space and default
swap space allocation are also provided. Upgrade limitations are also described.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="DISKSPACE-1">Chapter 4, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">System Requirements, Guidelines, and Upgrade (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>This chapter contains checklists to help you gather all of the information
that you need to install or upgrade your system. This information is useful,
for example, if you are performing an interactive installation. You'll have
all the information in the checklist that you'll need to do an interactive
installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="GATHERINFO-1">Chapter 5, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Gathering Information Before Installation or Upgrade (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>These chapters provide overviews of several technologies that relate
to a Solaris OS installation or upgrade. Guidelines and requirements related
to these technologies are also included. These chapters include information
about GRUB based booting, Solaris Zones partitioning technology, and RAID-1
volumes that can be created at installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="EPUCS">Part&nbsp;II, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Understanding Installations That Relate to GRUB, Solaris Zones, and RAID-1 Volumes,</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000005125 0><?Entity End introduction.sgm><?Entity Ref jumpstartoverview><?Entity Start jumpstartoverview.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()>
<CHAPTER ID="JUMPSTARTOVERVIEW-4"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on"
ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="lynnet"
fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<TITLE>Custom JumpStart (Overview)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter provides an introduction and overview to the custom JumpStart
installation process.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTOVERVIEW-1">Custom JumpStart Introduction</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-3">How the JumpStart Program
Installs Solaris Software</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="JUMPSTARTOVERVIEW-1">
<TITLE>Custom JumpStart Introduction</TITLE>
<PARA>The custom JumpStart installation method is a command&ndash;line interface
that enables you to automatically install or upgrade several systems, based
on profiles that you create. The profiles define specific software installation
requirements. You can also incorporate shell scripts to include preinstallation
and postinstallation tasks. You choose which profile and scripts to use for
installation or upgrade. The custom JumpStart installation method installs
or upgrades the system, based on the profile and scripts that you select.
Also, you can use a <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file to specify configuration
information so that the custom JumpStart installation is completely hands-off.</PARA>
<SECT2 ID="FXJWW">
<TITLE>Custom JumpStart Example Scenario</TITLE>
<PARA>The custom JumpStart process can be described by using an example scenario.
In this example scenario, the systems need to be set up with the following
parameters:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Install Solaris on 100 new systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Seventy of the systems are SPARC based systems that are owned
by the engineering group and need to be installed as standalone systems with
the Solaris OS software group for developers.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The remaining 30 systems are x86 based, owned by the marketing
group and need to be installed as standalone systems with the Solaris OS software
group for end users.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>First, the system administrator must create a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
and a profile for each group of systems. The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
is a text file that contains a rule for each group of systems or single systems
on which you want to install the Solaris software. Each rule distinguishes
a group of systems that are based on one or more system attributes. Each rule
also links each group to a profile.</PARA>
<PARA>A profile is a text file that defines how the Solaris software is to
be installed on each system in the group. Both the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
and profile must be located in a JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<PARA>For the example scenario, the system administrator creates a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file that contains two different rules, one for the engineering
group and another for the marketing group. For each rule, the system's network
number is used to distinguish the engineering group from the marketing group.</PARA>
<PARA>Each rule also contains a link to an appropriate profile. For example,
in the rule for the engineering group, a link is added to the profile, <FILENAME>eng_profile</FILENAME>, which was created for the engineering group. In the
rule for the marketing group, a link is added to the profile, <LITERAL>market_profile</LITERAL>, which was created for the marketing group.</PARA>
<PARA>You can save the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and the profiles on
a diskette or on a server. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A profile diskette is required when you want to perform custom
JumpStart installations on nonnetworked, standalone systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A profile server is used when you want to perform custom JumpStart
installations on networked systems that have access to a server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>After creating the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and profiles, validate
the files with the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script. If the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
runs successfully, the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file is created. The <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> is a generated version of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
that the JumpStart program uses to install the Solaris software.</PARA>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-3">
<TITLE>How the JumpStart Program Installs Solaris
Software</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX256">
<PRIMARY>standalone systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>custom JumpStart installation example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX257">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>nonnetworked</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX258">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>standalone system</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>After you validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and the
profiles, you can begin a custom JumpStart installation. The JumpStart program
reads the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file. Then, the JumpStart program
searches for the first rule with defined system attributes that match the
system on which the JumpStart program is attempting to install the Solaris
software. If a match occurs, the JumpStart program uses the profile that is
specified in the rule to install the Solaris software on the system.</PARA>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-FIG-2">Figure 2&ndash;1</OLINK> illustrates
how a custom JumpStart installation works on a standalone, nonnetworked system.
The system administrator initiates the custom JumpStart installation on Pete's
system. The JumpStart program accesses the rules files on the diskette in
the system's diskette drive. The JumpStart program matches <FILENAME>rule
2</FILENAME> to the system. <FILENAME>rule 2</FILENAME> specifies that the
JumpStart program use <FILENAME>Pete's profile</FILENAME> to install the Solaris
software. The JumpStart program reads <FILENAME>Pete's profile</FILENAME> and
installs the Solaris software, based on the instructions that the system administrator
specified in <FILENAME>Pete's profile</FILENAME>. </PARA><?XPP [qa][vb]>
<FIGURE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-FIG-2">
<TITLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-59497">How a Custom
JumpStart Installation Works: nonnetworked Example</TITLE>
<MEDIAOBJECT>
<IMAGEOBJECT>
<IMAGEDATA ENTITYREF="fig169.epsi">
</IMAGEOBJECT>
<TEXTOBJECT>
<SIMPARA>The context describes the illustration.</SIMPARA>
</TEXTOBJECT>
</MEDIAOBJECT>
</FIGURE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX259">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>networked</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX260">
<PRIMARY>network installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>custom JumpStart installation, example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-FIG-3">Figure 2&ndash;2</OLINK> illustrates
how a custom JumpStart installation works with more than one system on a network.
 Previously, the system administrator set up different profiles and saved
the profiles on a single server. The system administrator initiates the custom
JumpStart installation on one of the engineering systems. The JumpStart program
accesses the rules files in the <FILENAME>JumpStart/</FILENAME> directory
on the server. The JumpStart program matches the engineering system to <FILENAME>rule 1</FILENAME>. <FILENAME>rule 1</FILENAME> specifies that the JumpStart
program use <FILENAME>Engineering Group's Profile</FILENAME> to install the
Solaris software. The JumpStart program reads <FILENAME>Engineering Group's
Profile</FILENAME> and installs the Solaris software, based on the instructions
that the system administrator specified in <FILENAME>Engineering Group's Profile</FILENAME>. </PARA>
<FIGURE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-FIG-3">
<TITLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-38900">How a Custom
JumpStart Installation Works: Networked Example</TITLE>
<MEDIAOBJECT>
<IMAGEOBJECT>
<IMAGEDATA ENTITYREF="fig168.epsi" WIDTH="100">
</IMAGEOBJECT>
<TEXTOBJECT>
<SIMPARA>The context describes the illustration.</SIMPARA>
</TEXTOBJECT>
</MEDIAOBJECT>
</FIGURE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX255">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>overview</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX238">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>preparing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX239">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX240">
<PRIMARY>preparing for installation, with custom JumpStart</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX241">
<PRIMARY>root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX242">
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>profile examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX243">
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>profile examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX244">
<PRIMARY>swap file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-FIG-1">Figure 2&ndash;3</OLINK> describes
the order in which the JumpStart program searches for custom JumpStart files. </PARA>
<FIGURE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-FIG-1">
<TITLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-99104">What Happens
During a Custom JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<MEDIAOBJECT>
<IMAGEOBJECT>
<IMAGEDATA ENTITYREF="fig167.epsi">
</IMAGEOBJECT>
<TEXTOBJECT>
<SIMPARA>The flow diagram shows the order in which the custom
JumpStart program searches for files.</SIMPARA>
</TEXTOBJECT>
</MEDIAOBJECT>
</FIGURE>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000010445 0><?Entity End jumpstartoverview.sgm><?Entity Ref preparecustom><?Entity Start preparecustom.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<CHAPTER ID="PREPARECUSTOM-56440"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="off" ref="3"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations
(Tasks)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter provides step-by-step instructions about how  to prepare
the systems at your site from which and on which you intend to install the
Solaris software by using the custom JumpStart installation method.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-21142">Task Map: Preparing
Custom JumpStart Installations</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-88630">Creating a Profile
Server for Networked Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53074">Creating a Profile
Diskette for Standalone Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56059">Creating the rules
File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53442">Creating a Profile</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25808">Testing a Profile</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-50536">Validating the rules
File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-21142">
<TITLE>Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart
Installations</TITLE>
<TABLE FRAME="ALL" PGWIDE="1" ID="PREPARECUSTOM-TBL-9">
<TITLE>Task Map: Preparing
Custom JumpStart Installations</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="33*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="33*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="33*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Task</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>For Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Decide how to upgrade the system if a previous version of the Solaris
software is installed on the system.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>If a previous release of Solaris is installed on the system, you need
to determine how to upgrade the system. Ensure that you know what to do before
and after you upgrade a system.  Planning helps you to create your profiles,
begin scripts, and finish scripts.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="EMYAQ"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY MOREROWS="1" COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Create a JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="0">
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">On a server</EMPHASIS></PARA>
<PARA>If you want to perform custom JumpStart installations on systems that
are connected to a network, you must create a profile server. The profile
server  contains a JumpStart directory for the custom JumpStart files. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="0">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-88630">Creating a Profile Server for
Networked Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">On a diskette</EMPHASIS></PARA>
<PARA>If you want to perform custom JumpStart installations on systems that
are not connected to a network, you must create a profile diskette. A profile
diskette contains the custom JumpStart files.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53074">Creating a Profile Diskette for
Standalone Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Add rules to the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>After you decide how you want each group of systems or single systems
to be installed, create a rule for each group that you want to install. Each
rule distinguishes a group, based on one or more system attributes. The rule
links each group to a profile. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56059">Creating the rules File</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Create a profile for every rule.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>A profile is a text file that defines how to install the Solaris software,
for example, which software group to install on a system. Every rule specifies
a profile to define how a system is to be installed with the Solaris software
when the rule is matched. You usually create a different profile for every
rule. However, the same profile can be used in more than one rule.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53442">Creating a Profile</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Test the profiles.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>After you create a profile, use the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PFINSTALL-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pfinstall</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command to test the profile
before you use the profile to install or upgrade a system.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25808">Testing a Profile</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>The <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file is a generated version of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file that the JumpStart program uses to match the system
to be installed with a profile. You must use the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
to validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-50536">Validating the rules File</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-88630">
<TITLE>Creating a Profile Server for Networked
Systems</TITLE>
<PARA>When setting up custom JumpStart installations for systems on the network,
you need to create a directory on a server that is called a JumpStart directory.
The JumpStart directory contains all of the essential custom JumpStart files,
for example, the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file,
and profiles. You must save the JumpStart directory in the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
directory of the profile server.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX344">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart
directory, on server</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX345">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>server</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX346">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart
directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>sharing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX347">
<PRIMARY>servers</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart directory
creation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX348">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>permissions</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX349">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>permissions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX350">
<PRIMARY>permissions</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The server that contains a JumpStart directory is called a profile
server. A profile server can be the same system as an install server or a
boot server, or the server can be a completely different server. A profile
server can provide custom JumpStart files for different platforms. For example,
an x86 server can provide custom JumpStart files for both SPARC based systems
and x86 based systems. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>After you create a profile server, you must allow systems to access
the server. For detailed instructions, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-12">To
Allow All Systems Access to the Profile Server</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-29356">
<TITLE>To Create a JumpStart Directory on a
Server</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<NOTE>
<PARA>This procedure assumes that the system is running removable media services.
If you have questions about removable media services that manage discs, refer
to <OLINK TARGETDOC="SAGDFS"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems</CITETITLE></OLINK> for detailed information.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP>
<PARA>Locate the server on which you want to create the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</STEP><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-37">
<PARA>Create the JumpStart directory anywhere
on the server.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>mkdir -m 755 <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>In the command, <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE> is the
absolute path of the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<PARA>For example, the following
command creates a directory that is called <FILENAME>jumpstart</FILENAME> in
the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) directory and sets the permissions to 755:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>mkdir -m 755 /jumpstart</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-38A">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX351A">
<PRIMARY>dfstab
file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX352A">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>sharing directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX353A">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="etc/dfs/dfstab file"><FILENAME>/etc/dfs/dfstab</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX354A">
<PRIMARY>share command</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>sharing JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX357A">
<PRIMARY>shareall command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX357B">
<PRIMARY>sharemgr command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX355A">
<PRIMARY>sharing JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use either the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility or the <COMPUTEROUTPUT>share</COMPUTEROUTPUT> command as follows:</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Starting with the 5/07 Developer release,</EMPHASIS> the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility introduces the concept of share groups. See <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV4" TARGETPTR="GCRVU"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">sharemgr Command</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Network Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Using the <COMMAND>share</COMMAND> command, edit the <FILENAME>/etc/dfs/dfstab</FILENAME> file by adding the following entry.</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA>For example, the following entry shares the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory:</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 /jumpstart</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA>Then, type <COMMAND>shareall</COMMAND> and press
Enter.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Using the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility, enter the following
commands:</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr add-share</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart default</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr set</USERINPUT> <OPTION>P</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>nfs</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>S</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>sys</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>p</OPTION> <USERINPUT>ro="*"</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart default</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr set</USERINPUT> <OPTION>P</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>nfs</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>p</OPTION> <USERINPUT>anon=0</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart
default</USERINPUT></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-41">
<PARA>Determine if you want to copy examples
of custom JumpStart files to your JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-10">Step&nbsp;8</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, use the following decision table to determine what
to do next.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="1">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="132*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="264*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Example Locations</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW ROWSEP="0">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD for your platform</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD into the server's
CD-ROM drive.</PARA>
<PARA>Removable media services automatically
mounts the CD or DVD.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX358">
<PRIMARY>changing directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>to image of Solaris software on local disk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX359">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>changing</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>to image of Solaris software on local disk</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>changing directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>to image of Solaris software
on local disk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>An image of the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD
for your platform on a local disk   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Change directory to the location of the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 image.
For example, type the following command:</PARA>
<SCREEN>cd /export/install</SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-43">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX366">
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files to
JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX367">
<PRIMARY>copying</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart installation files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX368">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>copying installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX369">
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX370">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>copying</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart installation
files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>copying installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Copy the example custom
JumpStart files into the JumpStart directory on the profile server. </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp -r <REPLACEABLE>media_path</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>media_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the CD, DVD, or image on the local disk</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path on the profile server where you are placing the example
custom JumpStart files</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>For example, the following command copies the <FILENAME>jumpstart_sample</FILENAME> directory
into the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory on the profile server:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For SPARC based systems:</PARA>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>cp -r /media/cdrom/s0/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /jumpstart</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For x86 based systems:</PARA>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>cp -r /media/cdrom/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /jumpstart</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-9A">
<PARA>Update the example JumpStart files
so that the files work in your environment.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-10">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the JumpStart directory and that the permissions are set to 755.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-11A">
<PARA>Allow systems on the network to access
the profile server.</PARA>
<PARA>For detailed instructions, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-12">To Allow All Systems Access to the Profile Server</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="FXJXQ">
<TITLE>Allowing All Systems Access to the Profile Server</TITLE>
<PARA>When you create a profile server, you must ensure that systems can access
the JumpStart directory on the profile server during a custom JumpStart installation.
Use one of the following ways to ensure access.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="100">
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="1">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="146.37*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="278.68*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="234.96*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Command or File</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Providing Access</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW ROWSEP="0">
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="FXJQK">
<PRIMARY>add_install_client command</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart directory access</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Each time that you add a system for network installation, use the <OPTION>c</OPTION> option with the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command to
specify the profile server. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you are not using NFS, then you must use another means to provide
access.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For SPARC based systems</EMPHASIS>,
use the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For x86 based systems</EMPHASIS>,
edit the GRUB menu</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For DVD media, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALLDVD-40778"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a DVD Image</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For CD media, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALL-40778"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a CD Image</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY MOREROWS="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Specify the location of the JumpStart directory when you boot the system</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For SPARC based systems</EMPHASIS>,
use the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command to boot the system. Specify the location
of the JumpStart directory on the profile server when you boot the system.
You must compress the custom JumpStart configuration files into one file.
Then, save the compressed configuration file on an HTTP or HTTPS server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-4">Creating a Compressed
Configuration File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-55">Step&nbsp;5</OLINK> in <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-721">To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the
Custom JumpStart Program</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For x86 based systems</EMPHASIS>,
specify the location of the JumpStart directory on the profile server when
you boot the system by editing the boot entry on the GRUB menu.  You must
compress the custom JumpStart configuration files into one file. Then, save
the compressed configuration file on an HTTP or HTTPS server. </PARA>
<PARA>When
you edit the GRUB menu entry, specify the location of the compressed file. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-4">Creating a Compressed
Configuration File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="FXBNH">Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation
by Editing the GRUB Boot Command</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Add a wildcard in the <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-12">To Allow All Systems Access to the
Profile Server</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-12">
<TITLE>To Allow All Systems Access to the Profile
Server</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="GBEUQ">
<PRIMARY>diskettes</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart
directory access</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use the following procedure only if
you store network installation information in the following places: </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>In the <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>In the naming service <FILENAME>bootparams</FILENAME> database.
To update the <FILENAME>bootparams</FILENAME> database, add the entry that
is  shown in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-46">Step&nbsp;3</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>If you use the following procedure, the systems must be of the same
type, such as all SPARC systems.</PARA>
<PARA>Do not use this procedure under the following conditions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you save the JumpStart directory on a diskette.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify the location of the profile server when you
boot the system. If you have systems of different architectures, you must
specify the location of the profile server when you boot the system</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>If you have the above conditions, use the SPARC <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command
or use the x86 GRUB menu.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You also can store network installation information on a DHCP
server.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For SPARC based systems</EMPHASIS>,
you use the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command and the <OPTION>d</OPTION> option
to specify that the custom JumpStart program use the DHCP server. Or you use
the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command with the <COMMAND>dhcp</COMMAND> option
to specify that the custom JumpStart program use the DHCP server. For instructions
about using this option, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-10">Command Reference
for the boot Command</OLINK>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For x86 based systems</EMPHASIS>,
you use dhcp in one of the following ways:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you use an install server, use the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command and the <OPTION>d</OPTION> option to specify that the custom
JumpStart program use the DHCP server with PXE.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You can edit the GRUB entry on the GRUB menu and add the dhcp
option. For instructions about editing the GRUB entry, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="FXBNH">Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation by Editing the
GRUB Boot Command</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-45">
<PARA>On the installation or boot server,
log in as superuser.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-27A">
<PARA>Use a text editor to open <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-46">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX378">
<PRIMARY>install_config command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX379">
<PRIMARY>bootparams file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>enabling
JumpStart directory access</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX380">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="etc/bootparams file"><FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>enabling JumpStart directory access</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Add this entry. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">* install_config=<REPLACEABLE>server:jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>*</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A wildcard character that specifies that all systems have
access</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The host name of the profile server where the JumpStart directory
is located</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The absolute path of the JumpStart directory</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>For example, the following entry enables all systems to access the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory on the profile server that is named <LITERAL>sherlock</LITERAL>:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">* install_config=sherlock:/jumpstart</PROGRAMLISTING>
<CAUTION>
<PARA>Use of this procedure might produce the following error message
when an installation client is booted: </PARA>
<PARA><ERRORNAME>WARNING: getfile:
RPC failed: error 5: (RPC Timed out).</ERRORNAME></PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX381">
<PRIMARY>getfile: RPC failed: error 5: RPC Timed
out message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX382">
<PRIMARY>RPC
failed: error 5: RPC Timed out message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX383">
<PRIMARY>RPC Timed out message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX384">
<PRIMARY>install_config command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-2">Booting From the Network, Error Messages</OLINK> contains
details about this error message.  </PARA>
</CAUTION>
<PARA>All systems can now access the profile server. </PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-53074">
<TITLE>Creating a Profile Diskette for Standalone
Systems</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX263">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>creating for systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX264">
<PRIMARY>diskettes</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>x86: JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX265">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>diskette for x86 based systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>A
diskette that contains a JumpStart directory is called a profile diskette.
A system that is not connected to the network does not have access to a profile
server.  As a result, you must create a JumpStart directory on a diskette
if a system is not connected to a network. The system on which you create
a profile diskette must have a diskette drive. </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX266">
<PRIMARY>permissions</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX267">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>permissions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX268">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>permissions</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>The
JumpStart directory contains all of the essential custom JumpStart files,
for example, the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file,
and profiles. You must save the JumpStart directory in the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
directory of the profile diskette.</PARA>
<PARA>See one of the following procedures:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-55190">To Create a Profile
Diskette</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-19234">To Create a Profile
Diskette With GRUB</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-55190" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>To Create a Profile Diskette</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<NOTE>
<PARA>This procedure assumes that the system
is running removable media services. If you have questions about removable
media services that manage discs, refer to <OLINK TARGETDOC="SAGDFS"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems</CITETITLE></OLINK> for
detailed information.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-22A">
<PARA>Locate a SPARC based system to which
a diskette drive is attached.</PARA>
</STEP><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-23A">
<PARA>Insert a blank diskette or a diskette
that can be overwritten in the diskette drive.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-24">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX315">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="volcheck command"><COMMAND>volcheck</COMMAND> command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Mount the diskette. </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>volcheck</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-25">
<PARA>Determine if the diskette contains
a UNIX file system (UFS).</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX317">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>/etc/mnttab</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX318">
<PRIMARY>mnttab file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Examine
the contents of the file <FILENAME>/etc/mnttab</FILENAME> on the system for
an entry such as the following: </PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">/vol/dev/diskette0/scrap  /floppy/scrap  ufs  suid,rw,largefiles,dev=1740008  927147040</SCREEN>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the entry exists, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-17">Step&nbsp;7</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the entry does not exist, go to the next step.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-27">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX322">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>UFS</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX323">
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>UFS
creation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX324">
<PRIMARY>UFS</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Create a UFS on the diskette.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>newfs /vol/dev/aliases/floppy0</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-17">
<PARA>Determine if you want to copy examples
of custom JumpStart files to your JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-13">Step&nbsp;10</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, use the following decision table to determine what
to do next.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="1">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="132*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="264*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Example Locations</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW ROWSEP="0">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD into the
server's CD-ROM drive.</PARA>
<PARA>Removable media services automatically
mounts the CD or DVD.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>changing directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY> image
of Solaris <EMPHASIS>SPARC </EMPHASIS> software on local disk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>changing</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>to image of Solaris <EMPHASIS>SPARC</EMPHASIS> software on local
disk</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>An image of the Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD on
a local disk</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Change the directory to the location of the Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD image.
For example, type the following command:</PARA>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>cd /export/install</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-18">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample
directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files to JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>copying</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart installation
files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>copying installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Copy the example custom
JumpStart files into the JumpStart directory on the profile diskette.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp -r <REPLACEABLE>media_path</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>media_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the CD, DVD, or image on the local disk</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the profile diskette where you want to place the
example custom JumpStart files</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You must place all custom JumpStart installation files in the
root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) directory on the diskette.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>For example, the following command copies the contents of <FILENAME>jumpstart_sample</FILENAME> on the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD to the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
directory on a profile diskette  that is named <FILENAME>scrap</FILENAME>:</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100"><USERINPUT>cp -r /media/cdrom/s0/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /floppy/scrap</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-19A">
<PARA>Update the example JumpStart files
on the profile diskette so that the files work in your environment.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-13">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the JumpStart directory and that permissions are set to 755.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-28A">
<PARA>Eject the diskette.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>eject floppy</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>You have completed the creation of a profile diskette. You can now update
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and create profiles on the profile diskette
to perform custom JumpStart installations. To continue, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56059">Creating the rules File</OLINK>. </PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-19234" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>To Create a Profile Diskette
With GRUB</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>GRUB based booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating
a profile diskette</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating a profile diskette</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use this procedure
to create a profile diskette with GRUB. A GRUB menu is provided during the
installation procedure that enables the boot process. The GRUB menu replaces
the Solaris Device Configuration Assistant that might have been needed to boot a system in
past releases.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>This procedure assumes that the system is running removable media services.
If you have questions about removable media services that manage discs, refer
to <OLINK TARGETDOC="SAGDFS"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems</CITETITLE></OLINK> for detailed information.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-5">
<PARA>Locate an x86 based system to which
a diskette drive is attached.</PARA>
</STEP><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-10A">
<PARA>Insert a blank diskette or a diskette
that can be overwritten into the diskette drive.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-11">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY SORTAS="volcheck command"><COMMAND>volcheck</COMMAND> command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Mount the diskette. </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>volcheck</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-20">
<PARA>Determine if you want to copy examples
of custom JumpStart files to your JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-21">Step&nbsp;8</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, use the following decision table to determine what
to do next.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="1">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="132*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="264*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Example Locations</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW ROWSEP="0">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD into the
server's CD-ROM drive.</PARA>
<PARA>Removable media services automatically
mounts the DVD or CD.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>changing directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>to image
of Solaris x86 based software on local disk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>changing</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>to
image of Solaris x86 based software on local disk</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>An
image of the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD on a local
disk  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Change directory to the location of the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD image.
For example, type the following:</PARA>
<SCREEN>cd /export/install</SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-21A">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample
directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files to JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>copying</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart installation
files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>copying installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installation files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Copy the example custom
JumpStart files into the JumpStart directory on the profile diskette.    </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp -r <REPLACEABLE>media_path</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>media_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the CD, DVD, or image on the local disk</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the profile diskette where you want to place the
example custom JumpStart files</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You must place all custom JumpStart installation files in the
root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) directory on the profile diskette.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>For example, the following command copies the contents of <FILENAME>jumpstart_sample</FILENAME> on the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD to the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
directory on a profile diskette that is named <FILENAME>scrap</FILENAME>:</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100"><USERINPUT>cp -r /media/cdrom/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /floppy/scrap</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-22B">
<PARA>Update the example JumpStart files
on the profile diskette so that the files work in your environment.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-21">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the JumpStart directory and that permissions are set to 755.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-29">
<PARA>Eject the diskette by clicking Eject
Disk in the File Manager window or by typing <COMMAND>eject floppy</COMMAND> on
the command line.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-30">
<PARA>In the Removable Media Manager dialog
box, click OK.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-31">
<PARA>Manually eject the diskette.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
<TASKRELATED ROLE="SEE-ALSO">
<PARA>You have completed the creation of a profile diskette. Now you can update
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and create profiles on the profile diskette
to perform custom JumpStart installations. To continue, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56059">Creating the rules File</OLINK>. </PARA>
</TASKRELATED>
</TASK>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-56059">
<TITLE>Creating the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX623">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX624">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX622">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rules file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file is a text file that contains
a rule for each group of systems on which you want to install the Solaris
OS. Each rule distinguishes a group of systems that are based on one or more
system attributes. Each rule also links each group to a profile. A profile
is a text file that defines how the Solaris software is to be installed on
each system in the group. For example, the following rule specifies that the
JumpStart program use the information in the <FILENAME>basic_prof</FILENAME> profile
to install any system with the <LITERAL>sun4u</LITERAL> platform group.  </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">karch sun4u - basic_prof -</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file is used to create the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file, which is required for custom JumpStart installations.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX625">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rules file example</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX626">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rules file example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX627">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>If you set up the JumpStart directory by using the procedures
in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53074">Creating a Profile Diskette for
Standalone Systems</OLINK> or <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-88630">Creating
a Profile Server for Networked Systems</OLINK>, an example <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
is already located in the JumpStart directory. The sample <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
contains documentation and some example rules. If you use the sample <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, ensure that you comment out the example rules you do not
intend to use.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<SECT2 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-15667">
<TITLE>Syntax of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX633">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX634">
<PRIMARY>requirements</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
must have the following attributes:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX635">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>naming</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX636">
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rules file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The
file must be assigned the name <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file must contain at least one rule.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file can contain any of the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Commented text</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX638">
<PRIMARY>#</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>in <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX639">
<PRIMARY>comments</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>in <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX640">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>comments
in</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Any text that is included after the <LITERAL>#</LITERAL> symbol
on a line is treated by JumpStart as commented text. If a line begins with
the <LITERAL>#</LITERAL> symbol, the entire line is treated as a comment.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One or more blank lines</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One or more multiline rules</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX641">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>multiple
line rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX642">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>multiple line rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX643">
<PRIMARY>multiple lines in <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX645">
<PRIMARY>backslash
in <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX646">
<PRIMARY>wrapping lines in <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>To continue a single rule onto a new line, include a
backslash character (\) just before pressing Return.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-32674">
<TITLE>To Create a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-70">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX647">
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rules file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX648">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>naming</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use a text editor to create a text file that is named <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME>. Or, open the sample <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file in the JumpStart
directory that you created. </PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-71">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX649">
<PRIMARY>adding</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rules to rules file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX650">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Add a rule in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file for each group
of systems on which you want to install the Solaris software. </PARA>
<PARA>For
a list of <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file keywords and values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-74">Rule Keywords and Values</OLINK>.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX651">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>syntax</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX652">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>syntax</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX653">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>field descriptions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX656">
<PRIMARY>! (exclamation mark) rule field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX657">
<PRIMARY>exclamation mark
(!) rule field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>A rule within a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
must adhere to the following syntax:  </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="80100" ROLE="COMPLETE">!<REPLACEABLE>rule_keyword</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>rule_value</REPLACEABLE> &amp;&amp; !<REPLACEABLE>rule_keyword</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>rule_value</REPLACEABLE> ... <REPLACEABLE>begin</REPLACEABLE>  <REPLACEABLE>profile</REPLACEABLE>  <REPLACEABLE>finish</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>!</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX663">
<PRIMARY>rule_keyword
rule field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>A symbol that is used before a keyword to
indicate negation.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>rule_keyword</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX664">
<PRIMARY>rule_value rule
field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>A predefined lexical unit or word that describes
a general system attribute, such as host name,  <LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL>,
or memory size, <LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL>. <REPLACEABLE>rule_keyword</REPLACEABLE> is
used with the rule value to match a system with the same attribute to a profile.
For the list of rule keywords, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-74">Rule
Keywords and Values</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>rule_value</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX665">
<PRIMARY>logical AND rule
field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX666">
<PRIMARY>AND
rule field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX667">
<PRIMARY>&amp;&amp;
(ampersands) rule field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX668">
<PRIMARY>ampersands (&amp;&amp;) rule field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>A value that
provides the specific system attribute for the corresponding rule keyword.
Rule values are described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-74">Rule Keywords
and Values</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>&amp;&amp;</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX669">
<PRIMARY>Bourne shell
scripts in rule fields</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX670">
<PRIMARY>begin scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule field</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX671">
<PRIMARY>begin rule field, description</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX672">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>Bourne shell scripts in rule fields</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A symbol
you must use to join rule keyword and rule value pairs in the same rule (a
logical AND). During a custom JumpStart installation, a system must match
every pair in the rule before the rule matches.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>begin</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of an optional Bourne shell script that can be executed
before the installation begins. If no begin script exists, you must type a
minus sign (-) in this field. All begin scripts must be located in the JumpStart
directory. </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX673">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule
field</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Information about how to create begin scripts
is presented in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-59707">Creating Begin Scripts</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>profile</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of a text file that defines how the Solaris software
is to be installed on the system when a system matches the rule. The information
in a profile consists of profile keywords and their corresponding profile
values. All profiles must be located in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX674">
<PRIMARY>finish scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule field</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX675">
<PRIMARY>finish rule field, description</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Optional ways
to use the profile field are described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-73438">Using a Site-Specific Installation Program</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-44541">Creating Derived Profiles With a Begin Script</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>finish</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of an optional Bourne shell script that can be executed
after the installation is completed. If no finish script exists, you must
type a minus sign (-) in this field. All finish scripts must be located in
the JumpStart directory. </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX676">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>field
descriptions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Information about how to create finish
scripts is presented in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-44024">Creating Finish
Scripts</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>At the minimum, each rule must contain the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A keyword, a value, and a corresponding profile</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A minus sign (-) in the <REPLACEABLE>begin</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>finish</REPLACEABLE> fields if no begin or finish scripts are specified</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-4">
<PARA>Save the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-14">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and that the permissions are set to 644.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-88417">
<TITLE><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File Example</TITLE>
<PARA>The following example shows several example rules in a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.
Each line has a rule keyword and a valid value for that keyword. The JumpStart
program scans the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file from top to bottom. </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX679">
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching system attributes and profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX680">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching systems
to</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX681">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX682">
<PRIMARY>matching</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>order for rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX683">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching order</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX684">
<PRIMARY><LITERAL>rules.ok</LITERAL> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching order for rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>When
the JumpStart program matches a rule keyword and value with a known system,
the JumpStart program installs the Solaris software that is specified by the
profile that is listed in the profile field.</PARA>
<PARA>For a complete list of <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file limitations,
see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-15667">Syntax of the rules File</OLINK>.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-EX-24">
<TITLE><FILENAME>rule</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100" ROLE="COMPLETE"> # rule keywords and rule values       begin script       profile       finish script
 # -----------------------------       ------------       --------      -------------
  hostname eng-1                       -                  basic_prof    -
  network 192.168.255.255 &amp;&amp; !model \
 'SUNW,Sun-Blade-100'                  -                  net_prof      -
  model SUNW,SPARCstation-LX           -                  lx_prof       complete
  network 192.168.2.0 &amp;&amp; karch i86pc  setup               x86_prof      done
  memsize 64-128 &amp;&amp; arch i386          -                  prog_prof     -
  any   -                              -                  generic_prof  -</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The rule matches if the system's host name is <LITERAL>eng-1</LITERAL>.
The <LITERAL>basic_prof</LITERAL> profile is used to install the Solaris software
on the system that matches the rule.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>network</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The rule matches if the system is on subnet 192.168.255.255
and if the system is <EMPHASIS>not</EMPHASIS> a <TRADEMARK>Sun Blade </TRADEMARK> 100
(<LITERAL>SUNW,Sun-Blade-100</LITERAL>). The <LITERAL>net_prof</LITERAL> profile
is used to install the Solaris software on systems that match this rule. This
rule also provides an example of continuing a single rule onto a new line
by using the backslash character (\).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>model</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The rule matches if the system is a SPARCstation LX. The <LITERAL>lx_prof</LITERAL> profile and the <LITERAL>complete</LITERAL> finish script
are used to install the Solaris software on systems that match this rule.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>network</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The rule matches if the system is on subnet 192.168.2.0 and
is an x86 based sun4u system. The <LITERAL>setup</LITERAL> begin script, the <LITERAL>x864u_prof</LITERAL> profile, and the <LITERAL>done</LITERAL> finish script
are used to install the Solaris software on systems that match the rule.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The rule matches if the system has between 64 and 128 Mbytes
of memory and is an x86 based system. The <LITERAL>prog_prof</LITERAL> profile
is used to install the Solaris software on systems that match the rule.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>any</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The rule matches any system that did not match the previous
rules. The <LITERAL>generic_prof</LITERAL> profile is used to install the
Solaris software on systems that match the rule. If <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> is
used, it should always be the last rule in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-53442">
<TITLE>Creating a Profile</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX392">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profiles</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX393">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX394">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A profile is a text file that
defines how to install the Solaris software on a system. A profile defines
elements of the installation, for example, the software group to install.
Every rule specifies a profile that defines how a system is to be installed.
You can create different profiles for every rule or the same profile can be
used in more than one rule.  </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX395">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A profile consists of one or more profile keywords
and their values. Each profile keyword is a command that controls one aspect
of how the JumpStart program is to install the Solaris software on a system.
For example, the following profile keyword and value specify that the JumpStart
program install the system as a server:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">system_type  server</PROGRAMLISTING>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Sample profiles are already located in the JumpStart directory
if you created the JumpStart directory by using either of these procedures:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-88630">Creating a Profile
Server for Networked Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53074">Creating a Profile
Diskette for Standalone Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
<SECT2 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-26691">
<TITLE>Syntax of Profiles</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX396">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX397">
<PRIMARY>requirements</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A profile must contain
the following: </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX398">
<PRIMARY>install_type
profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>requirement</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX399">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>install_type</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>requirement</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>The <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> profile keyword as the first entry </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One keyword per line</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> keyword if the systems
that are being upgraded by the profile contain more than one root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system that can be upgraded</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>A profile can contain the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Commented text</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX401">
<PRIMARY>#</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>in profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX402">
<PRIMARY>comments</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>in profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX403">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>comments in</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Any text that is included after
the <LITERAL>#</LITERAL> symbol on a line is treated by the JumpStart program
as commented text. If a line begins with the <LITERAL>#</LITERAL> symbol,
the entire line is treated as a comment.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One or more blank lines</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-26130">
<TITLE>To Create a Profile</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-51">
<PARA>Use a text editor to create a text
file. Name the file descriptively. Or, open a sample profile in the JumpStart
directory that you created.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX405">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>naming</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Ensure that the name of the profile
reflects how you intend to use the profile to install the Solaris software
on a system. For example, you might name the profiles <FILENAME>basic_install</FILENAME>, <FILENAME>eng_profile</FILENAME>, or <FILENAME>user_profile</FILENAME>.  </PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-52">
<PARA>Add profile keywords and values to
the profile.</PARA>
<PARA>For a list of profile keywords and values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-24696">Profile Keywords and Values</OLINK>.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Profile keywords and their values are case sensitive.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-53">
<PARA>Save the profile in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-15">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the profile and that the permissions are set to 644.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-54">
<PARA>Test the profile (optional).</PARA>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25808">Testing a Profile</OLINK> contains information
about testing profiles.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-45277">
<TITLE>Profile Examples</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX412">
<PRIMARY>cluster profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX413">
<PRIMARY>Developer Solaris Software Group</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX414">
<PRIMARY>filesys profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX415">
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX416">
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>profile examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX417">
<PRIMARY>install_type profile
keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX418">
<PRIMARY>partitioning</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX419">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>cluster</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX420">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>filesys</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX421">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>install_type</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX422">
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX423">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system_type</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX424">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX425">
<PRIMARY>slices</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX426">
<PRIMARY>software groups</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile
examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX427">
<PRIMARY>Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>groups</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>profile examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX428">
<PRIMARY>standalone systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX429">
<PRIMARY>system_type profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX430">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>install_type</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>requirement</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX431">
<PRIMARY>install_type
profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>requirement</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX432">
<PRIMARY>filesys profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX433">
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>filesys</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX434">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX435">
<PRIMARY>slices</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX436">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL></SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>example</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX437">
<PRIMARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> profile
keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX438">
<PRIMARY>partitioning</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>metadb</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>examples</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>The
following examples of profiles show how to use different profile keywords
and profile values to control how the Solaris software is installed on a system. <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-24696">Profile Keywords and Values</OLINK> contains
a description of profile keywords and values.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-80">
<TITLE>Mounting Remote File Systems and Adding
and Deleting Packages</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"> 
# profile keywords        profile values
# -----------------       -----------------
  install_type            initial_install
  system_type             standalone
  partitioning            default
  filesys                 any 512 swap   # specify size of /swap
  cluster                 SUNWCprog
  package                 SUNWman delete
  cluster                 SUNWCacc</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> keyword is required in
every profile.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> keyword defines that the
system is to be installed as a standalone system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the software to be
installed with the value <LITERAL>default</LITERAL>. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is
set to 512 Mbytes and is installed on any disk, value <LITERAL>any</LITERAL>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Developer Solaris Software Group, <LITERAL>SUNWCprog</LITERAL>,
is installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the standard man pages are mounted from the file server, <LITERAL>s_ref</LITERAL>, on the network, the man page packages are not to be installed
on the system. The packages that contain the System Accounting utilities are
selected to be installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKAM">
<TITLE>Mounting Remote File Systems and Adding a Third-Party
Package</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"> 
# profile keywords        profile values
# -----------------       -----------------
  install_type            initial_install
  system_type             standalone
  partitioning            default
  filesys                 any 512 swap   # specify size of /swap
  cluster                 SUNWCprog
  cluster                 SUNWCacc
  package                 apache_server  \
                           http://package.central/packages/apache timeout 5</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> keyword is required in
every profile.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> keyword defines that the
system is to be installed as a standalone system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the software to be
installed with the value <LITERAL>default</LITERAL>. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is
set to 512 Mbytes and is installed on any disk, value <LITERAL>any</LITERAL>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Developer Solaris Software Group, <LITERAL>SUNWCprog</LITERAL>,
is installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A third-party package is installed on the system located on
an HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-96">
<TITLE>Specifying Where to Install File Systems</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords        profile values
# ----------------        -------------------
  install_type            initial_install
  system_type             standalone 
  partitioning            explicit
  filesys                 c0t0d0s0 auto /
  filesys                 c0t3d0s1 auto swap
  filesys                 any auto usr
  cluster                 SUNWCall</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords,
value <FILENAME>explicit</FILENAME>. The size of root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
is based on the selected software, value <LITERAL>auto</LITERAL>, and is installed
on <LITERAL>c0t0d0s0</LITERAL>. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is set
to the necessary size and is installed on <LITERAL>c0t3d0s1</LITERAL>. <FILENAME>usr</FILENAME> is based on the selected software  and the installation program
determines where <FILENAME>usr</FILENAME> is installed, based on the value <LITERAL>any</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Entire Solaris Software Group, <LITERAL>SUNWCall</LITERAL>,
is installed on the system. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKBE">
<TITLE>Upgrading and Installing Patches</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords         profile values
# ----------------         -------------------
  install_type             upgrade 
  root_device              c0t3d0s2 
  backup_media             remote_filesystem timber:/export/scratch
  package                  SUNWbcp delete
  package                  SUNWxwman add
  cluster                  SUNWCacc add   
  patch                    patch_list nfs://patch_master/Solaris_11/patches \
                           retry 5
  locale                   de</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile upgrades a system by reallocating disk space.
In this example, disk space must be reallocated because some file systems
on the system did not have enough space for the upgrade.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The root file system on <LITERAL>c0t3d0s2</LITERAL> is upgraded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A remote system that is named <LITERAL>timber</LITERAL> is
to be used to back up data during the disk space reallocation. For more backup-media
keyword values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-97">backup_media Profile
Keyword</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The binary compatibility package, <LITERAL>SUNWbcp</LITERAL>,
is not installed on the system after the upgrade.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The code ensures that the X Window System man pages and the
System Accounting Utilities are to be installed if they are not already installed
on the system. All packages already on the system are automatically upgraded. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>patch</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A list of patches that are installed with the upgrade. The
patch list is located on an NFS server named <LITERAL>patch_master</LITERAL> under
the directories <FILENAME>Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME>.
In case of a mount failure, the NFS mount is tried five times.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>locale</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The German localization packages are to be installed on the
system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-83">
<TITLE>Reallocating Disk Space for an Upgrade</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords         profile values
# ----------------         -------------------
  install_type             upgrade 
  root_device              c0t3d0s2 
  backup_media             remote_filesystem timber:/export/scratch
  layout_constraint        c0t3d0s2 changeable 100
  layout_constraint        c0t3d0s4 changeable
  layout_constraint        c0t3d0s5 movable 
  package                  SUNWbcp delete
  package                  SUNWxwman add
  cluster                  SUNWCacc add   
  locale                   de</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile upgrades a system by reallocating disk space.
In this example, disk space must be reallocated because some file systems
on the system did not have enough space for the upgrade.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The root file system on <LITERAL>c0t3d0s2</LITERAL> is upgraded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A remote system that is named <LITERAL>timber</LITERAL> is
to be used to back up data during the disk space reallocation. For more backup-media
keyword values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-97">backup_media Profile
Keyword</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> keywords designate
that auto-layout can perform the following when auto-layout attempts to reallocate
disk space for the upgrade. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Change slices 2 and 4. The slices can be moved to another
location and the size can be changed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Move slice 5. The slice can be moved to another location but
its size cannot change.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The binary compatibility package, <LITERAL>SUNWbcp</LITERAL>,
is not installed on the system after the upgrade.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The code ensures that the X Window System man pages and the
System Accounting Utilities are to be installed if they are not already installed
on the system. All packages already on the system are automatically upgraded. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>locale</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The German localization packages are to be installed on the
system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FLASHINSTALL-EX-3">
<TITLE>Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive
From an HTTP Server</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY> archive</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>Solaris Flash</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom
JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY> Solaris Flash profile </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the following example, the profile indicates that
the custom JumpStart program retrieves the Solaris Flash archive from
an HTTP server. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="80100"># profile keywords         profile values
# ----------------         -------------------
install_type               flash_install
archive_location           http://192.168.255.255/flasharchive/solarisarchive
partitioning               explicit
filesys                    c0t1d0s0 4000 /
filesys                    c0t1d0s1 512 swap
filesys                    c0t1d0s7 free /export/home</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords,
value <FILENAME>explicit</FILENAME>. The size of root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
is based on the size of the Solaris Flash archive. The root file system is
installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s0</LITERAL>. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is
set to the necessary size and is installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s1</LITERAL>. <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> is based on the remaining disk space. <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> is installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s7</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKDE">
<TITLE>Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive From a
Secure HTTP Server</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY> archive</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>WAN boot installation</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom
JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>WAN
boot installation profile </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the following example,
the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program retrieves the Solaris Flash archive
from a secure HTTP server.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="80100"># profile keywords         profile values
# ----------------         -------------------
install_type               flash_install
archive_location           https://192.168.255.255/solarisupdate.flar
partitioning               explicit
filesys                    c0t1d0s0 4000 /
filesys                    c0t1d0s1 512 swap
filesys                    c0t1d0s7 free /export/home</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The compressed Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from
a secure HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords,
value <FILENAME>explicit</FILENAME>. The size of root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
is based on the size of the Solaris Flash archive. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is
set to the necessary size and is installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s1</LITERAL>. <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> is based on the remaining disk space. <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> is installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s7</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKDK">
<TITLE>Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive and Installing
a Third-Party Package</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY> archive</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>Solaris Flash</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom
JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY> Solaris Flash profile </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the following example, the profile indicates that
the custom JumpStart program retrieves the Solaris Flash archive from
an HTTP server. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="80100"># profile keywords         profile values
# ----------------         -------------------
install_type               flash_install
archive_location           http://192.168.255.255/flasharchive/solarisarchive
partitioning               explicit
filesys                    c0t1d0s0 4000 /
filesys                    c0t1d0s1 512 swap
filesys                    c0t1d0s7 free /export/home
package                    SUNWnew http://192.168.254.255/Solaris_11 timeout 5</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords,
value <FILENAME>explicit</FILENAME>. The size of root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
is based on the size of the Solaris Flash archive. The root file system is
installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s0</LITERAL>. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is
set to the necessary size and is installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s1</LITERAL>. <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> is based on the remaining disk space. <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> is installed on <LITERAL>c0t1d0s7</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The SUNWnew package is added from the <FILENAME>Solaris_11</FILENAME> directory
from the HTTP server <LITERAL>192.168.254.255</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FLASHINSTALL-EX-4">
<TITLE>Retrieving a Solaris Flash Differential
Archive From an NFS Server</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY> Solaris Flash profile </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>archive</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>Solaris Flash</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the following example,
the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program retrieves the Solaris Flash archive
from an NFS server. The <LITERAL>flash_update</LITERAL> keyword indicates
that this is a differential archive. A differential archive installs only
the differences between two system images.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="80100"># profile keywords         profile values
# ----------------         -------------------
install_type               flash_update
archive_location           nfs installserver:/export/solaris/flasharchive \
                           /solarisdiffarchive
no_master_check</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile installs a Solaris Flash differential archive
on the clone system. Only files that are specified by the archive are installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an NFS server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>no_master_check</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The clone system is not checked for a valid system image.
A valid system image would have been built from the original master system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-960">
<TITLE>Creating an Empty Boot Environment</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY> Solaris Flash profile </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>archive</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart profile example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>Solaris Flash</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the following example,
the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program creates an empty boot
environment. An empty boot environment contains no file systems and no copy
from the current boot environment occurs. The boot environment can be populated
later with a  Solaris Flash archive and then activated.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords        profile values
# ----------------        -------------------
  install_type            initial_install
  system_type             standalone 
  partitioning            explicit
  filesys                 c0t0d0s0 auto /
  filesys                 c0t3d0s1 auto swap
  filesys                 any auto usr
  cluster                 SUNWCall
  bootenv createbe bename second_BE \
  filesystem /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \
  filesystem -:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:swap \
  filesystem /export:shared:ufs</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords,
value <FILENAME>explicit</FILENAME>. The size of root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
is based on the selected software, value <LITERAL>auto</LITERAL>, and is installed
on <LITERAL>c0t0d0s0</LITERAL>. The size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is set
to the necessary size and is installed on <LITERAL>c0t3d0s1</LITERAL>. <FILENAME>usr</FILENAME> is based on the selected software  and the installation program
determines where <FILENAME>usr</FILENAME> is installed, based on the value <LITERAL>any</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Entire Solaris Software Group, <LITERAL>SUNWCall</LITERAL>,
is installed on the system. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>bootenv createbe</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>An empty, inactive boot environment is set up on disk <LITERAL>c0t1d0</LITERAL>. File systems for root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>), swap, and <FILENAME>/export</FILENAME> are created, but left empty. This second boot environment can
be installed with a Solaris Flash archive at a later time. The new boot
environment can then be activated to become the current boot environment. </PARA>
<PARA>For keyword values and background about using this keyword, see the
following references:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For descriptions of keyword values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-24696">Profile Keywords and Values</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For background about using Solaris Live Upgrade that creates,
upgrades, and activates inactive boot environments, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="LUOVERVIEW-1">Chapter 2, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY> RAID-1 volume profiles </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>For background about using a Solaris Flash archive, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLFLASH" TARGETPTR="FLASH-24">Chapter 1, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Flash (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and Installation)</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FRCFQ">
<TITLE>Creating RAID-1 Volumes When Installing a Solaris Flash Archive</TITLE>
<PARA>In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart
program uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors)
for the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>), <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME>, <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> file systems. A Solaris Flash archive is installed
on the boot environment.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords        profile values
# ----------------        -------------------
  install_type            flash_install
  arhcive_location        nfs server:/export/home/export/flash.s10.SUNWCall
  partitioning            explicit
  filesys                 mirror:d10 c0t0d0s0 c0t1d0s0 4096 /
  filesys                 mirror c0t0d0s1 2048 swap
  filesys                 mirror:d30 c0t0d0s3 c0t1d0s3 4096 /usr
  filesys                 mirror:d40 c0t0d0s4 c0t1d0s4 4096 /usr
  filesys                 mirror:d50 c0t0d0s5 c0t1d0s5 free /export/home
  metadb                  c0t1d0s7 size 8192 count 3</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an NFS server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system slices are determined by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords,
value <FILENAME>explicit</FILENAME>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is created and
mirrored on the slices <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME>.
The size of the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is set to 4096 Mbytes.
The RAID-1 volume that mirrors <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> is named <FILENAME>d10</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> file system is created and mirrored
on the slice <FILENAME>c0t0d0s1</FILENAME>, and is sized at 2048 Mbytes. The
custom JumpStart program assigns a name to the mirror.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system is created and mirrored
on the slices <FILENAME>c0t1d0s3</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s3</FILENAME>.
The size of the <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system is set to 4096 Mbytes.
The RAID-1 volume is named <LITERAL>d30</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system is created and mirrored
on the slices <FILENAME>c0t1d0s4</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s4</FILENAME>.
The size of the <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system is set to 4096 Mbytes.
The RAID-1 volume is named <LITERAL>d40</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Three state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice <FILENAME>c0t1d0s7</FILENAME>, and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For overview information about how to create mirrored file
systems during your installation, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRROROVERVIEW-1">Chapter 8, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For guidelines and requirements of creating mirrored file
systems, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRRORPLANNING-1">Chapter 9, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For descriptions of keyword values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-MIRROR">filesys Profile Keyword (Creating RAID-1
Volumes)</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-METADB">metadb Profile
Keyword (Creating State Database Replicas)</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-EX-BASICSVM">
<TITLE>Creating a RAID-1 Volume to
Mirror the Root File System</TITLE>
<PARA>In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart
program uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create a RAID-1 volume (mirror)
for the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords        profile values
# ----------------        -------------------
  install_type            initial_install
  cluster                 SUNWCXall
  filesys                 mirror:d30 c0t1d0s0 c0t0d0s0  /
  filesys                 c0t0d0s3 512 swap
  metadb                  c0t0d0s4 size 8192 count 4
  metadb                  c0t1d0s4 size 8192 count 4
  </PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Entire Solaris Software Plus OEM Support software group,
SUNWCXall, is installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is created and
mirrored on the slices <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME>.
The RAID-1 volume that mirrors <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME> is named <FILENAME>d30</FILENAME>. The custom JumpStart program
assigns names to the two submirrors.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> file system is created and mirrored
on the slice <FILENAME>c0t0d0s3</FILENAME>, and is sized at 512 Mbytes. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Four state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice <FILENAME>c0t0d0s4</FILENAME>, and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Four state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice <FILENAME>c0t1d0s4</FILENAME>, and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For overview information about how to create RAID-1 volumes
during your installation, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRROROVERVIEW-1">Chapter 8, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For guidelines and requirements about creating RAID-1 volumes,
see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRRORPLANNING-1">Chapter 9, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>RAID-1 volume profiles </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>For descriptions of keyword values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-MIRROR">filesys Profile Keyword (Creating RAID-1
Volumes)</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-METADB">metadb Profile
Keyword (Creating State Database Replicas)</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-EX-SVM">
<TITLE>Creating RAID-1 Volumes to Mirror
Multiple File Systems</TITLE>
<PARA>In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart
program uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors)
for the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>), <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME>, and <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file systems.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords        profile values
# ----------------        -------------------
  install_type            initial_install
  cluster                 SUNWCXall
  filesys                 mirror:d100 c0t1d0s0 c0t0d0s0 200 /
  filesys                 c0t1d0s5 500 /var
  filesys                 c0t0d0s5 500
  filesys                 mirror c0t0d0s1 512 swap
  metadb                  c0t0d0s3 size 8192 count 5
  filesys                 mirror c0t1d0s4 c0t0d0s4 2000 /usr
  filesys                 c0t1d0s7 free /export/home
  filesys                 c0t0d0s7 free</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Entire Solaris Software Plus OEM Support software group,
SUNWCXall, is installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is created and
mirrored on the slices <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME>.
The size of the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is set to 200 Mbytes.
The RAID-1 volume that mirrors <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME> is named <FILENAME>d100</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>/var</FILENAME> file system is installed on
the slice <FILENAME>c0t1d0s5</FILENAME> and is sized at 500 Mbytes. The root
(<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is created and mirrored on the slices <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME>. The size of the root
(<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is set to 200 Mbytes. The RAID-1 volume
that mirrors <FILENAME>c0t1d0s0</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s0</FILENAME> is
named <FILENAME>d100</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> file system is created and mirrored
on the slice <FILENAME>c0t0d0s1</FILENAME>, and is sized at 512 Mbytes. The
custom JumpStart program assigns a name to the mirror.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Five state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice <FILENAME>c0t0d0s3</FILENAME>, and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system is created and mirrored
on the slices <FILENAME>c0t1d0s4</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>c0t0d0s4</FILENAME>.
The size of the <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system is set to 2000 Mbytes.
The custom JumpStart program assigns a name to the mirror.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For overview information about how to create mirrored file
systems during your installation, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRROROVERVIEW-1">Chapter 8, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For guidelines and requirements of creating mirrored file
systems, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRRORPLANNING-1">Chapter 9, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For descriptions of keyword values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-MIRROR">filesys Profile Keyword (Creating RAID-1
Volumes)</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-METADB">metadb Profile
Keyword (Creating State Database Replicas)</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-82" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Using the <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE"># profile keywords      profile values
# ----------------      -------------------
  install_type          initial_install
  system_type           standalone

  fdisk                 c0t0d0 0x04 delete
  fdisk                 c0t0d0 solaris maxfree
  cluster               SUNWCall
  cluster               SUNWCacc delete</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this
example.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>All <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions of type DOSOS16 (04
hexadecimal) are deleted from the <LITERAL>c0t0d0</LITERAL> disk.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition is created on
the largest contiguous free space on the <LITERAL>c0t0d0</LITERAL> disk.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Entire Distribution software group, <LITERAL>SUNWCall</LITERAL>,
is installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The system accounting utilities, <LITERAL>SUNWCacc</LITERAL>,
are not to be installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-25808">
<TITLE>Testing a Profile</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>pfinstall command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>After you
create a profile, use the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PFINSTALL-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pfinstall</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command
to test the profile.  Test the profile before you use the profile to install
or upgrade a system. Testing a profile is especially useful when you are creating
upgrade profiles that reallocate disk space.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>testing </PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>By looking at the installation output that is generated by <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND>, you can quickly determine if a profile works as you intended.
For example, use the profile to determine if a system has enough disk space
to upgrade to a new release of the Solaris software before you perform the
upgrade on that system.</PARA>
<PARA><COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> enables you to test a profile against the
following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The system's disk configuration where <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> is
being run.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX607">
<PRIMARY>disk configuration
files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Other disk configurations.
You use a disk configuration file that represents a structure of a disk, for
example, a disk's bytes/sector, flags, and slices. Creating disk configuration
files is described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-77225">Creating Disk
Configuration Files</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-35662">To
Create a Disk Configuration File</OLINK>. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You cannot use a disk configuration file to test a profile you
intend to use to upgrade a system. Instead, you must test the profile against
the system's actual disk configuration and the software that is currently
installed on that system.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-25">
<TITLE>To Create a Temporary Solaris Environment
to Test a Profile</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>To test a profile for a particular Solaris release successfully and
accurately, you must test a profile within the Solaris environment of the
same release. For example, if you want to test a Solaris initial installation
profile, run the <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> command on a system that is
running the Solaris OS.</PARA>
<PARA>You need to create a temporary installation environment if you are testing
a profile under one of the following conditions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You want to test a Solaris Express 5/07 upgrade profile
on a system that is running a previous version of the Solaris software.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You do not have a Solaris Express 5/07 system installed
yet to test Solaris Express 5/07 initial installation profiles.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-22">
<PARA>Boot a system from an image of one
of the following: </PARA>
<PARA>For SPARC based systems:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>For x86 based systems:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you want to test an upgrade profile, boot the system that you
are upgrading.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-17A">
<PARA>Respond to the system identification
questions.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-18A">
<PARA>To exit from the installation program,
type ! at the following prompt.</PARA>
<SCREEN>The Solaris installation program  will assist you in installing software for Solaris.
&lt;Press ENTER to continue> {"!" exits}</SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-20A">
<PARA>Execute the <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> command
from the shell. For details about using the <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> command,
see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-63">Step&nbsp;7</OLINK> in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-11884">To Test a Profile</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-11884">
<TITLE>To Test a Profile</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<NOTE ARCH="X86">
<PARA>If you are using the <LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> keyword,
the <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> <OPTION>D</OPTION> command fails to test
the profile. For a workaround, see the error message &ldquo;could not select
locale,&rdquo; in the section, <OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-16510">Upgrading
the Solaris OS</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-59">
<PARA>Locate a system on which to test the
profile that is the same type of platform, SPARC or x86, for which the profile
was created.</PARA>
<PARA>If you are testing an upgrade profile, you must test
the profile on the actual system that you intend to upgrade.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-87">
<PARA>Use the following decision table to
determine what to do next.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="1">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="198*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="198*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Test Scenario</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW ROWSEP="0">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Test an initial installation profile and have a system that is running
the Solaris Express 5/07 software.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Become superuser on the system and go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-61">Step&nbsp;5</OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Test an upgrade profile, or you do not have a system that is running
Solaris Express 5/07 to test an initial installation profile.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Create a temporary Solaris Express 5/07 environment to test the
profile. For details, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25">To Create a
Temporary Solaris Environment to Test a Profile</OLINK>. Then, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-93">Step&nbsp;3</OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-93">
<PARA>Create a temporary mount point.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>mkdir /tmp/mnt</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-88">
<PARA>Mount the directory that contains the
profile or profiles that you want to test.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="158*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="238*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Mount Scenario</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Typing Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Mount a remote NFS file system for systems on the network.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>mount -F nfs <REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> /tmp/mnt</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>SPARC: Mount a UFS-formatted diskette.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>mount -F ufs /dev/diskette /tmp/mnt</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Mount a PCFS-formatted diskette.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>mount -F pcfs /dev/diskette /tmp/mnt</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-61">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX612">
<PRIMARY>variables</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><ENVAR>SYS_MEMSIZE</ENVAR></SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>To test the profile with a specific system memory size, set <ENVAR>SYS_MEMSIZE</ENVAR> to the specific memory size in Mbytes.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>SYS_MEMSIZE=<REPLACEABLE>memory_size</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>export SYS_MEMSIZE</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-62">
<PARA>Did you mount a directory in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-88">Step&nbsp;4</OLINK>? </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, change the directory to <FILENAME>/tmp/mnt</FILENAME>.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd /tmp/mnt</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, change the directory to where the profile is located,
which is usually the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-63">
<PARA>Test the profile with the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PFINSTALL-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pfinstall</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>/usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall</USERINPUT> <OPTION>D</OPTION>:<OPTION>d</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>c</OPTION><USERINPUT></USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>profile</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<CAUTION>
<PARA>You <EMPHASIS>must</EMPHASIS> include the <OPTION>d</OPTION> or <OPTION>D</OPTION> option. If you do not include one of these options, <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> uses the profile you specify to install the Solaris software. All
of the data on the system is overwritten.</PARA>
</CAUTION>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>D</OPTION></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> uses the current system's disk
configuration to test the profile. You must use the <OPTION>D</OPTION> option
to test an upgrade profile.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>d</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> uses the disk configuration file, <REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE>, to test the profile. If <REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE> is not located in the directory where <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> is
run, you must specify the path.</PARA>
<PARA>For instructions about how to create a disk configuration file, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-77225">Creating Disk Configuration Files</OLINK>.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>-c option</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY SORTAS="c option"><COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> command</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>You cannot use the <OPTION>d</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE> option with an upgrade profile, <LITERAL>install_type
upgrade</LITERAL>. You must always test an upgrade profile against a system's
disk configuration, that is, you must use the <OPTION>D</OPTION> option.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>c</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the Solaris software image. You use this option,
for example, if the system is using removable
media services to mount the Solaris Software - 1 CD for your platform.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The <OPTION>c</OPTION> option is not required if you booted from
a Solaris Operating System DVD or a Solaris Software - 1 CD image for your platform. The DVD
or CD image is mounted on <FILENAME>/media/cdrom</FILENAME> as part of the booting process.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>profile</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the profile to test. If <REPLACEABLE>profile</REPLACEABLE> is
not in the directory where <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> is being run, you
must specify the path.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-66">
<TITLE>Profile Test Examples</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX619">
<PRIMARY>install_type profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX620">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX621">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PARA>The following example shows how to use <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> to
test a profile that is named <FILENAME>basic_prof</FILENAME>. The profile
is tested against the disk configuration on a system on which the Solaris Express 5/07 software
is installed. The <FILENAME>basic_prof</FILENAME> profile is located in the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory, and the path to the Solaris Operating System DVD image is
specified because removable
media services are being used.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-EX-25">
<TITLE>Profile Test Using a Solaris Express 5/07 System</TITLE>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100"># <USERINPUT>cd /jumpstart</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>/usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -D -c /media/cdrom/<REPLACEABLE>pathname</REPLACEABLE> basic_prof</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</EXAMPLE>
<PARA>The following example shows how to use <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> to
test the profile that is named <FILENAME>basic_prof</FILENAME> on a Solaris Express 5/07 system.
The test is performed against the <FILENAME>535_test</FILENAME> disk configuration
file. The test checks for 64 Mbytes of system memory. This example uses a Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD or Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD image
that is located in the <FILENAME>/export/install</FILENAME> directory.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="PREPARECUSTOM-EX-26">
<TITLE>Profile Test Using a Disk Configuration
File</TITLE>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100"># <USERINPUT>SYS_MEMSIZE=64</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>export SYS_MEMSIZE</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>/usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -d 535_test -c /export/install basic_prof</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-50536">
<TITLE>Validating the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA>Before you can use a profile and <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, you
must run the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script to validate that the files are
set up correctly. If all rules and profiles are correctly set up, the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file is created, which is required by the custom JumpStart installation
software to match a system to a profile. </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX738">
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file validation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX740">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX741">
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX742">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX743">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX744">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-11535">Table 3&ndash;2</OLINK> describes what the <FILENAME>check</FILENAME> script does.      </PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="PREPARECUSTOM-11535">
<TITLE>What Happens When You
Use the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> Script</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="44*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="352*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Stage</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>1</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file is checked for syntax.</PARA>
<PARA></PARA>
<PARA><COMMAND>check</COMMAND> verifies that the rule keywords are legitimate
and that the <REPLACEABLE>begin</REPLACEABLE>, <REPLACEABLE>class</REPLACEABLE>,
and <REPLACEABLE>finish</REPLACEABLE> fields are specified for each rule.
The <REPLACEABLE>begin</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>finish</REPLACEABLE> fields
can consist of a minus sign (<LITERAL>-</LITERAL>) instead of a file name.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>2</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If no errors are found in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, each
profile that is specified in the rules is checked for syntax. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>3</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX748">
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file creation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX749">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX750">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>If no errors are found, <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> creates the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file from the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, removes
all comments and blank lines, retains all rules, and adds the following comment
line at the end:   </PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL># version=2 checksum=num</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<TASK ID="PREPARECUSTOM-91711">
<TITLE>To Validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-76">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX751">
<PRIMARY>starting, check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Ensure that the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script is located in the JumpStart directory. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX752">
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample
directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>check script</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script is in the <FILENAME>Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample</FILENAME> directory on the Solaris Operating System DVD or on the Solaris Software - 1 CD.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-77">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX753">
<PRIMARY>changing directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>to JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX754">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>changing</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>to JumpStart directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Change the directory to the JumpStart directory. </PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-78">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX755">
<PRIMARY>paths, check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX756">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="p option of check script">-p option
of check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Run the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
to validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file:</PARA>
<SCREEN>$ <USERINPUT>./check</USERINPUT> <USERINPUT>-p</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>-r</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>file_name</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>p</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Validates the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> by using the <FILENAME>check</FILENAME> script from the Solaris software image instead of the <FILENAME>check</FILENAME> script from the system you are using. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> is
the image on a local disk or a mounted Solaris Operating System DVD or a Solaris Software - 1 CD.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX757">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing
validity</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX758">
<PRIMARY>check
script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX759">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="r option of check script">-r option
of check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX760">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX761">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>testing rules</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX762">
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>testing rules</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use this option
to run the most recent version of <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> if your system
is running a previous version of Solaris.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>r</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>file_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies a rules file other than the one that is named <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME>. Using this option, you can test the validity of a rule before
you integrate the rule into the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX763">
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file validation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX764">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating
by using check</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX765">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX766">
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>As the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
runs, the script reports the checking of the validity of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
and each profile. If no errors are encountered, the script reports the following
information.    </PARA>
<SCREEN>The custom JumpStart configuration is ok</SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="PREPARECUSTOM-STEP-21B">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX767">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>preparing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX768">
<PRIMARY>preparing for installation,
with custom JumpStart</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX769">
<PRIMARY>starting, check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file and that the permissions are set to
644.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
<TASKRELATED ROLE="SEE-ALSO">
<PARA>After you validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, you can learn
more about optional custom JumpStart features in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-29530">Chapter&nbsp;4, Using Optional Custom JumpStart
Features (Tasks)</OLINK>.  You can learn about performing custom JumpStart
installations in <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-88491">Chapter&nbsp;6, Performing
a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks)</OLINK>.  </PARA>
</TASKRELATED>
</TASK>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000132275 0><?Entity End preparecustom.sgm><?Entity Ref optionalcustom><?Entity Start optionalcustom.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target>
<CHAPTER ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-29530"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="off" ref="2"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="vs145730" fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Using Optional Custom JumpStart
Features (Tasks)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter describes the optional features that are available to create
additional custom JumpStart installation tools.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-59707">Creating Begin Scripts</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-44024">Creating Finish Scripts</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-4">Creating a Compressed
Configuration File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-77225">Creating Disk Configuration
Files</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-73438">Using a Site-Specific
Installation Program</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX770">
<PRIMARY>custom
JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX771">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart
installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>overview</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX774">
<PRIMARY>packages</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>administration file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Instructions in this
chapter are valid for either a SPARC server or an x86 server that is being
used to provide custom JumpStart files, called a profile server. A profile
server can provide custom JumpStart files for different platform types. For
example, a SPARC server can provide custom JumpStart files for both SPARC
based systems and x86 based systems.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-59707">
<TITLE>Creating Begin Scripts</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX775">
<PRIMARY>begin scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>overview</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX776">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX777">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>begin scripts</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>A begin script is a user-defined Bourne shell script that you
specify in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file. A begin script performs tasks
before the Solaris software is installed on a system. You can use begin scripts
only when using custom JumpStart to install the Solaris software.</PARA>
<PARA>Use a begin script to perform one of the following tasks:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Creating derived profiles</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Backing up files before upgrading</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-5">
<TITLE>Important Information About Begin Scripts</TITLE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX778">
<PRIMARY>mounting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin script caution</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Do not specify something
in the script that would prevent the mounting of file systems onto <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME> during
an initial or upgrade installation. If the JumpStart program cannot mount
the file systems onto <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME>, an error occurs and installation
fails.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX779">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="var/sadm/begin.log file"><FILENAME>/var/sadm/system/logs/begin.log</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX780">
<PRIMARY>output
files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin script log</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX781">
<PRIMARY>log files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin script
output</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX782">
<PRIMARY>files
and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin script output</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX783">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>begin.log</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>During the installation, output from the begin script is deposited
in <FILENAME>/tmp/begin.log</FILENAME>. After the installation is completed,
the log file is redirected to <FILENAME>/var/sadm/system/logs/begin.log</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX784">
<PRIMARY>begin scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>permissions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX785">
<PRIMARY>permissions</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns the begin script and
that the permissions are set to 644.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You can use custom JumpStart environment variables in your
begin scripts. For a list of environment variables, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-4">Custom JumpStart Environment Variables</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Save begin scripts in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>In prior releases, the <LITERAL>/etc/.NFS4inst_state.domain</LITERAL> file was created by the <FILENAME>sysidnfs4</FILENAME> program. This file would suppress the prompt for an NFSv4 domain
name during installation. This file is no longer created. Use the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> keyword,  <LITERAL>nfs4_domain</LITERAL>, instead.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-44541">
<TITLE>Creating Derived Profiles With a Begin
Script</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX786">
<PRIMARY>begin scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating derived profiles with</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX787">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profiles</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>derived</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX788">
<PRIMARY>derived profiles</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX789">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX790">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A derived profile is a
profile that is dynamically created by a begin script during a custom JumpStart
installation. Derived profiles are needed when you cannot set up the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file to match specific systems to a profile. For example, you
might need to use derived profiles for identical system models that have different
hardware components, such as systems that contain different frame buffers.</PARA>
<PARA>To set up a rule to use a derived profile, you must perform the following
tasks:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX791">
<PRIMARY>= (equal sign)
in profile field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX792">
<PRIMARY>equal sign (=) in profile field</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Set the profile
field to an equal sign (<LITERAL>=</LITERAL>) instead of a profile. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Set the begin field to a begin script that creates a derived
profile that depends on the system on which you intend to install Solaris.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX793">
<PRIMARY>matching</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>When a system matches a
rule with the profile field equal to an equal sign (<LITERAL>=</LITERAL>),
the begin script creates the derived profile that is used to install the Solaris
software on the system. </PARA>
<PARA>The following is an example of a begin script that creates the same
derived profile every time. You can write a begin script to create different
derived profiles that depend on the evaluation of rules. </PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-11">
<TITLE>Begin Script That Creates a Derived
Profile</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">#!/bin/sh
echo "install_type        initial_install"    > ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "system_type         standalone"        >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "partitioning        default"           >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "cluster             SUNWCprog"         >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "package       SUNWman     delete"      >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "package       SUNWolman   delete"      >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "package       SUNWxwman   delete"      >> ${SI_PROFILE}</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX794">
<PRIMARY>variables</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>SI_PROFILE</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX795">
<PRIMARY><ENVAR>SI_PROFILE</ENVAR> environment variable</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX796">
<PRIMARY>defaults</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profile
name</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX797">
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profile names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the example,
the begin script must use the <ENVAR>SI_PROFILE</ENVAR> environment variable
for the name of the derived profile, which is set to <FILENAME>/tmp/install.input</FILENAME> by default.    </PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX798">
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating by using check</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>derived profiles
and</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX799">
<PRIMARY>check
script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profiles and</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX800">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>derived profiles and</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX801">
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>derived profiles
and</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX802">
<PRIMARY>begin
scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating derived profiles with</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX804">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart
installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>begin
scripts</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX805">
<PRIMARY>derived
profiles</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX806">
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX807">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>derived profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX808">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>If a begin script is used
to create a derived profile, ensure the script does not have any errors. A
derived profile is not verified by the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script because
derived profiles are not created until the execution of the begin script.
 </PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-44024">
<TITLE>Creating Finish Scripts</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX809">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>finish scripts</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX810">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A finish script is a user-defined
Bourne shell script that you specify in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.
A finish script performs tasks after the Solaris software is installed on
a system, but before the system reboots. You can use finish scripts only when
using custom JumpStart to install Solaris.</PARA>
<PARA>Tasks that you can perform with a finish script include the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Adding files</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Adding individual packages or patches in addition to the ones
that are installed in a particular software group</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Customizing the root environment</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Setting the system's root password</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Installing additional software</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-8">
<TITLE>Important Information About Finish Scripts</TITLE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX811">
<PRIMARY>mounting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY SORTAS="mounting:Solaris 8 installation">by Solaris installation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The Solaris installation program mounts the system's file systems
on <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME>. The file systems remain mounted on <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME> until
the system reboots. You can use the finish script to add, change, or remove
files from the newly installed file system hierarchy by modifying the file
systems that are respective to <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX812">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="var/sadm/finish.log file"><FILENAME>/var/sadm/system/logs/finish.log</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX813">
<PRIMARY>output
files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish script log</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX814">
<PRIMARY>log files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish script
output</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX815">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>finish.log</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX816">
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish
script output</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>During the installation, output from
the finish script is deposited in <FILENAME>/tmp/finish.log</FILENAME>. After
the installation is completed, the log file is redirected to <FILENAME>/var/sadm/system/logs/finish.log</FILENAME>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX817">
<PRIMARY>permissions</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the finish script and that the permissions are set to 644.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You can use custom JumpStart environment variables in your
finish scripts. For a list of environment variables, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-4">Custom JumpStart Environment Variables</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Save finish scripts in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-1">
<TITLE>To Add Files With a Finish Script</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>Through a finish script, you can add files from the JumpStart directory
to an already installed system. You can add the files because the JumpStart
directory is mounted on the directory that is specified by the <ENVAR>SI_CONFIG_DIR</ENVAR> variable. The directory is set to <FILENAME>/tmp/install_config</FILENAME> by
default. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can also replace files by copying files from the JumpStart
directory to already existing files on the installed system.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-6A">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX825">
<PRIMARY>copying</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart directory files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX826">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>copying files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX827">
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart directory files using finish scripts</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX828">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>copying files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using finish scripts</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Copy all of the files that you are adding to the installed system
to the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-2">
<PARA>Insert the following line in the finish
script for each file that you want to be copied to the newly installed file
system hierarchy:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">cp ${SI_CONFIG_DIR}/<REPLACEABLE>file_name</REPLACEABLE> /a/<REPLACEABLE>path_name</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
</STEP></procedure>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGYRK">
<TITLE>Adding a File With a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PARA>For example, assume you have a special application, <LITERAL>site_prog</LITERAL>,
developed for all users at your site. If you place a copy of <LITERAL>site_prog</LITERAL> into
the JumpStart directory, the following line in a finish script copies <LITERAL>site_prog</LITERAL> from the JumpStart directory into a system's <FILENAME>/usr/bin</FILENAME> directory: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">cp ${SI_CONFIG_DIR}/site_prog  /a/usr/bin</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-11">
<TITLE>Adding Packages or Patches With a Finish
Script</TITLE>
<PARA>You can create a finish script to automatically add packages or patches
after the Solaris software is installed on a system. By adding packages with
a finish script, you reduce time and ensure consistency in which packages
and patches are installed on different systems at your site.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX829">
<PRIMARY>adding</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>packages
and patches with a finish script</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX830">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>adding files</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX831">
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding files with finish
scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX832">
<PRIMARY>packages</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>with a finish script</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX833">
<PRIMARY>patches</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding </SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>with a finish script</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX834">
<PRIMARY>finish scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding packages and patches</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>When you use
the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PKGADD-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgadd</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> or <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PATCHADD-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>patchadd</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> commands
in finish scripts, use the <OPTION>R</OPTION> option to specify <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME> as
the root path. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-3">Example 4&ndash;3</OLINK> shows
an example of a finish script that adds packages. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-30">Example 4&ndash;4</OLINK> shows
an example of a finish script that adds patches.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-3">
<TITLE>Adding Packages With a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">  #!/bin/sh
 
  BASE=/a
  MNT=/a/mnt
  ADMIN_FILE=/a/tmp/admin
 
  mkdir ${MNT}
  mount -f nfs sherlock:/export/package ${MNT}
  cat >${ADMIN_FILE} &lt;&lt;DONT_ASK
  mail=root
  instance=overwrite
  partial=nocheck
  runlevel=nocheck
  idepend=nocheck
  rdepend=nocheck
  space=ask
  setuid=nocheck
  conflict=nocheck
  action=nocheck
  basedir=default
  DONT_ASK
 
  /usr/sbin/pkgadd -a ${ADMIN_FILE} -d ${MNT} -R ${BASE} SUNWxyz 
  umount ${MNT}
  rmdir ${MNT}</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following describes some commands for this example.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command mounts a directory on a server that
contains the package to install.</PARA>
<SCREEN>mount -f nfs sherlock:/export/package ${MNT}</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command creates a temporary package administration
file, <FILENAME>admin</FILENAME>, to force the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PKGADD-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgadd</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command not to perform checks
or prompt for questions when installing a package. Use the temporary package
administration file to maintain a hands-off installation when you are adding
packages.</PARA>
<SCREEN>cat >${ADMIN_FILE} &lt;&lt;DONT_ASK</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command adds the package
by using the <OPTION>a</OPTION> option, specifying the package administration
file, and the <OPTION>R</OPTION> option, specifying the root path.</PARA>
<SCREEN>/usr/sbin/pkgadd -a ${ADMIN_FILE} -d ${MNT} -R ${BASE} SUNWxyz</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE WIDTH="100" ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-30">
<TITLE>Adding Patches With
a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="80100" ROLE="COMPLETE"> #!/bin/sh 

########
#
# USER-CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS
#
########

# The location of the patches to add to the system after it's installed.
# The OS rev (5.x) and the architecture (`mach`) will be added to the
# root.  For example, /foo on a 8 SPARC would turn into /foo/5.8/sparc
LUPATCHHOST=ins3525-svr
LUPATCHPATHROOT=/export/solaris/patchdb
#########
#
# NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS PAST THIS POINT
#
#########

BASEDIR=/a

# Figure out the source and target OS versions
echo Determining OS revisions...
SRCREV=`uname -r`
echo Source $SRCREV

LUPATCHPATH=$LUPATCHPATHROOT/$SRCREV/`mach`

#
# Add the patches needed
#
echo Adding OS patches
mount $LUPATCHHOST:$LUPATCHPATH /mnt >/dev/null 2>&amp;1
if [ $? = 0 ] ; then
	for patch in `cat /mnt/*Recommended/patch_order` ; do
		(cd /mnt/*Recommended/$patch ; echo yes | patchadd -u -d -R $BASEDIR .)
	done
	cd /tmp
	umount /mnt
else
	echo "No patches found"
if</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<NOTE>
<PARA>In the past, the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="CHROOT-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>chroot</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command
was used with the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> and <COMMAND>patchadd</COMMAND> commands
in the finish script environment. In rare instances, some packages or patches
do not work with the <OPTION>R</OPTION> option. You must create a dummy <FILENAME>/etc/mnttab</FILENAME> file in the <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME> root path before
issuing the <COMMAND>chroot</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX835">
<PRIMARY>packages</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding </SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>with chroot</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX836">
<PRIMARY>patches</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>adding</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>with chroot</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>To create a dummy <FILENAME>/etc/mnttab</FILENAME> file, add the
following line to your finish script: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>cp /etc/mnttab /a/etc/mnttab</PROGRAMLISTING>
</NOTE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-12">
<TITLE>Customizing the Root Environment With
a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX837">
<PRIMARY>root environment, customizing
with a finish script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX838">
<PRIMARY>finish scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>customizing the root environment</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX839">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="cshrc file"><FILENAME>.cshrc</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>You can also use finish scripts
to customize files that are already installed on a system. For example, the
finish script in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-4">Example 4&ndash;5</OLINK> customizes
the root environment by appending information to the <FILENAME>.cshrc</FILENAME> file
in the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) directory.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-4">
<TITLE>Customizing the Root Environment
With a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">#!/bin/sh
#
# Customize root's environment
#
echo "***adding customizations in /.cshrc"
test -f a/.cshrc || {
cat >> a/.cshrc &lt;&lt;EOF
set history=100 savehist=200 filec ignoreeof prompt="\$user@`uname -n`> "
alias cp cp -i
alias mv mv -i
alias rm rm -i
alias ls ls -FC
alias h history
alias c clear
unset autologout
EOF
}</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-13">
<TITLE>Setting a System's Root Password With
a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX840">
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>set_root_pw finish script</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX841">
<PRIMARY>password, root</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX842">
<PRIMARY>root password, setting with a finish script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX843">
<PRIMARY>security, root password</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX844">
<PRIMARY>set_root_pw
finish script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX845">
<PRIMARY>finish scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>setting the system's root password</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>After the Solaris software is installed on a system, the system
reboots. Before the boot process is completed, the system prompts for the
root password. Until someone types a password, the system cannot finish booting.</PARA>
<PARA>A finish script that is named <FILENAME>set_root_pw</FILENAME> is saved
in the <FILENAME>auto_install_sample</FILENAME> directory.  The finish script
shows how to set the root password automatically, without prompting. <FILENAME>set_root_pw</FILENAME> is shown in <OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-5">Example 4&ndash;6</OLINK>.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX846">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart
installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>finish
scripts</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX847">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX848">
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>set_root_pw finish script</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX849">
<PRIMARY>password, root</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX850">
<PRIMARY>security, root password</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX851">
<PRIMARY>set_root_pw finish script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>If you set the system's root password with a finish script, users
might attempt to discover the root password from the encrypted password in
your finish script.  Ensure that you safeguard against users who might try
to determine the root password. </PARA>
</NOTE>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-5">
<TITLE>Setting the System's Root Password
With a Finish Script</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100" ROLE="COMPLETE">	 #!/bin/sh
	 #
	 #       @(#)set_root_pw 1.4 93/12/23 SMI
	 #
	 # This is an example Bourne shell script to be run after installation.
	 # It sets the system's root password to the entry defined in PASSWD.
	 # The encrypted password is obtained from an existing root password entry
	 # in /etc/shadow from an installed machine.
 
	 echo "setting password for root"
 
	 # set the root password
 PASSWD=dKO5IBkSF42lw
	 #create a temporary input file
 cp /a/etc/shadow /a/etc/shadow.orig
 
	 mv /a/etc/shadow /a/etc/shadow.orig
 	nawk -F: '{
         if ( $1 == "root" )
           printf"%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s\n",$1,passwd,$3,$4,$5,$6,$7,$8,$9
      else
		        printf"%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s\n",$1,$2,$3,$4,$5,$6,$7,$8,$9
      }' passwd="$PASSWD" /a/etc/shadow.orig > /a/etc/shadow
 #remove the temporary file
 rm -f /a/etc/shadow.orig
 # set the flag so sysidroot won't prompt for the root password
 sed -e 's/0 # root/1 # root/' ${SI_SYS_STATE} > /tmp/state.$$
  mv /tmp/state.$$ ${SI_SYS_STATE}</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The following describes some of the commands in this example.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command sets the variable <ENVAR>PASSWD</ENVAR> to
an encrypted root password that is obtained from an existing entry in a system's <FILENAME>/etc/shadow</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
<SCREEN>#create a temporary input file</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command creates a temporary input file of <FILENAME>/a/etc/shadow</FILENAME>.</PARA>
<SCREEN>cp /a/etc/shadow /a/etc/shadow.orig</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command changes the root entry in the <FILENAME>/etc/shadow</FILENAME> file for the newly installed system by using <ENVAR>$PASSWD</ENVAR> as
the password field.</PARA>
<SCREEN>if ( $1 == "root" )</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command removes the temporary <FILENAME>/a/etc/shadow</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
<SCREEN>rm -f /a/etc/shadow.orig</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The following command changes the entry from <LITERAL>0</LITERAL> to
a <LITERAL>1</LITERAL> in the state file so that the user is not prompted
for the root password. The state file is accessed by using the variable <ENVAR>SI_SYS_STATE</ENVAR>, which has a value currently of <FILENAME>/a/etc/.sysIDtool.state</FILENAME>.
To avoid problems with your scripts if this value changes, always reference
this file by using <ENVAR>$SI_SYS_STATE</ENVAR>. The <COMMAND>sed</COMMAND> command
that is shown here contains a tab character after the <LITERAL>0</LITERAL> and
after the <LITERAL>1</LITERAL>.</PARA>
<SCREEN>sed -e 's/0 # root/1 # root/' ${SI_SYS_STATE} > /tmp/state.$$</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-2">
<TITLE>Non-Interactive Installations With Finish
Scripts</TITLE>
<PARA>You can use finish scripts to install additional software after the
Solaris OS is installed. The Solaris installation program  prompts you to enter information during
the installation. To maintain a hands-off installation, you can run the Solaris installation program  with
the <OPTION>nodisplay</OPTION> or <OPTION>noconsole</OPTION> options.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="WEBSTART-TBL-110">
<TITLE>Solaris Installation Options</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="33.68*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="66.32*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Option</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OPTION>nodisplay</OPTION></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Runs the installer without a graphic user interface.  Use the  default
 product installation unless the installation was modified by the <OPTION>locales</OPTION> option.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OPTION>noconsole</OPTION></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Runs the installation without any interactive text console device. 
  Useful when paired with <OPTION>nodisplay</OPTION> for UNIX script use.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<PARA>For more information, see the man page <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="INSTALLER-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>installer</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>. </PARA>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-4">
<TITLE>Creating a Compressed Configuration File</TITLE>
<PARA>Instead of using the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command to
specify the location of the custom JumpStart configuration files, you can
specify the location of the files when you boot the system. However, you can
only specify the name of one file. As a result, you must compress all of the
custom JumpStart configuration files into one file. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For SPARC based systems</EMPHASIS>,
you specify the location of the file in the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For x86 based systems</EMPHASIS>,
you specify the location of the files by editing the GRUB entry in the GRUB
menu</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The compressed configuration file can be one of the following types:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>tar</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Compressed <FILENAME>tar</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>zip</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><COMMAND>bzip</COMMAND> <FILENAME>tar</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<TASK ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-5A">
<TITLE>To Create a Compressed Configuration File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-7">
<PARA>Change the directory to the JumpStart
directory on the profile server.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-8">
<PARA>Use a compression tool to compress
the custom JumpStart configuration files into one file.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The compressed configuration file cannot contain relative paths.
The custom JumpStart configuration files must be in the same directory as
the compressed file.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>The compressed configuration file must contain the following files:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Profile</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>You can also include the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file in the compressed
configuration file.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-9">
<PARA>Save the compressed configuration file
on an NFS server, an HTTP server, or on a local hard disk.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-10">
<TITLE>Compressed Configuration File Example</TITLE>
<PARA>The following example shows how to use the <COMMAND>tar</COMMAND> command
to create a compressed configuration file that is named <FILENAME>config.tar</FILENAME>.
The custom JumpStart configuration files are located in the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-12">
<TITLE>Creating a Compressed Configuration
File</TITLE>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd /jumpstart</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>tar -cvf config.tar *</USERINPUT>
a profile 1K
a rules 1K
a rules.ok 1K
a sysidcfg 1K</SCREEN>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-77225">
<TITLE>Creating Disk Configuration Files</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX852">
<PRIMARY>configuring</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating disk configuration files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX853">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>disk configuration
files</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>This section describes how to create single-disk
and multiple-disk configuration files. Disk configuration files enable you
to use <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PFINSTALL-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pfinstall</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> from
a single system to test profiles against different disk configurations.</PARA>
<TASK ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-63517" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>To Create a Disk Configuration
File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-15">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX854">
<PRIMARY>disk configuration files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>SPARC based systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX855">
<PRIMARY>disk configuration files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Locate a SPARC based system with a disk you want to
test.</PARA>
</STEP><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-16">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX856">
<PRIMARY>prtvtoc command</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>SPARC: creating disk configuration
file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Create a single&ndash;disk configuration file
by redirecting the output of the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PRTVTOC-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>prtvtoc</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command to a file.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/</USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>></USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><FILENAME>/dev/rdsk/</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The device name of the system's disk. <REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE> must
be in the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s2</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s2</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the disk configuration file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-17">
<PARA>Determine if you are testing the installation
of Solaris software on multiple disks.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, stop. You are finished.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, concatenate the single&ndash;disk configuration files
and save the output in a new file.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cat</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>disk_file1 disk_file2</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>></USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>multi_disk_config</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<PARA>The new file becomes the multiple-disk configuration file, as in the
following example.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cat 104_disk2 104_disk3 104_disk5 >multi_disk_test</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-18">
<PARA>Determine if the target numbers in
the disk device names are unique in the multiple-disk configuration file that
you created in the previous step.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, stop. You are finished.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, open the file with a text editor and make the target
numbers unique in the disk device names.</PARA>
<PARA>For example, assume that
the file contains the same target number, <LITERAL>t0</LITERAL>, for different
disk device names, as shown here.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>Change the second target number to <LITERAL>t2</LITERAL>, as shown here:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t2d0s2 partition map</PROGRAMLISTING>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-20" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Disk Configuration File
Example</TITLE>
<PARA>The following example shows how to create a single&ndash;disk configuration
file, <FILENAME>104_test</FILENAME>, on a SPARC based system with a 104-Mbyte
disk.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-13" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Creating a Disk Configuration
File</TITLE>
<PARA>You redirect the output of the <COMMAND>prtvtoc</COMMAND> command to
a single&ndash;disk configuration file that is named <FILENAME>104_test</FILENAME>:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/c0t3d0s2 >104_test</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>The contents of the <FILENAME>104_test</FILENAME> file resemble the
following:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100" ROLE="COMPLETE">* /dev/rdsk/c0t3d0s2 partition map
*
* Dimensions:
*     512 bytes/sector
*      72 sectors/track
*      14 tracks/cylinder
*    1008 sectors/cylinder
*    2038 cylinders*    2036 accessible cylinders
* Flags:
*   1: unmountable
*  10: read-only
*
*                          First     Sector    Last
* Partition  Tag  Flags    Sector     Count    Sector  Mount Directory
       1      2    00          0     164304   164303   /
       2      5    00          0    2052288  2052287  
       3      0    00     164304     823536   987839   /disk2/b298
       5      0    00     987840     614880  1602719   /install/298/sparc/work
       7      0    00    1602720     449568  2052287   /space</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>You have created disk configuration files for a SPARC based system. <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25808">Testing a Profile</OLINK> contains information
about using disk configuration files to test profiles.</PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-35662" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>To Create a Disk Configuration
File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-22">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX865">
<PRIMARY>disk configuration files</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>x86 based systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Locate an x86 based system
that contains a disk that you are testing.</PARA>
</STEP><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-23">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX869">
<PRIMARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Create part
of the single-disk configuration file by saving the output of the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="FDISK-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>fdisk</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command in a file.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>fdisk -R -W</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>-h /dev/rdsk/</USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>disk_config_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of a disk configuration file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><FILENAME>/dev/rdsk/</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The device name of the <COMMAND>fdisk</COMMAND> layout of
the entire disk. <REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE> must be in the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s0</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s0</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-24">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX867">
<PRIMARY>prtvtoc command</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>x86: disk configuration file
creation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Append the output of the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PRTVTOC-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>prtvtoc</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command to the disk configuration
file: </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/</USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>>></USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>disk_config</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><FILENAME>/dev/rdsk/</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The device name of the system's disk. <REPLACEABLE>device_name</REPLACEABLE> must
be in the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s2</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s2</LITERAL>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>disk_config</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the disk configuration file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-25">
<PARA>Determine if you are testing the installation
of Solaris software on multiple disks.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, stop. You are finished. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, concatenate the single-disk configuration files and
save the output in a new file.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cat</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>disk_file1 disk_file2</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>></USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>multi_disk_config</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<PARA>The new file becomes the multiple-disk configuration file, as in the
following example.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cat 104_disk2 104_disk3 104_disk5 >multi_disk_test</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-STEP-6">
<PARA>Determine if the target numbers in
the disk device names are unique in the multiple-disk configuration file that
you created in the previous step.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, stop. You are finished.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, open the file with a text editor and make the target
numbers unique.</PARA>
<PARA>For example, the file might contain the same target
number, <LITERAL>t0</LITERAL>, for different disk device names as shown here:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>Change the second target number to <LITERAL>t2</LITERAL>, as shown here:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t2d0s2 partition map</PROGRAMLISTING>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-28" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Disk Configuration File Example</TITLE>
<PARA>The following example shows how to create a single-disk configuration
file, <FILENAME>500_test</FILENAME>, on an x86 based system that contains
a 500-Mbyte disk. </PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-EX-14" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Creating a Disk Configuration
File</TITLE>
<PARA>First, you save the output of the <COMMAND>fdisk</COMMAND> command to
a file that is named <FILENAME>500_test</FILENAME>: </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>fdisk -R -W 500_test -h /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0p0</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>500_test</FILENAME> file looks like the following:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100" ROLE="COMPLETE"> * /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0p0 default fdisk table
* Dimensions:
*     512 bytes/sector
*      94 sectors/track
*      15 tracks/cylinder
*    1455 cylinders
*
*  HBA Dimensions:
*     512 bytes/sector
*      94 sectors/track
*      15 tracks/cylinder
*    1455 cylinders
*
* systid:
*  1:    DOSOS12
*  2:    PCIXOS
*  4:    DOSOS16
*  5:    EXTDOS
*  6:    DOSBIG
*  86:   DOSDATA
*  98:   OTHEROS
*  99:   UNIXOS
* 130:   SUNIXOS
*
* Id  Act Bhead Bsect   Bcyl  Ehead  Esect  Ecyl Rsect  Numsect
 130  128 44    3       0     46    30     1001 1410   2050140</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>Second, you append the output of the <COMMAND>prtvtoc</COMMAND> command
to the <FILENAME>500_test</FILENAME> file: </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 >>500_test</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>500_test</FILENAME> file is now a complete disk configuration
file:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100" ROLE="COMPLETE">* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0p0 default fdisk table	
* Dimensions:
*     512 bytes/sector
*      94 sectors/track
*      15 tracks/cylinder
*    1455 cylinders
*
*  HBA Dimensions:
*     512 bytes/sector
*      94 sectors/track
*      15 tracks/cylinder
*    1455 cylinders
*
* systid:
*  1:    DOSOS12
*  2:    PCIXOS
*  4:    DOSOS16
*  5:    EXTDOS
*  6:    DOSBIG
*  86:   DOSDATA
*  98:   OTHEROS
*  99:   UNIXOS
*  130:  SUNIXOS
*
* Id  Act Bhead Bsect Bcyl  Ehead  Esec  Ecyl Rsect  Numsect
 130  128 44    3     0     46    30    1001 1410   2050140
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
*
* Dimensions:
*      512 bytes/sector
*       94 sectors/track
*       15 tracks/cylinder
*     1110 sectors/cylinder
*     1454 cylinders
*     1452 accessible cylinders
*
* Flags:
*   1: unmountable
*  10: read-only
*                          First    Sector    Last
* Partition  Tag  Flags    Sector     Count    Sector  Mount Directory
       2      5    01       1410   2045910   2047319
       7      6    00       4230   2043090   2047319  /space
       8      1    01          0      1410     1409
       9      9    01       1410      2820     422987</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>You have created disk configuration files for an x86 based system. <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25808">Testing a Profile</OLINK> contains information
about using disk configuration files to test profiles.</PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-73438">
<TITLE>Using a Site-Specific Installation
Program</TITLE>
<PARA>You can also use begin and finish scripts to create your own installation
program to install Solaris software.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX880">
<PRIMARY>alternative installation
programs</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX881">
<PRIMARY>begin
scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>site-specific installation programs</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX882">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart
installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>optional features</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>site-specific
installation programs</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX883">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>begin scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX884">
<PRIMARY>scripts</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>finish scripts</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="OPTIONALCUSTOM-IX885">
<PRIMARY>site-specific installation
programs</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>When you specify a minus sign (<LITERAL>-</LITERAL>)
in the profile field, begin and finish scripts control how Solaris software
is installed on a system instead of the profile and the Solaris installation
program.  </PARA>
<PARA>For example, if the following rule matches a system, the <FILENAME>x_install.beg</FILENAME> begin script and the <FILENAME>x_install.fin</FILENAME> finish
script install Solaris software on the system that is named <LITERAL>clover</LITERAL>:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">hostname clover x_install.beg - x_install.fin</PROGRAMLISTING>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000050200 0><?Entity End optionalcustom.sgm><?Entity Ref customprobes><?Entity Start customprobes.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target>
<CHAPTER ID="CUSTOMPROBES-1"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="off"
ref="2"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="vs145730" fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Creating Custom Rule and
Probe Keywords (Tasks)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter provides information and procedures for creating your own
custom rule and probe keywords.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-2">Probe Keywords</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-9">Creating a custom_probes
File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-13">Validating the custom_probes
File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMPROBES-2">
<TITLE>Probe Keywords</TITLE>
<PARA>To understand what a probe keyword is, you first need to recall what
a rule keyword is. A rule keyword is a predefined lexical unit or word that
describes a general system attribute, such as host name, <LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL>,
or memory size, <LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL>. Rule keywords and the values that
are associated with them enable you to match a system that has the same attribute
to a profile. This match of a system's attributes defines how the Solaris
software is to be installed on each system in the group. </PARA>
<PARA>Custom JumpStart environment variables, which you use in begin and finish
scripts, are set on demand. For example, information about which operating
system is already installed on a system is only available in <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR> after
the <LITERAL>installed</LITERAL> rule keyword is used.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>In some situations, you might need to extract the same information
in a begin or finish script for a purpose other than to match a system and
run a profile. Probe keywords provide the solution. Probe keywords extract
attribute information and remove the need for you to set up a matching condition
and run a profile.</PARA>
<PARA>For a list of probe keywords and values, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-6">Probe Keywords and Values</OLINK>.</PARA>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMPROBES-9">
<TITLE>Creating a <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA>The rule and probe keywords that are described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-74">Rule Keywords and Values</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-6">Probe Keywords and Values</OLINK> might not
be precise enough for your needs. You can define your own custom rule or probe
keywords by creating a <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file is a Bourne shell script
that contains two types of functions. You must save the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file
in the same JumpStart directory where you saved the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.
The two types of functions that you can define in a <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file
are as follows:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Probe &ndash; Gathers the information you want or does the
actual work and sets a corresponding <ENVAR>SI_</ENVAR> environment variable
that you define. Probe functions become probe keywords.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Comparison &ndash; Calls a corresponding probe function, compares
the output of the probe function, and returns 0 if the keyword matches or
1 if the keyword does not match. Comparison functions become rule keywords.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<SECT2 ID="CUSTOMPROBES-3">
<TITLE>Syntax of the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file can contain any valid Bourne
shell command, variable, or algorithm.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can define probe and comparison functions that require a single
argument in the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file. When you use the
corresponding custom probe keyword in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file,
the argument after the keyword is interpreted (as $1).</PARA>
<PARA>When you
use the corresponding custom rule keyword in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file,
the arguments are interpreted in sequence. The sequence starts after the keyword
and ends before the next <LITERAL>&amp;&amp;</LITERAL> or begin script, whichever
comes first.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>requirements</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file must meet the following requirements: </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>naming</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Have
the name <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Have <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> as its owner</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Be executable and have permissions set to 755</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Contain at least one probe function and one corresponding
comparison function</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>To improve clarity and organization, define all probe functions first,
at the top of the file, followed by all comparison functions.</PARA>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="CUSTOMPROBES-9A">
<TITLE>Syntax of Function Names in <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME></TITLE>
<PARA>The name of a probe function must begin with <LITERAL>probe_</LITERAL>.
The name of a comparison function must begin with <LITERAL>cmp_</LITERAL>.</PARA>
<PARA>Functions that begin with <LITERAL>probe_</LITERAL> define new probe
keywords. For example, the function <LITERAL>probe_tcx</LITERAL> defines the
new probe keyword <LITERAL>tcx</LITERAL>. Functions that begin with <LITERAL>cmp_</LITERAL> define new rule keywords. For example, <LITERAL>cmp_tcx</LITERAL> defines
the new rule keyword <LITERAL>tcx</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="CUSTOMPROBES-12">
<TITLE>To Create a <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-70">
<PARA>Use a text editor to create a Bourne
shell script text file.  Name the file <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-71">
<PARA>In the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> text
file, define your probe and comparison functions.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can define probe and comparison functions that require arguments
in the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file. When you use the corresponding
custom probe keyword in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, the arguments
after the keyword are interpreted in sequence (as $1, $2, and so on). </PARA>
<PARA>When you use the corresponding custom rule keyword in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file,
the arguments are interpreted in sequence. The sequence starts after the keyword
and ends before the next <LITERAL>&amp;&amp;</LITERAL> or begin script, whichever
comes first.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-74A">
<PARA>Save the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file
in the JumpStart directory next to the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-4">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and that the permissions are set to 644.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="CUSTOMPROBES-10">
<TITLE>Examples of a <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> File
and Keyword</TITLE>
<PARA>You can find additional examples of probe and comparison functions in
the following directories:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>/usr/sbin/install.d/chkprobe</FILENAME> on a system
that has the Solaris software installed</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Tools/Boot/usr/sbin/install.d/chkprobe</FILENAME> on the Solaris Operating System DVD or on the Solaris Software - 1 CD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The following <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file contains a probe
and comparison function that tests for the presence of a TCX graphics card.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="CUSTOMPROBES-EX-6">
<TITLE><FILENAME>custom_probes File</FILENAME></TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">#!/bin/sh
# 
# custom_probe script to test for the presence of a TCX graphics card.
# 

# 
# PROBE FUNCTIONS
# 
probe_tcx() {
  SI_TCX=`modinfo | grep tcx | nawk '{print $6}'`
  export SI_TCX
}

# 
# COMPARISON FUNCTIONS
# 
cmp_tcx() {
  probe_tcx

  if [ "X${SI_TCX}" = "X${1}" ]; then
     return 0
  else
     return 1
  if
}</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<PARA>The following example <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file shows the use
of the probe keyword that is defined in the preceding example, <LITERAL>tcx</LITERAL>.
If a TCX graphics card is installed and found in a system, <FILENAME>profile_tcx</FILENAME> is
run. Otherwise, <FILENAME>profile</FILENAME> is run.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Always place probe keywords at or near the beginning of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file. This placement ensures that the keywords are read and
run before other rule keywords that might rely on the probe keywords.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<EXAMPLE ID="CUSTOMPROBES-EX-7">
<TITLE>Custom Probe Keyword Used in a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">probe tcx
tcx     tcx     -     profile_tcx     -
any     any     -     profile         -</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMPROBES-13">
<TITLE>Validating the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX738">
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file validation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX739">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating by using check</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX740">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX743">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Before you can use a profile, <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME>, and <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file, you must run the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
to validate that the files are set up correctly. If all profiles, rules, and
probe and comparison functions are correctly set up, the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> files are created. <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-TBL-2">Table 5&ndash;1</OLINK> describes what the <FILENAME>check</FILENAME> script does. </PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="CUSTOMPROBES-TBL-2">
<TITLE>What Happens When You
Use the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> Script</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="44*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="352*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Stage</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>1</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><COMMAND>check</COMMAND> searches for a <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>2</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX748">
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file creation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX749">
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX750">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>If the file exists, <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> creates
the <FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file from the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file,
removes all comments and blank lines, and retains all Bourne shell commands,
variables, and algorithms. Then, <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> adds the following
comment line at the end:  </PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL># version=2 checksum=num</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<TASK ID="CUSTOMPROBES-91711">
<TITLE>To Validate the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> File</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-76">
<PARA>Verify that the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
is located in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX752">
<PRIMARY>auto_install_sample
directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>check script</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script is in the <FILENAME>Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample</FILENAME> directory on the Solaris Operating System DVD or on the Solaris Software - 1 CD.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-77">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX753">
<PRIMARY>changing directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>to JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX754">
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>changing</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>to JumpStart directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Change to the JumpStart directory. </PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-78">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX755">
<PRIMARY>paths, check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX756">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="p option of check script">-p option
of check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Run the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
to validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> files. </PARA>
<SCREEN>$ <USERINPUT>./check</USERINPUT> <USERINPUT>-p</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> <USERINPUT>-r</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>file_name</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>p</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Validates the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file by using
the <FILENAME>check</FILENAME> script from the Solaris software image for
your platform instead of the <FILENAME>check</FILENAME> script from the system
you are using. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> is the image on a local disk
or a mounted Solaris Operating System DVD or Solaris Software - 1 CD.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX757">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing
validity</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX758">
<PRIMARY>check
script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX759">
<PRIMARY SORTAS="r option of check script">-r option
of check script</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX760">
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>testing <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME></SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX761">
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>testing <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME></TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="CUSTOMPROBES-IX762">
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>testing </TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use this option to run the most recent
version of <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> if your system is running a previous version
of Solaris.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>r</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>file_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies a file name other than the one that is named <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME>. By using the <OPTION>r</OPTION> option, you can
test the validity of a set of functions before integrating the functions into
the <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
validation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using
check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>check script</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file
validation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating by using check</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> file</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>using check</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>As the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script
runs, the script reports the validity of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>custom_probes</FILENAME> files and each profile. If no errors are encountered,
the script reports: &ldquo;The custom JumpStart configuration is ok&rdquo;
and creates the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> files
in the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-20">
<PARA>Determine if the <FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file is executable.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-5">Step&nbsp;5</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, type the following command.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>chmod +x custom_probes</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMPROBES-STEP-5">
<PARA>Ensure that <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> owns
the <FILENAME>custom_probes.ok</FILENAME> file and that the permissions are
set to 755.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000018458 0><?Entity End customprobes.sgm><?Entity Ref customjump><?Entity Start customjump.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<CHAPTER ID="CUSTOMJUMP-88491"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="3"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname=""><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation
(Tasks)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter describes how to perform a custom JumpStart installation
on a SPARC based or an x86 based system. You need to follow these procedures
on the system on which you intend to install the Solaris software.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-721">To Perform an Installation
or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="FAATY">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>booting and installing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="FAAYN">
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="FAAYB">
<PRIMARY>upgrade</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>custom JumpStart installation</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-723">To Perform an Installation or
Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program and With GRUB</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="GEVLI">
<TITLE>Limitations for a JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<PARA>A number of issues might cause problems during a JumpStart installation.
Review the table below for specific information.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="GEVAM">
<TITLE>JumpStart Installation
Limitations</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="34.21*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="68.93*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="46.88*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Issue</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For More Information</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The sample JumpStart script is no longer required to suppress the NFSv4
prompt</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<NOTE>
<PARA>In prior releases,
the <LITERAL>/etc/.NFS4inst_state.domain</LITERAL> file was created by the <FILENAME>sysidnfs4</FILENAME> program. This file would suppress the prompt for an NFSv4
domain name during installation. This file is no longer created. Use the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> keyword,  <LITERAL>nfs4_domain</LITERAL>, instead.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="GCIML"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">nfs4_domain Keyword</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Selecting a keyboard language in the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file
prevents a prompt</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If your keyboard is not self-identifying and you want to prevent being
prompted during your JumpStart installation, select the keyboard language
in your <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file. For JumpStart installations, the
default is for the U.S. English language. To select another language and its
corresponding keyboard layout, set the keyboard keyword in your <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="PRECONSYSID-2"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">sysidcfg File Keywords</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA> For man pages, see:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN" TARGETPTR="SYSIDTOOL-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>sysidtool</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN" TARGETPTR="SYSIDCFG-4"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>sysidcfg</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>4</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If you have non-global zones, use Solaris Live Upgrade to upgrade</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>You can upgrade a system that has non-global zones installed with JumpStart,
but Solaris Live Upgrade is the recommended program to upgrade. JumpStart
might require extensive upgrade time, because the time required to complete
the upgrade increases linearly with the number of installed non-global zones.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>An archive cannot contain non-global zones</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If you use a Solaris Flash archive to install,  an archive that
contains non-global zones is not properly installed on your system. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For general information about creating non-global zones, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADRM"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Solaris Containers-Resource Management and Solaris Zones</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>SPARC: Additional hardware requirements</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Refer to your hardware documentation for any additional requirements
for your platform that might be required to complete a JumpStart installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="FXJXX" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Task Map: Setting Up a System for a
Custom JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<TABLE FRAME="ALL" ID="CUSTOMJUMP-TBL-2">
<TITLE>Task Map: Setting
Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="33*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="33*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="33*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Task</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>For Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Check if the system is supported.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Check the hardware documentation for system support in the Solaris environment.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><CITETITLE>Solaris Sun Hardware Platform Guide</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="URL">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Check if the system has enough disk space for the Solaris software.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Verify that you have planned enough space to install the Solaris software
on your system.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="DISKSPACE-1">Chapter 4, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">System Requirements, Guidelines, and Upgrade (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Set system parameters.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>You can preconfigure system information to avoid being prompted for
the information during the installation or upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="PRECONSYSID-15630">Chapter 2, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Preconfiguring System Configuration Information (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Prepare the system for custom JumpStart installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Create and validate a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and profile files.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56440">Chapter&nbsp;3, Preparing Custom
JumpStart Installations (Tasks)</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Prepare optional custom JumpStart features.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>If you are using begin scripts, finish scripts, or other optional features,
prepare the scripts or files.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-29530">Chapter&nbsp;4, Using Optional
Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks)</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-1">Chapter&nbsp;5,
Creating Custom Rule and Probe Keywords (Tasks)</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Prepare to install the Solaris software from the network.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>To install a system from a remote Solaris Operating System DVD or Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms CD
image, you need to set up the system to boot and install from an install server
or a boot server.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALLDVD-28995">Chapter 5, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Installing From the Network With DVD Media (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALL-28995">Chapter 6, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Installing From the Network With CD Media (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Prepare for a Solaris Flash archive installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Set up specifics for a Solaris Flash archive installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="FLASH-46">To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive
With a Custom JumpStart Installation</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Perform an installation or upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Boot the system to initiate the installation or upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-721">To Perform an Installation or Upgrade
With the Custom JumpStart Program</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMP-40000" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Performing a Custom JumpStart
Installation</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching system attributes
and profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching systems to</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>matching</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>order for rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching order</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules.ok
file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching order for rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>During
a custom JumpStart installation, the JumpStart program attempts to match the
system that is being installed to the rules in the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file.
 The JumpStart program reads the rules from the first rule through the last.
A match occurs when the system that is being installed matches all the system
attributes that are defined in the rule. When a system matches a rule, the
JumpStart program stops reading the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file and
begins to install the system, based on the matched rule's profile.</PARA>
<TASK ID="FLASH-46">
<TITLE>To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive
With a Custom JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>You can install a full archive for an initial installation or if you
have already installed an archive, a differential archive for an update. You
can use the custom JumpStart installation method or use Solaris Live Upgrade
to install an archive on an inactive boot environment. This procedure provides
the instructions to install an archive with custom JumpStart.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For an overview of a full or differential archive, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLFLASH" TARGETPTR="FLASH-24">Chapter 1, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Flash (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and Installation)</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For procedures about installing an archive on an inactive
boot environment by using Solaris Live Upgrade, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="LUUPGRADE1-8800"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Profile</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP>
<PARA>Review the following limitations.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Example</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Caution</EMPHASIS>: When using the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword to install a Solaris Flash archive, the archive and
the installation media must contain identical operating system versions.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For example, if the archive is a Solaris Express 5/07 operating
system and you are using DVD media, then you must use Solaris Express 5/07 DVD
media to install the archive. If the operating systems versions do not match,
the installation on the clone system fails.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<CAUTION>
<PARA>A Solaris Flash archive cannot be properly created when
a non-global zone is installed. The Solaris Flash feature is not compatible
 with the Solaris Zones partitioning technology. If you create a Solaris Flash
archive, the resulting  archive is not installed properly when the archive
is deployed under these conditions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The archive is created in a non-global zone</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The archive is created in a global zone that has non-global
zones installed</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</CAUTION>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASHINSTALL-STEP-1A">
<PARA>On the install server, create the custom
JumpStart <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
<PARA>For detailed instructions
about creating custom JumpStart files, refer to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56440">Chapter&nbsp;3, Preparing Custom JumpStart
Installations (Tasks)</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASH-STEP-49">
<PARA>On the install server, create the custom JumpStart
profile file.</PARA>
<PARA>For examples of Solaris Flash archive profiles,
see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-45277">Profile Examples</OLINK>.</PARA>
<PARA>From the existing list of custom JumpStart keywords in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-TBL-118">Table 8&ndash;2</OLINK>, the only keywords
valid when you install a Solaris Flash archive are the following:</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="CUSTOMJUMP-TBL-3">
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="33.00*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="20.00*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC3" COLWIDTH="46.00*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Initial Installation</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Differential Archive</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>(required)<LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> (x86 only)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You cannot set the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keyword to the value <LITERAL>auto</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>forced_deployment</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>(required) <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>local_customization</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>no_content_check</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>no_master_check</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
<SUBSTEPS>
<STEP ID="FLASHINSTALL-STEP-11">
<PARA>Set the value of the keyword <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> to one of the following types.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For a full archive installation, set the value to <LITERAL>flash_install</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For a differential archive installation, set the value to <LITERAL>flash_update</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASHINSTALL-STEP-3">
<PARA>Add the path to the Solaris Flash archive
by using the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL>  keyword.</PARA>
<PARA>For
details about the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword, refer to <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-2">archive_location Keyword</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASHINSTALL-STEP-15">
<PARA>Specify the file system configuration.</PARA>
<PARA>The Solaris Flash archive extraction process does not support auto-layout
of partitions.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>(Optional) If you want to install additional packages at the same
time you install an archive, use the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword. For
more information, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-94">package Profile
Keyword</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASHINSTALL-STEP-4">
<PARA>(Optional) If you want to install an
additional Solaris Flash archive on the clone system, add one <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> line for each archive that you want to install.</PARA>
</STEP>
</SUBSTEPS>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASH-STEP-11">
<PARA>On the install server, add the clients that
you are installing with the Solaris Flash archive.</PARA>
<PARA>For detailed
instructions, refer to the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALLDVD-40778"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a DVD Image</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALL-40778"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a CD Image</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FLASH-STEP-12">
<PARA>Perform the custom JumpStart installation on
the clone systems.</PARA>
<PARA>For detailed instructions, refer to <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-721">To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the
Custom JumpStart Program</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<TASK ID="CUSTOMJUMP-721" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>To Perform an Installation or
Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-700">
<PARA>If the system is part of a network, ensure
that an Ethernet connector or similar network adapter is attached to your
system.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-54">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>display</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>tip line connection requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>tip line connection
requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>tip line connection display dimensions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>tip line connection requirements</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>If you are
installing a system that is connected through a <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="TIP-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>tip</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> line, ensure that your window display is at least
80 columns wide and 24 rows long.    </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>stty
command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>To determine the current dimensions of your <COMMAND>tip</COMMAND> window, use the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="STTY-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>stty</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-600">
<PARA>If you are using the system's DVD-ROM
or CD-ROM drive to install the Solaris software, insert the Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD or
the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD in the drive.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-9">
<PARA>If you are using a profile diskette,  insert
the profile diskette in the system's diskette drive.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-55">
<PARA>Boot the system. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the system is new, out&ndash;of&ndash;the&ndash;box, turn
on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you want to install or upgrade an existing system, shut
down the system. At the <LITERAL>ok</LITERAL> prompt, type the appropriate
options for the boot command. The syntax of the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command
is the following.</PARA>
<SCREEN>ok <USERINPUT>boot</USERINPUT> [<REPLACEABLE>cd&ndash;dvd</REPLACEABLE>|<USERINPUT>net</USERINPUT>] <USERINPUT>- install</USERINPUT> [<USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE>|ask</USERINPUT>] <REPLACEABLE>options</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<PARA>For example, if you type the following command, the OS is installed
over the network by using a JumpStart profile.</PARA>
<SCREEN>ok <USERINPUT>boot net - install http://131.141.2.32/jumpstart/config.tar</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>For a description of the boot command options, see the following table.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE ARCH="SPARC">
<PARA>The system checks hardware and system components
and your  SPARC based system boots. Booting lasts several minutes. </PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-7B">
<PARA>If you did not preconfigure system information
in the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file, when prompted, answer the questions
about system configuration.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-76">
<PARA>Follow the instructions on the screen
to install the software.</PARA>
<PARA>When the JumpStart program finishes installing
the Solaris software, the system reboots automatically.</PARA>
<PARA>After
the installation is finished, installation logs are saved in a file. You can
find the installation logs in the following directories:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>/var/sadm/system/logs</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>/var/sadm/install/logs</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="CUSTOMJUMP-10" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Command Reference for the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> Command</TITLE>
<PARA>The syntax of the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command is the following.</PARA>
<SCREEN>ok <USERINPUT>boot</USERINPUT> [<REPLACEABLE>cd&ndash;dvd</REPLACEABLE>|<USERINPUT>net</USERINPUT>] <USERINPUT>- install</USERINPUT> [<REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE>|<USERINPUT>ask</USERINPUT>] <REPLACEABLE>options</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<PARA>The following table describes the command-line options for the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command that are appropriate for a JumpStart installation.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="100">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="18.74*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="81.26*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Option</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>[<REPLACEABLE>cd&ndash;dvd</REPLACEABLE>|net]</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Specifies to boot from a CD or a DVD or to boot from an install server
on the network.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>cd-dvd</REPLACEABLE> - Use <LITERAL>cdrom</LITERAL> to
boot from a CD or a DVD.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>net</LITERAL> - Specifies to boot from an install
server on the network.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>[<REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE>| ask]</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the custom JumpStart files or prompts you
for the location. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; Specifies the path
to the files. You can specify a URL for files that are located in an HTTP
or HTTPS server:</PARA>
<PARA>HTTP server</PARA>
<SCREEN>http://<REPLACEABLE>server_name:IP_address/jumpstart_dir_path/</REPLACEABLE>
<REPLACEABLE>compressed_config_file&amp;proxy_info</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you placed a <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file in the
compressed configuration file, you must specify the IP address of the server
that contains the file, as in the following example:</PARA>
<SCREEN>http://131.141.2.32/jumpstart/config.tar</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you saved the compressed configuration file on an HTTP
server that is behind a firewall, you must use a proxy specifier during boot.
 You do not need to specify an IP address for the server that contains the
file.  You must specify an IP address for the proxy server, as in the following
example:</PARA>
<SCREEN>http://www.shadow.com/jumpstart/
config.tar&amp;proxy=131.141.6.151</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>ask</LITERAL> &ndash; Specifies that the installation
program prompt you to type the location of the compressed configuration file.
The prompt happens  after the system boots and connects to the network. If
you use this option, you are not able to do a completely hands off JumpStart
installation.</PARA>
<PARA>If you bypass the prompt by pressing Return, the
Solaris installation program interactively configures the network parameters.
 The installation program then prompts you for the location of the compressed
configuration file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>options</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>dhcp</LITERAL> &ndash; Specifies to use a DHCP server
to obtain network installation information that is needed to boot the system.
This option is not needed for a JumpStart installation. If you do not specify
to use a DHCP server by typing <LITERAL>dhcp</LITERAL>, the system uses the <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file or the naming service <FILENAME>bootparams</FILENAME> database.
For example, you would not specify <LITERAL>dhcp</LITERAL> if you wanted keep
a static IP address.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The options <LITERAL>nowin</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>text</LITERAL> do
not apply to a JumpStart installation. These options are useful with an interactive
installation. For more information, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLARISINSTALL" TARGETPTR="WEBSTART-24"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">To Install or Upgrade With the Solaris Installation Program</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Basic Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="FXJXU" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom
JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<TABLE FRAME="ALL" ID="CUSTOMJUMP-TBL-6" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Task Map: Setting
Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="33*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="33*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="33*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Task</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>For Instructions</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Determine if you need to preserve an existing operating system and user
data.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>If the existing operating system on the system uses the entire disk,
you must preserve the existing operating system so it can co-exist with the
Solaris Express 5/07 software. This decision determines how to specify
the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="FDISK-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>fdisk</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> keyword
in the system's profile.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-87">fdisk Profile Keyword</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Check if the system is supported.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Check the hardware documentation for system support in the Solaris environment.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Hardware manufacturer's documentation</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Check if the system has enough disk space for the Solaris software.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Verify that you have planned enough space to install the Solaris software
on your system.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="DISKSPACE-1">Chapter 4, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">System Requirements, Guidelines, and Upgrade (Planning),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Set system parameters.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>You can preconfigure system information to avoid being prompted for
the information during the installation or upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="PRECONSYSID-15630">Chapter 2, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Preconfiguring System Configuration Information (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Prepare the system for custom JumpStart installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Create and validate a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and profile files.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56440">Chapter&nbsp;3, Preparing Custom
JumpStart Installations (Tasks)</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Prepare optional custom JumpStart features.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>If you are using begin scripts, finish scripts, or other optional features,
prepare the scripts or files.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="OPTIONALCUSTOM-29530">Chapter&nbsp;4, Using Optional
Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks)</OLINK> and <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-1">Chapter&nbsp;5,
Creating Custom Rule and Probe Keywords (Tasks)</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Prepare to install the Solaris software from the network.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>To install a system from a remote Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or Solaris Software For x86 Platforms  CD
image, you need to set up the system to boot and install from an install server
or a boot server.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALL-28995">Chapter 6, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Installing From the Network With CD Media (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>(Optional) Prepare for a Solaris Flash archive installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Set up specifics for a Solaris Flash archive installation.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="FLASH-46">To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive
With a Custom JumpStart Installation</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Perform an installation or upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Boot the system to initiate the installation or upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-723">To Perform an Installation or Upgrade
With the Custom JumpStart Program and With GRUB</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMP-3" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching system attributes
and profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching systems to</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>matching</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>order for rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching order</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules.ok
file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>matching order for rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>During
a custom JumpStart installation, the JumpStart program attempts to match the
system that is being installed to the rules in the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file.
The JumpStart program reads the rules from the first rule through the last
rule. A match occurs when the system that is being installed matches all of
the system attributes that are defined in the rule. As soon as a system matches
a rule, the JumpStart program stops reading the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file
and begins to install the system, based on the matched rule's profile.</PARA>
<PARA>You can install a Solaris Flash archive with custom JumpStart.
For instructions, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="FLASH-46">To Prepare to Install a
Solaris Flash Archive With a Custom JumpStart Installation</OLINK>.</PARA>
<PARA>Choose one of the following procedures:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For a standard custom JumpStart procedure, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-723">To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the
Custom JumpStart Program and With GRUB</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>To perform a custom JumpStart by editing the GRUB command,
see <OLINK TARGETPTR="FXBNH">Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation by
Editing the GRUB Boot Command</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<TASK ID="CUSTOMJUMP-723" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>To Perform an Installation or
Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program and With GRUB</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>GRUB based booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installing with
GRUB</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use this procedure to install the Solaris OS for
an x86 based system with the GRUB menu.</PARA>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure ID="CUSTOMJUMP-165">
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-64">
<PARA>If the system is part of a network, ensure
that an Ethernet connector or similar network adapter is attached to your
system.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-704">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>display</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>tip line connection requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>tip line connection
requirements</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>tip line connection display dimensions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>tip line connection display requirements</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>If
you want to install a system that is connected through a <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="TIP-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>tip</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> line, ensure that your window
display is at least 80 columns wide and 24 rows long.    </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>stty command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>To determine the current dimensions
of your <COMMAND>tip</COMMAND> window, use the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="STTY-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>stty</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-713">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>tip line connection
display requirements</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Decide if you want to use a profile
diskette. </PARA>
<PARA>A profile diskette is no longer used to boot the system
but, a diskette can be prepared that includes only the JumpStart directory.
The diskette can then be used situations such as performing a JumpStart installation
and booting off the CD-ROM.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you are using a profile diskette,  insert the profile diskette
into the system's diskette drive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you are not using a profile diskette, continue with step <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-7">Step&nbsp;4</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-7">
<PARA>Decide how to boot the system.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you boot from the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD,
insert the disc. Your system's BIOS must support booting from a DVD or CD.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you boot from the network, use Preboot Execution Environment
(PXE) network boot. The system must support PXE. Enable the system to use
PXE by using the system's BIOS setup tool or the network adapter's configuration
setup tool. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-164">
<PARA>(Optional) If you are booting from a
DVD or CD, change the boot setting in your system's BIOS and set to boot from
DVD or CD media. See your hardware documentation for instructions.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FXBVV">
<PARA>If the system is off, turn the system on. If the system
is on, reboot the system.</PARA>
<PARA>The GRUB menu is displayed. This menu
provides a list of boot entries.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For an installation with CD media:</PARA>
<SCREEN>GNU GRUB version 0.95 (631K lower / 2095488K upper memory)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
|Solaris Express 5/07 <REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE>                                               |
|Solaris Express 5/07 Serial Console tty                                 |
|Solaris Express 5/07 Serial Console ttyb (for lx50, v60x and v65)       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
Use the ^ and v keys to select which entry is highlighted. Press
enter to boot the selected OS, 'e' to edit the commands before
booting, or 'c' for a command-line.</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For an installation with a DVD media:</PARA>
<SCREEN>GNU GRUB version 0.95 (631K lower / 2095488K upper memory)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
|Solaris Express Developer Edition <REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE>                             |
|Solaris Express 5/07                                                    |
|Solaris Express 5/07 Serial Console ttya                                |
|Solaris Express 5/07 Serial Console ttyb (for lx50, v60x and v65)       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
Use the ^ and v keys to select which entry is highlighted. Press
enter to boot the selected OS, 'e' to edit the commands before
booting, or 'c' for a command-line.</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>If you use DVD media, you must choose the &ldquo;Solaris
Express&rdquo; release. The default &ldquo;Solaris Express Developer Edition&rdquo;
release does not give you a choice for a JumpStart installation.</PARA>
<PARA>The <REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE> is the name of the directory  where the installation
image is located. The path to the JumpStart files was defined with the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command and  the <OPTION>c</OPTION> option.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Instead of booting from the GRUB entry now, you can edit the boot
entry. After editing the GRUB entry, you then perform the JumpStart installation.
For instructions about how to edit the GRUB entry and a list of installation
options, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="FXBNH">Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation
by Editing the GRUB Boot Command</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-70">
<PARA>At the prompt, perform one of the following
instructions:</PARA>
<SCREEN>Select the type of installation you want to perform:
 
         1 Solaris Interactive
         2 Custom JumpStart
         3 Solaris Interactive Text (Desktop session)
         4 Solaris Interactive Text (Console session)
         5. Apply driver updates
         6. Single User Shell
Enter the number of your choice.
Please make a selection (1-6).</SCREEN>
<PARA>To select the custom JumpStart method, type <USERINPUT>2</USERINPUT> and
press Enter.</PARA>
<PARA>The JumpStart installation begins.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you do not make a selection within 30 seconds, the Solaris
interactive installation program begins. You can stop the timer by typing
any key at the command line.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you select items 1, 3, or 4, you install with an interactive
installation. For information about interactive installations, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLARISINSTALL"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Basic Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you select item 5, you install driver updates. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you select item 6, you can perform maintenance tasks.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-72">
<PARA>If you did not preconfigure system information
in the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file, when prompted, answer the questions
about system configuration.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-76A">
<PARA>Follow the instructions on the screen
to install the software.</PARA>
<PARA>When the JumpStart program finishes installing
the Solaris software, the system reboots automatically. Also, the GRUB <FILENAME>menu.lst</FILENAME> file is automatically updated. Then the instance of Solaris
that you have installed appears in the next use of the GRUB menu.</PARA>
<PARA>After
the installation is finished, installation logs are saved in a file. You can
find the installation logs in the following directories:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>/var/sadm/system/logs</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>/var/sadm/install/logs</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="FXBNH" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation
by Editing the GRUB Boot Command</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>GRUB based booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installing with
GRUB</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>In some circumstances such as for debugging purposes,
you might want to modify the GRUB boot command. The following procedure describes
the steps to edit the GRUB boot command before performing the custom JumpStart
installation.</PARA>
<TASK ID="FXJYC" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>To Modify the GRUB Boot Command</TITLE><procedure>
<STEP>
<PARA>To begin the installation, proceed with <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-64">Step&nbsp;1</OLINK> through <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-STEP-164">Step&nbsp;5</OLINK> in the preceding procedure, <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-723">To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the
Custom JumpStart Program and With GRUB</OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="FXCVV">
<PARA>If the system is off, turn the system on. If the system
is on, reboot the system.</PARA>
<PARA>The GRUB menu is displayed. This menu
provides a list of boot entries. The entry that is  provided is the Solaris
instance to be installed.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For an installation with CD media:</PARA>
<SCREEN REMAP="wide">GNU GRUB version 0.95 (631K lower / 2095488K upper memory)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
|Solaris Express <REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE>               
|Solaris Express Serial Console tty                                 |
|Solaris Express Serial Console ttyb (for lx50, v60x and v65)       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
Use the ^ and v keys to select which entry is highlighted. Press
enter to boot the selected OS, 'e' to edit the commands before
booting, or 'c' for a command-line.</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For an installation with a DVD media:</PARA>
<SCREEN>GNU GRUB version 0.95 (631K lower / 2095488K upper memory)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
|Solaris Express Developer Edition <REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE> 
|Solaris Express                                                    |
|Solaris Exprress Serial Console ttya                               |
|Solaris Express Serial Console ttyb (for lx50, v60x and v65)       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
Use the ^ and v keys to select which entry is highlighted. Press
enter to boot the selected OS, 'e' to edit the commands before
booting, or 'c' for a command-line.</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The <REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE> is
the name of the directory  where the installation image is located. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you used the NFS to set the path to the JumpStart directory
with the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command and  the <OPTION>c</OPTION> option,
then you do not need to include the path in the boot entry.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you are not using NFS, then you must note the path to the
compressed configuration file that contains the JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>To stop the booting process and use the menu entry editor, type <USERINPUT>e</USERINPUT>.</PARA>
<PARA>A
GRUB edit menu similar to the following displayed.</PARA>
<SCREEN>kernel /I86PC.Solaris_11-30/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix - -install -B \
install_media=192.168.79.61:/export/Solaris_11-30,\
sysid_config=192.168.79.57:/export/install/sysid/sysidcfg,\
install_config=192.168.79.57:/export/install/jumpstart"
module /I86PC.Solaris_11-30/x86.miniroot</SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Use the arrow keys to select the boot entry.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>To edit the selected command, type <USERINPUT>e</USERINPUT>. </PARA>
<PARA>A command that is similar to the following example displays.</PARA>
<SCREEN>grub edit>kernel /I86PC.Solaris_11-30/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix - -install -B \
install_media=192.168.79.61:/export/Solaris_11-30,\
sysid_config=192.168.79.57:/export/install/sysid/sysidcfg,\
install_config=192.168.79.57:/export/install/jumpstart"
module /I86PC.Solaris_11-30/x86.miniroot</SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Edit the command by typing the options that you need.</PARA>
<PARA>The
syntax for a JumpStart installation is the following.</PARA>
<SCREEN>grub edit>kernel$ /I86PC.Solaris_11-<REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE>
/platform/i86pc/kernel/<REPLACEABLE>$ISADIR</REPLACEABLE>/unix/ \
<USERINPUT>- install</USERINPUT> [<REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE>|<USERINPUT>ask</USERINPUT>] <EMPHASIS>options</EMPHASIS> \
-B install_media=<REPLACEABLE>media_type</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<NOTE>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Starting with the 5/07 Developer release,</EMPHASIS> GRUB has
enhanced support for directly booting the <LITERAL>unix</LITERAL> kernel.
The new <LITERAL>$ISADIR</LITERAL> keyword resolves to <LITERAL>amd64</LITERAL> for
64-bit hardware and to null for 32-bit hardware. For details, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="GAZVA"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">GRUB Menu Commands for Installation</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>For a description
of JumpStart options, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMP-11">Command Reference
for Booting the System</OLINK>. </PARA>
<PARA>In the following example, the
OS is installed over the network with a custom JumpStart profile. </PARA>
<SCREEN>kernel /I86PC.Solaris_11-8/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix/ <USERINPUT>- install</USERINPUT> \
-B install_media=192.168.79.61:/export/Solaris_11-30,\
sysid_config=192.168.79.57:/export/install/sysid/sysidcfg,\
install_config=192.168.79.57:/export/install/jumpstart"
module /I86PC.Solaris_11-30/x86.miniroot</SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>To accept the edits, press Enter.</PARA>
<PARA>Your changes are
saved and the GRUB main menu is displayed.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Pressing the Escape key returns you to the GRUB main menu without
saving your changes.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>To begin the installation, type <USERINPUT>b</USERINPUT>.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="CUSTOMJUMP-11" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Command Reference for Booting
the System</TITLE>
<PARA>The following table describes the command-line options for the GRUB
menu boot command. The options listed are appropriate for a JumpStart installation.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>GRUB based booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>command reference</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>booting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>with
GRUB, command reference</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The syntax of the boot command
is the following.</PARA>
<SCREEN>kernel$ /I86PC.Solaris_11-<REPLACEABLE>image_directory</REPLACEABLE>/platform/i86pc/kernel/<REPLACEABLE>$ISADIR</REPLACEABLE>/unix/ \
<USERINPUT>- install</USERINPUT> [<REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE>|<USERINPUT>ask</USERINPUT>] \
<EMPHASIS>options</EMPHASIS> -B install_media=<REPLACEABLE>media_type</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<NOTE>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Starting with the 5/07 Developer release,</EMPHASIS> GRUB
has enhanced support for directly booting the <LITERAL>unix</LITERAL> kernel.
For details about these enhancements, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="GAZVA"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">GRUB Menu Commands for Installation</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="100" ID="GBZCK">
<TITLE>GRUB Menu Boot Command
Reference</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="18.74*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="81.26*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Option</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><LITERAL>kernel$</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>module$</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Starting with the Solaris Express Developer
Edition 5/07 release,</EMPHASIS> enables GRUB to determine 32-bit or 64-bit
hardware capacity. Results are displayed by using the <LITERAL>$ISADIR</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>These new keywords are used in normal installations. However,
the miniroot is 32-bit only. Therefore, failsafe installations do not display
these keywords.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><LITERAL>$ISADIR</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Resolves to <LITERAL>amd64</LITERAL> for 64-bit hardware and resolves
to null for 32-bit hardware.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA><LITERAL>- install</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1">
<PARA>Performs a custom JumpStart installation.</PARA>
<PARA>In the following example, the system boots from DVD media and the following
options were used:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>- install</LITERAL> performs a custom JumpStart </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><FILENAME>file://jumpstart/config.tar</FILENAME> finds the
JumpStart profile on the local disk</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<SCREEN>kernel$ /I86pc.Solaris_11.8/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix <USERINPUT>- install file://jumpstart/config.tar</USERINPUT> \
 -B install_media=dvdrom module /I86Solaris_11.8/x86.new</SCREEN>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>[<REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE>| ask]</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the custom JumpStart files or prompts you
for the location. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>url</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; Specifies the path
to the files. You can specify a URL for files that are located on an HTTP
or HTTPS server:</PARA>
<PARA>The syntax for an HTTP server is the following:</PARA>
<SCREEN>http://<REPLACEABLE>server_name:IP_address/jumpstart_dir_path/</REPLACEABLE>
<REPLACEABLE>compressed_config_file&amp;proxy_info</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you placed a <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file in the
compressed configuration file, you must specify the IP address of the server
that contains the file, as in the following example:</PARA>
<SCREEN>kernel$ /I86pc.Solaris_11.8/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix <USERINPUT>install \
http://192.168.2.1/jumpstart/config.tar</USERINPUT> \
 -B install_media=192.168.2.1/export/Solaris_11.8/boot \
module /I86PC.Solaris_11.8/x86.new</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you saved the compressed configuration file on an HTTP
server that is behind a firewall, you must use a proxy specifier during boot.
 You do not need to specify an IP address for the server that contains the
file.  You must specify an IP address for the proxy server, as in the following
example:</PARA>
<SCREEN>kernel$ /I86pc.Solaris_11.8/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix <USERINPUT>install \
http://www.shadow.com/jumpstart/config.tar&amp;proxy=131.141.6.151</USERINPUT> \
 -B install_media=192.168.2.1/export/Solaris_11.8/boot \
module /I86PC.Solaris_11.8/x86.new</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>ask</LITERAL> &ndash; Specifies that the installation
program prompt you to type the location of the compressed configuration file.
You are prompted after the system boots and connects to the network. If you
use this option, you are not able to do a completely hands off JumpStart installation.</PARA>
<PARA>If you bypass the prompt by pressing Return, the Solaris installation
program interactively configures the network parameters.  The installation
program then prompts you for the location of the compressed configuration
file.</PARA>
<PARA>The following example performs a custom JumpStart and boots
from DVD media. You are prompted to type  the location of the configuration
file after the system connects to the network.</PARA>
<SCREEN>kernal$ /boot/I86PC.Solaris_11.8/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix/ <USERINPUT>install ask</USERINPUT> -B \
install_media=192.168.2.1:export/sol_11_x86/boot module \
/I86PC.Solaris_11.8_</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>options</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>dhcp</LITERAL> &ndash; Specifies to use a DHCP server
to obtain network installation information that is needed to boot the system.
This option is not needed for a JumpStart installation. If you do not specify
to use a DHCP server by typing <LITERAL>dhcp</LITERAL>, the system uses the <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file or the naming service <FILENAME>bootparams</FILENAME> database.
For example, you would not specify <LITERAL>dhcp</LITERAL> if you wanted keep
a static IP address. For example:</PARA>
<SCREEN>kernel$ /I86pc.Solaris_11.8/platform/i86pc/kernel/unix <USERINPUT>install \
dhcp</USERINPUT> -B install_media=192.168.2.1:/export/Solaris_11.8/ \
boot module /I86PC.Solaris_11.8/x86.new</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The options <LITERAL>nowin</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>text</LITERAL> do
not apply to a JumpStart installation. These options are useful with an interactive
installation. For more information, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLARISINSTALL" TARGETPTR="WEBSTART-42"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">To Install or Upgrade With the Solaris Installation Program With GRUB</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Basic Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000063908 0><?Entity End customjump.sgm><?Entity Ref customjumpsample><?Entity Start customjumpsample.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<CHAPTER ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-1"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="off" ref="3"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Installing With Custom JumpStart (Examples)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter provides an example of setting up and installing Solaris
software on both SPARC based and x86 based systems by using a custom JumpStart
installation.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-2">Sample Site Setup</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-5">Create an Install Server</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-6">Create a Boot Server
for Marketing Systems</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-7">Create a JumpStart Directory</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-8">Share the JumpStart
Directory</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-9">Create the Engineering
Group's Profile</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-15">Create the Marketing
Group's Profile</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-21">Update the rules File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-22">Validate the rules
File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-23">Set Up Engineering
Systems to Install From the Network</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-24">Set Up Marketing Systems
to Install From the Network</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-25">Boot the  Engineering
Systems and Install Solaris Software</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-26">Boot the Marketing Systems and Install Solaris Software</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-2">
<TITLE>Sample Site Setup</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>site setup</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-FIG-3">Figure 7&ndash;1</OLINK> shows the site
setup for this example. </PARA>
<FIGURE ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-FIG-3">
<TITLE>Sample Site Setup</TITLE>
<MEDIAOBJECT>
<IMAGEOBJECT>
<IMAGEDATA ENTITYREF="fig492.epsi">
</IMAGEOBJECT>
<TEXTOBJECT>
<SIMPARA>This illustration shows an install server on the engineering
subnet and a boot server on the marketing subnet.</SIMPARA>
</TEXTOBJECT>
</MEDIAOBJECT>
</FIGURE>
<PARA>At this sample site, the conditions are as follows:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>SPARC: The engineering group is located on its own subnet.
This group uses <TRADEMARK>SPARCstation</TRADEMARK> systems for software development.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>x86: The marketing group is located on its own subnet. This
group uses x86 based systems for running word processors, spreadsheets, and
other office productivity tools.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The site uses NIS. The Ethernet addresses, IP addresses, and
host names of the systems are preconfigured in the NIS maps. The subnet mask,
date and time, and geographic region for the site are also preconfigured in
the NIS maps.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The peripheral devices for the marketing systems are preconfigured
in the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>site setup</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Both
the engineering and marketing systems are to be installed with Solaris Express 5/07 software
from the network.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-5">
<TITLE>Create an Install Server</TITLE>
<PARA>Because the groups need to install Solaris Express 5/07 software
from the network, you make <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> an install server for
both groups. You use the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="SETUP-INSTALL-SERVER-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>setup_install_server</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command to
copy the images  to the <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> local disk (in the <FILENAME>/export/install</FILENAME> directory). Copy the images from the either of
the following media.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Software CDs and the Solaris Languages CDs</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Operating System DVD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>You must copy the image from the disc to an empty directory, in these
examples the <FILENAME>sparc_11</FILENAME> directory
and the <FILENAME>x86_11</FILENAME> directory.</PARA>
<EXAMPLE ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-EX-1" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Copying the Solaris Express 5/07 CDs</TITLE>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is attached
to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>mkdir -p /export/install/sparc_11</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./setup_install_server /export/install/sparc_11</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Software for SPARC Platforms - 2 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is attached
to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./add_to_install_server /export/install/sparc_11</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Repeat the previous command for each Solaris Software you want to
install.</PARA>
<PARA>Insert the first SPARC: Solaris Languages for SPARC Platforms CD in the
CD-ROM drive that is attached to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the
following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./add_to_install_server /export/install/sparc_11</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Repeat the
previous command for each SPARC: Solaris Languages for SPARC Platforms CD you want to install.</PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-EX-2" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Copying the Solaris Express 5/07 CDs</TITLE>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is attached
to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>mkdir -p /export/install/x86_11</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./setup_install_server /export/install/x86_11</USERINPUT><USERINPUT></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 2 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is attached
to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./add_to_install_server /export/install/x86_11</USERINPUT><USERINPUT></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Repeat the previous command for each Solaris Software you want to
install.</PARA>
<PARA>Insert the first Solaris Languages for x86 Platforms CD in the
CD-ROM drive that is attached to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the
following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./add_to_install_server /export/install/x86_11</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Repeat the
previous command for each Solaris Languages for x86 Platforms CD you want to install.</PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-EX-3" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Copying the Solaris Express 5/07 DVD</TITLE>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD in the DVD-ROM drive that is attached to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>mkdir -p /export/install/sparc_11</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>DVD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./setup_install_server /export/install/sparc_11</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-EX-4" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Copying the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD</TITLE>
<PARA>Insert the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD in the DVD-ROM drive that is attached to <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> and type the following commands:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>mkdir -p /export/install/x86_11</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>DVD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./setup_install_server /export/install/x86_11</USERINPUT><USERINPUT></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-6" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Create a Boot Server for
Marketing Systems</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>marketing systems setup</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Systems
cannot boot from an install server on a different subnet, so you make <LITERAL>server-2</LITERAL> a boot server on the marketing group's subnet. You use the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="SETUP-INSTALL-SERVER-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>setup_install_server</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command to copy the boot software from the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or
 the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD. The boot software is copied to the <LITERAL>server-2</LITERAL> local disk in the <FILENAME>/export/boot</FILENAME> directory.</PARA>
<PARA>Choose the media and install the boot software to local disk.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you insert the Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD in the CD-ROM
drive that is attached to <LITERAL>server-2</LITERAL>, type the following
command:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-2# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>CD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./setup_install_server -b /export/boot</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you insert the Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD in the DVD-ROM drive that
is attached to <LITERAL>server-2</LITERAL>, type the following command:</PARA>
<SCREEN>server-2# <USERINPUT>cd /<REPLACEABLE>DVD_mount_point</REPLACEABLE>/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./setup_install_server -b /export/boot</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY SORTAS="b option of setup_install_server command">-b
option of setup_install_server command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the <COMMAND>setup_install_server</COMMAND> command, <OPTION>b</OPTION> specifies that <COMMAND>setup_install_server</COMMAND> is to copy the boot information to the directory that is named <FILENAME>/export/boot</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-7">
<TITLE>Create a JumpStart Directory</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>creating
directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>example</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Now
that you have the install server and boot server set up, you create a JumpStart
directory on <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL>. You can use any system on the network.
This directory holds files that are required for a custom JumpStart installation
of Solaris software. You set up this directory by copying the sample directory
from the Solaris Operating System DVD image or from the Solaris Software - 1 CD image that
has been copied to <FILENAME>/export/install</FILENAME>:  </PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">server-1# <USERINPUT>mkdir /jumpstart</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>cp -r /export/install/sparc_11/Solaris_11/Misc/jumpstart_sample</USERINPUT> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-8">
<TITLE>Share the JumpStart Directory</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>sharing</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>JumpStart directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>dfstab file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>share command</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>sharing JumpStart directory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>directories</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>JumpStart</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>sharing directory</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY SORTAS="etc/dfs/dfstab file"><FILENAME>/etc/dfs/dfstab</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>sharing JumpStart directory</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>To make the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file and profiles accessible
to systems on the network, you share the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory.</PARA>
<PARA>Use either the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility or the <COMPUTEROUTPUT>share</COMPUTEROUTPUT> command as
follows:</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Starting with the 5/07
Developer release,</EMPHASIS> the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility introduces
the concept of share groups. See <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV4" TARGETPTR="GCRVU"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">sharemgr Command</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Network Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Using the <COMMAND>share</COMMAND> command, edit the <FILENAME>/etc/dfs/dfstab</FILENAME> file by adding the following entry.</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 <REPLACEABLE>jumpstart_dir_path</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA>For example, the following entry shares the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory:</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 /jumpstart</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA>Then, type <COMMAND>shareall</COMMAND> and press
Enter.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Using the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility, enter the following
commands:</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr add-share</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart default</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr set</USERINPUT> <OPTION>P</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>nfs</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>S</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>sys</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>p</OPTION> <USERINPUT>ro="*"</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart default</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr set</USERINPUT> <OPTION>P</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>nfs</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>p</OPTION> <USERINPUT>anon=0</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/jumpstart
default</USERINPUT></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-9" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Create the Engineering
Group's Profile</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>eng_profile creation</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>eng_profile example</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>eng_profile</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>For
the engineering systems, you create a file that is named <LITERAL>eng_prof</LITERAL> in
the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory. The <FILENAME>eng_prof</FILENAME> file
contains the following entries, which define the Solaris Express 5/07 software
to be installed on systems in the engineering group:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>install_type  initial_install
system_type   standalone
partitioning  default
cluster       SUNWCprog
filesys       any 512 swap</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The previous example profile specifies the following installation information.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The installation is to be treated as an initial installation,
as opposed to an upgrade.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The engineering systems are standalone systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart software uses default disk partitioning for
installing Solaris software on the engineering systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The Developer System Support software group is to be installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Each system in the engineering group is to have 512 Mbytes
of swap space.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-15" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Create the Marketing Group's
Profile</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>marketing_profile creation</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>marketing_profile example</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profiles</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>marketing_profile</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>For the marketing systems, you create a file that is named <FILENAME>marketing_prof</FILENAME> in the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory.
The <FILENAME>marketing_prof</FILENAME> file contains the following entries,
which define the Solaris Express 5/07 software to be installed on systems
in the marketing group: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>install_type  initial_install
system_type   standalone
partitioning  default
cluster       SUNWCuser
package       SUNWaudio</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The previous example profile specifies the following installation information.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The installation is to be treated as an initial installation,
as opposed to an upgrade.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The marketing systems are standalone systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart software is to use default disk partitioning
for installing Solaris on the marketing systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The End User Solaris Software Group is to be installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The audio demo software package is to be added to each system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-21">
<TITLE>Update the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rules file editing</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>custom JumpStart example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Now you must add rules to the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.
The Solaris installation program uses the rules to select the correct installation
(profile) for each system during a custom JumpStart installation. </PARA>
<PARA>At this site, each department is located on its own <EMPHASIS>subnet</EMPHASIS> and
has its own network address. The engineering department is located on subnet
255.222.43.0. The marketing department is located on 255.222.44.0. You can
use this information to control how the engineering and marketing systems
are installed with the Solaris Express 5/07 software. In the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory, you edit the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, delete
all of the example rules, and add the following lines to the file:</PARA>
<SCREEN>network 255.222.43.0 - eng_prof -
network 255.222.44.0 - marketing_prof -</SCREEN>
<PARA>Basically, these rules state that systems on the 255.222.43.0 network
are to be installed with the Solaris Express 5/07 software by using the <FILENAME>eng_prof</FILENAME> profile. The systems on the 255.222.44.0 network are to
be installed with the Solaris Express 5/07 software by using the <FILENAME>marketing_prof</FILENAME> profile.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rules file editing</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>custom JumpStart
example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>You can use the sample rules to use a network
address to identify the systems to be installed with the Solaris Express 5/07 software
by using <FILENAME>eng_prof</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>marketing_prof</FILENAME>,
respectively. You can also use host names, memory size, or model type as the
rule keyword. <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-12638">Table 8&ndash;1</OLINK> contains
a complete list of keywords you can use in a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-22">
<TITLE>Validate the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> File</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>check script</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rules
file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating by using check</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>custom
JumpStart example</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>testing</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>validating <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>custom
JumpStart example</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>validating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> files</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>custom JumpStart
example</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>After the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> and profiles
are set up, you run the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script to verify that the
files are correct:  </PARA>
<SCREEN>server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /jumpstart</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./check</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>If the <COMMAND>check</COMMAND> script does not find any errors, the
script creates the <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file. </PARA>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-23" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Set Up Engineering Systems
to Install From the Network</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>engineering systems setup</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>After
setting up the <FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME> directory and files, you use
the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command on the install server, <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL>, to set up the engineering systems to install the Solaris
software from the install server.  <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> is also the
boot server for the engineering group's subnet.</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">server-1# <USERINPUT>cd /export/install/sparc_11/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-eng1 sun4u</USERINPUT>
server-1# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-eng2 sun4u</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>-c option</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY SORTAS="c option">add_install_client
command</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>In the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command,
the options that are used have the following meanings:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><OPTION>c</OPTION></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the server (<LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL>) and path
(<FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME>) to the JumpStart directory. Use this option
if you are using NFS.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you are not using NFS, you specify the path to the JumpStart
directory by using the following commands:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For SPARC based systems</EMPHASIS>,
specify the path in the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For x86 based systems</EMPHASIS>,
specify the path by editing the GRUB menu entry</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>host-eng1</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of a system in the engineering group.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>host-eng2</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of another system in the engineering group. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>sun4u</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the platform group of the systems that use <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> as an install server. The platform group is for Ultra 5 systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-24" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Set Up Marketing Systems
to Install From the Network</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>marketing systems setup</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>Next,
you use the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command on the boot server
(<LITERAL>server-2</LITERAL>). This command sets up the marketing systems
to boot from the boot server and install the Solaris software from the install
server (<LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL>):</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">server-2# <USERINPUT>cd /marketing/boot-dir/Solaris_11/Tools</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -s server-1:/export/install/x86_11 \</USERINPUT>
<USERINPUT>-c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt1 i86pc</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -s server-1:/export/install/x86_11 \</USERINPUT>
<USERINPUT>-c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt2 i86pc</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -d -s server-1:/export/install/x86_11 \</USERINPUT>
<USERINPUT>-c server-1:/jumpstart SUNW.i86pc i86pc</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt1 sun4u</USERINPUT>
server-2# <USERINPUT>./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt2 sun4u</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>In the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command, the options that
are used have the following meanings:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>-d</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY SORTAS="s option of add_install_client command">-s option of add_install_client
command</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Specifies that the client is to use DHCP to obtain
the network install parameters. This option is required for clients to use
PXE network boot to boot from the network. <OPTION>d</OPTION> is optional
for network boot clients that do not use PXE network boot.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>-s</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>-c option</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY SORTAS="c option">add_install_client command</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Specifies
the install server (<LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL>) and the path to the Solaris
software (<FILENAME>/export/install/x86_11</FILENAME>). </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>-c</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the server (<LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL>) and path
(<FILENAME>/jumpstart</FILENAME>) to the JumpStart directory. Use this option
if you are using NFS.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you are not using NFS, you specify the path to the JumpStart
directory by using the following commands:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For SPARC based systems</EMPHASIS>,
specify the path in the <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">For x86 based systems</EMPHASIS>,
specify the path by editing the GRUB menu entry</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>host-mkt1</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of a system in the marketing group.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>host-mkt2</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of another system in the marketing group. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>sun4u</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the platform group of the systems that use <LITERAL>server-1</LITERAL> as an install server. The platform group is for Ultra 5 systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>SUNW.i86pc</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The DHCP class name for all Solaris x86 clients.  If you want
to configure all Solaris x86 DHCP clients with a single command, use this
class name.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>i86pc</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the platform group of the systems that use this
boot server. The platform name represents x86 based systems. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-25" ARCH="SPARC">
<TITLE>Boot the  Engineering
Systems and Install Solaris Software</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>booting and installing</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>After setting
up the servers and files, you can boot the engineering systems by using the
following <COMMAND>boot</COMMAND> command at the <LITERAL>ok</LITERAL> (PROM)
prompt of each system:</PARA>
<SCREEN>ok <USERINPUT>boot net - install</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>The Solaris OS is automatically installed on the engineering group's
systems.</PARA>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="CUSTOMJUMPSAMPLE-26" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Boot the Marketing Systems
and Install Solaris Software</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>examples</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>You can boot the system from one of the following: </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The network by using PXE network boot</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>Solaris software is automatically installed on the marketing group's
systems.</PARA>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000032919 0><?Entity End customjumpsample.sgm><?Entity Ref jumpstartreference><?Entity Start jumpstartreference.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target>
<CHAPTER ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-1"><?Pub Tag atict:info
tracking="off" ref="2"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="lynnet"
fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="cf79060"
fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Custom JumpStart (Reference)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter lists keywords and values that you can use in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, profiles, and begin and finish scripts.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-74">Rule Keywords and Values</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-24696">Profile Keywords and
Values</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-4">Custom JumpStart Environment
Variables</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-6">Probe Keywords and
Values</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-74">
<TITLE>Rule Keywords and Values</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX685">
<PRIMARY>hostname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>example</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX686">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX687">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-12638">Table 8&ndash;1</OLINK> describes
the keywords and values that you can use in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.
For detailed instructions to create a <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-56059">Creating the rules File</OLINK>.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="PREPARECUSTOM-12638">
<TITLE>Descriptions
of Rule Keywords and Values</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="61*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="182*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN3" COLWIDTH="153*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Matches</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX688">
<PRIMARY>any</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX689">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>any,
description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>any</LITERAL>  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>minus sign (<LITERAL>-</LITERAL>)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Anything. The <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> keyword always succeeds.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX690">
<PRIMARY>arch rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX691">
<PRIMARY>CPUs (processors)</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX692">
<PRIMARY>microprocessors</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule
keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX693">
<PRIMARY>processors</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX694">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>arch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>arch</LITERAL>     </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>processor_type</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA>Valid values for <REPLACEABLE>processor_type</REPLACEABLE> are the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>SPARC: <LITERAL>sparc</LITERAL></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>x86: <LITERAL>i386</LITERAL></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's processor type.</PARA>
<PARA>The <COMMAND>uname -p</COMMAND> command reports the system's processor
type.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX698">
<PRIMARY>disksize rule keyword,
description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX699">
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX700">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>disksize, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX701">
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL> 
  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_disk_name</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_disk_name</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; A disk name in the
form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>, such as <LITERAL>c0t3d0</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c0d0</LITERAL>, or the special word <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is used, the disk to be matched
is determined in the following order:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>SPARC: The disk that contains the preinstalled boot image,
which is a new SPARC based system with factory JumpStart installed</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>c0t3d0s0</LITERAL> disk, if the disk exists</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The first available disk that is searched in kernel probe
order</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; The size of the disk,
which must be specified as a range of Mbytes (<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>-<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>).</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>When calculating <REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE>, remember
that a Mbyte equals 1,048,576 bytes. A disk might be advertised as a &ldquo;535&ndash;Mbyte&rdquo;
disk, but the disk might contain only 510 million bytes of disk space. The
JumpStart program views the &ldquo;535&ndash;Mbyte&rdquo; disk as a 510&ndash;Mbyte
disk because 535,000,000 / 1,048,576 = 510. A &ldquo;535&ndash;Mbyte&rdquo;
disk does not match a <REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE> equal to 530&ndash;550.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The name and size of a system's disk in Mbytes.</PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">disksize c0t3d0 250-300</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>In the example, the JumpStart program attempts to match a system disk
that is named <LITERAL>c0t3d0</LITERAL>. The disk can hold between 250 and
300 Mbytes of information.</PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">disksize rootdisk 750-1000</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>In the example, the JumpStart program attempts to match a disk in the
following order:</PARA>
<ORDEREDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A system disk that contains a preinstalled boot image</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>c0t3d0s0</LITERAL> disk, if the disk exists</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The first available disk that can hold between 750 Mbytes
and 1 Gbyte of information</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ORDEREDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX695">
<PRIMARY>domainname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX696">
<PRIMARY>domains</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX697">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>domainname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>domainname</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_domain_name</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's domain name, which controls how a naming service determines
information. </PARA>
<PARA>If you have a system already installed, the <COMMAND>domainname</COMMAND> command
reports the system's domain name.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX702">
<PRIMARY>hostaddress rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX703">
<PRIMARY>IP addresses</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX704">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostaddress</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>hostaddress</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_IP_address</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's IP address.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX706">
<PRIMARY>hostname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX707">
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>host name</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX708">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_host_name</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's host name. </PARA>
<PARA>If you have a system that is already installed, the <COMMAND>uname -n</COMMAND> command
reports the system's host name.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX709">
<PRIMARY>installed rule keyword,
description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX710">
<PRIMARY>release of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX711">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX712">
<PRIMARY>slices</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX713">
<PRIMARY>Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>release or version</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installed rule keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX714">
<PRIMARY>version of Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>installed</LITERAL>      </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>version</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; A disk slice name in the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>,
such as <LITERAL>c0t3d0s5</LITERAL>, or the special words <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. If <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> is used, the JumpStart program
attempts to match all of the system's disks in kernel probe order. If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is used, the disk to be matched is determined in the following
order:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>SPARC: The disk that contains the preinstalled boot image,
which is a new SPARC based system with factory JumpStart installed</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>c0t3d0s0</LITERAL> disk, if the disk exists</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The first available disk that is searched in kernel probe
order</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>version</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; A version name or the special
words <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>upgrade</LITERAL>. If <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> is
used, any Solaris or SunOS release is matched. If <LITERAL>upgrade</LITERAL> is
used, any Solaris release that is supported and can be upgraded is matched.</PARA>
<PARA>If the JumpStart program finds a Solaris release but is unable to determine
the version, the version that is returned is <LITERAL>SystemV</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A disk that has a root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system that corresponds
to a particular version of Solaris software.</PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">installed c0t3d0s1 Solaris 11</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>In the example, the JumpStart program attempts to match a system that
has a Solaris root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system on <LITERAL>c0t3d0s1</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX715">
<PRIMARY>karch rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX716">
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX717">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>karch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>karch</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_platform_group</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA>Valid values are <LITERAL>sun4u</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>i86pc</LITERAL>,
and <LITERAL>prep</LITERAL>. A list of systems and their corresponding platform
group is presented in the <CITETITLE>Solaris Sun Hardware Platform Guide</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="URL">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's platform group.</PARA>
<PARA>If you have a system that is already installed, the <COMMAND>arch -k</COMMAND> command
or the <COMMAND>uname -m</COMMAND> command reports the system's platform group.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX718">
<PRIMARY>memory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule
keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX719">
<PRIMARY>memsize
rule keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX720">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memsize</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX721">
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>physical_mem</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA>The value must be a range of Mbytes, <REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>-<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>, or a single Mbyte value.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's physical memory size in Mbytes.</PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">memsize 64-128</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The example tries to match a system with a physical memory size between
64 and 128 Mbytes.</PARA>
<PARA>If you have a system that is already installed, the output of the <COMMAND>prtconf</COMMAND> command, line 2, reports the system's physical memory size. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX722">
<PRIMARY>model rule keyword, description
and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX723">
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system model names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX724">
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system model
names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX725">
<PRIMARY>rule
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>model</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>model</LITERAL> 
  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>actual_platform_name</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's platform name. See the <CITETITLE>Solaris Sun Hardware Platform
Guide</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="URL">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK> for a list of valid platform names.</PARA>
<PARA>To find the platform name of an installed system, use the <LITERAL>uname
-i</LITERAL> command or the output of the <COMMAND>prtconf</COMMAND> command,
line 5.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If the <REPLACEABLE>actual_platform_name</REPLACEABLE> contains
spaces, you must replace spaces with underscores (_). </PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PARA>SUNW,Sun_4_50</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX726">
<PRIMARY>network number</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX727">
<PRIMARY>network rule keyword,
description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX728">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>network</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>network</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>network_num</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A system's network number, which the JumpStart program determines by
performing a logical AND between the system's IP address and the subnet mask. </PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">network 192.168.2.0</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The example tries to match a system with a 192.168.2.8 IP address, if
the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX729">
<PRIMARY>osname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX730">
<PRIMARY>release of Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL> rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX731">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL></SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX732">
<PRIMARY>Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>release
or version</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>osname rule keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX733">
<PRIMARY>version of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL> rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL>     </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>Solaris_</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A version of Solaris software that is already installed on a system. </PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">osname Solaris 11</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>In the example, the JumpStart program attempts to match a system with
the Solaris Express 5/07 OS already installed.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe rule keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>probe</LITERAL></SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>probe</LITERAL> </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>probe_keyword</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A valid probe keyword or a valid custom probe keyword.</PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">probe disks</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The example returns the size of a system's disks in Mbytes and in kernel
probe order, for example, <LITERAL>c0t3d0s1</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>c0t4d0s0</LITERAL>,
on a SPARC based system. The JumpStart program sets the <ENVAR>SI_DISKLIST</ENVAR>, <ENVAR>SI_DISKSIZES</ENVAR>, <ENVAR>SI_NUMDISKS</ENVAR>, and <ENVAR>SI_TOTALDISK</ENVAR> environment
variables.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>probe</LITERAL> keyword is unique in that the keyword
does not attempt to match an attribute and run a profile. The <LITERAL>probe</LITERAL> keyword
returns a value. Consequently, you cannot specify begin scripts, profiles,
and finish scripts with the <LITERAL>probe</LITERAL> rule keyword.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>Probe keywords are described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="CUSTOMPROBES-1">Chapter&nbsp;5,
Creating Custom Rule and Probe Keywords (Tasks)</OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX734">
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX735">
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>totaldisk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX736">
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX737">
<PRIMARY>totaldisk rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>totaldisk</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA>The value must be specified as a range of Mbytes (<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>-<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>).</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>When calculating <REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE>, remember
that one Mbyte equals 1,048,576 bytes. A disk might be advertised as a &ldquo;535&ndash;Mbyte&rdquo;
disk, but the disk might have only 510 million bytes of disk space. The JumpStart
program views the &ldquo;535&ndash;Mbyte&rdquo; disk as a 510&ndash;Mbyte
disk because 535,000,000 / 1,048,576 = 510. A &ldquo;535&ndash;Mbyte&rdquo;
disk does not match a <REPLACEABLE>size_range</REPLACEABLE> equal to 530&ndash;550.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The total disk space on a system in Mbytes. The total disk space includes
all the operational disks that are attached to a system.</PARA>
<PARA>Example: </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">totaldisk 300-500</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>In the example, the JumpStart program tries to match a system with a
total disk space between 300 and 500 Mbytes.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-24696">
<TITLE>Profile Keywords and Values</TITLE>
<PARA>This section describes the profile keywords and values that you can
use in a profile. For detailed instructions to create a profile, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-53442">Creating a Profile</OLINK>.</PARA>
<SECT2 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-8">
<TITLE>Profile Keywords Quick Reference</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX439">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX440">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>case sensitivity</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>custom
JumpStart installation</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-TBL-118">Table 8&ndash;2</OLINK> provides
a quick way to determine which keywords you can use, based on your installation
scenario. Unless otherwise noted in the keyword descriptions, the keyword
can only be used with the initial installation option. </PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="ALL" PGWIDE="1" ID="PREPARECUSTOM-TBL-118">
<TITLE>Profile Keywords
Overview</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="6" COLSEP="1" ROWSEP="1">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COL1" COLWIDTH="110*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COL2" COLWIDTH="66*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="58*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC1" COLWIDTH="54*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="48*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COL6" COLWIDTH="60*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY NAMEST="COL2" NAMEEND="COL6">
<PARA>Installation Scenarios</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Profile Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Standalone System (Nonnetworked)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Standalone System (Networked) or Server</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>OS Server</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Upgrade</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Upgrade With Disk Space Reallocation</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> (installing Solaris Flash archives)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>bootenv createbe</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>client_arch</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>client_root</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>client_swap</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> (adding software groups)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> (adding or deleting clusters)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>dontuse</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> (x86 only)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> (mounting remote file systems)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> (creating local file systems)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> (creating mirrored file systems)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>forced_deployment</LITERAL> (installing Solaris Flash differential
archives)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>geo</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>local_customization</LITERAL> (installing Solaris Flash archives)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>locale</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL> (creating state database replicas)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>no_master_check</LITERAL> (installing Solaris Flash differential
archives)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>no_content_check</LITERAL> (installing Solaris Flash differential
archives)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>num_clients</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>package</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>patch</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-10">
<TITLE>Profile Keyword Descriptions and
Examples</TITLE>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-2">
<TITLE><LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> Keyword</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>Solaris Flash  archives,
custom JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>archive</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>keywords, custom JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>archive_location</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>archive_location keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">archive_location <REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>location</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The values of <REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>location</REPLACEABLE> depend on where the Solaris Flash archive is stored.
The following sections contain the values you can use for <REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>location</REPLACEABLE> and examples of how
to use the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-4">Archive Stored on an NFS
Server</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-300">Archive Stored on an
HTTP or HTTPS Server</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-1A">Archive Stored on
an FTP Server</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-5">Archive Stored on a Local
Tape</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-6">Archive Stored on a Local
Device</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-7">Archive Stored on a Local
File</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>location</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifics for locations are noted in the following sections. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<CAUTION>
<PARA>Solaris Flash archive cannot be properly created when
a non-global zone is installed. The Solaris Flash feature is not compatible
 with the Solaris Zones partitioning technology. If you create a Solaris Flash
archive, the resulting  archive is not installed properly when the archive
is deployed under these conditions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The archive is created in a non-global zone</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The archive is created in a global zone that has non-global
zones installed</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</CAUTION>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-4">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on an NFS Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the archive is stored on an NFS server, use the following syntax
for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>archive_location nfs <REPLACEABLE>server_name:/path/filename retry n</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the server where you stored the archive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The location of the archive to be retrieved from the specified
server.  If the path contains $HOST, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
replace $HOST with the name of the clone system that you are installing.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>filename</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>retry n</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>An optional keyword. <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE> is the maximum
number of times the Solaris Flash utilities attempt to mount the archive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJWX">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on an NFS Server</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>archive_location nfs <FILENAME>golden:/archives/usrarchive</FILENAME>

archive_location <FILENAME>nfs://golden/archives/usrarchive</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-300">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on an HTTP or HTTPS Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the archive is stored on an HTTP server, use the following syntax
for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>archive_location http://<REPLACEABLE>server_name:port/path/filename</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<PARA>If the archive is stored on an HTTPS server, use the following syntax
for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>archive_location https://<REPLACEABLE>server_name:port/path/filename</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the server where you stored the archive. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>An optional port. <REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE> can be a
port number or the name of a TCP service that has a port number that is determined
at runtime.</PARA>
<PARA>If you do not specify a port, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
use the default HTTP port number, 80.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The location of the archive to be retrieved from the specified
server.  If the path contains $HOST, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
replace $HOST with the name of the clone system that you are installing.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>filename</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The optional keywords that you can specify when you retrieve
a Solaris Flash archive from an HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="FLASH-TBL-62">
<TITLE>Optional Keywords
to Use With <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> HTTP</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="29.69*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC3" COLWIDTH="70.31*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value Definition</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>auth basic</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>user_name password</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If the archive is located on an HTTP server that is password protected,
you must include the user name and password that you need to access the HTTP
server in the profile file. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The use of this authentication method in a profile that is intended
for use with custom JumpStart is risky. Unauthorized users might have access
to the profile file that contains the password.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>min</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify, in minutes,
the maximum length of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data
from the HTTP server. If a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened,
and resumed. If you specify a <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> value of 0 (zero),
the connection is not reopened.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a timeout reconnection occurs, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities attempt to resume the installation at the last known position in
the archive. If the Solaris Flash installation utilities cannot resume
the installation at the last known position, the retrieval restarts from the
beginning of the archive and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout
is discarded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a timeout reconnection occurs while a package is being
installed, the package is retried from the beginning of the package and the
data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>host:port</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify a proxy
host and proxy port.  You can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris Flash archive
from the other side of a firewall.  You must supply a proxy port when you
specify the <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXC">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a HTTP or HTTPS Server</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100">archive_location http://silver/archives/usrarchive.flar timeout 5 </PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>Example of the <LITERAL>auth basic</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>user_name
password</REPLACEABLE> keyword:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100">archive_location http://silver/archives/usrarchive.flar timeout 5 user1 secret</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-1A">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on an FTP Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the archive is stored on an FTP server, use the following syntax
for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="80100">archive_location ftp://<REPLACEABLE>user_name:password</REPLACEABLE>@<REPLACEABLE>server_name:port/path/filename</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>user_name:password</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The user name and password that you need to access the FTP
server in the profile file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the server where you stored the archive. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A is an optional port.  <REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE> can
be a port number or the name of a TCP service that has a port number that
is determined at runtime.</PARA>
<PARA>If you do not specify a port, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
use the default FTP port number, 21.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The location of the archive to be retrieved from the specified
server.  If the path contains $HOST, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
replace $HOST with the name of the clone system that you are installing.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>filename</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The optional keywords that you can specify when you retrieve
a Solaris Flash archive from an FTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-2">
<TITLE>Optional
Keywords to Use With <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> FTP</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="29.69*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC3" COLWIDTH="70.31*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value Definition</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>min</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify, in minutes,
the maximum length of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data
from the HTTP server. If a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened,
and resumed. If you specify a <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> value of 0 (zero),
the connection is not reopened.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a timeout reconnection occurs, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities attempt to resume the installation at the last known position in
the archive. If the Solaris Flash installation utilities cannot resume
the installation at the last known position, the retrieval restarts from the
beginning of the archive and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout
is discarded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a timeout reconnection occurs while a package is being
installed, the package is retried from the beginning of the package and the
data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>host:port</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify a proxy
host and proxy port.  You can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris Flash archive
from the other side of a firewall.  You must supply a proxy port when you
specify the <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXE">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on an FTP Server</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100">archive_location ftp://user1:secret@silver/archives/usrarchive.flar timeout 5</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-5">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a Local Tape</TITLE>
<PARA>If the archive is stored on a tape, use the following syntax for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>archive_location local_tape <REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>position</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the tape drive where you stored the Solaris Flash archive.
 If the device name is a canonical path, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities retrieve the archive from the path to the device node.  If you supply
a device name that is not a canonical path, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities add <FILENAME>/dev/rmt/</FILENAME> to the path.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>position</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Designates the place on the tape drive where you saved the
archive. If you do not supply a position, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities retrieve the archive from the current position on the tape drive.
By specifying a <REPLACEABLE>position</REPLACEABLE>, you can place a begin
script or a <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file on the tape drive before the
archive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXF">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a Local Tape</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>archive_location local_tape /dev/rmt/0n 5

archive_location local_tape 0n 5</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-6">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a Local Device</TITLE>
<PARA>You can retrieve a Solaris Flash archive from a local device if
you stored the Solaris Flash archive on a file system-oriented, random-access
device, such as a diskette or a DVD. Use the following syntax for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can retrieve an archive from stream-oriented devices, such
as tape, by using the syntax for local tape. </PARA>
</NOTE>
<SCREEN>archive_location local_device <REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>path/filename</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>file_system_type</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the drive where you stored the Solaris Flash archive.
If the device name is a canonical path, the device is mounted directly.  
If you supply a device name that is not a canonical path, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities add <FILENAME>/dev/dsk/</FILENAME> to the path.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The path to the Solaris Flash archive, relative to the
root of the file system on the device you specified. If the path contains
$HOST, the Solaris Flash installation utilities replace $HOST with the
name of the clone system that you are installing.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>filename</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>file_system_type</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the type of file system on the device.  If you do
not supply a file system type, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
attempt to mount a UFS file system.  If the UFS mount fails, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities attempt to mount an HSFS file system. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXH">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a Local Device</TITLE>
<PARA>To retrieve an archive from a local hard drive that is formatted as
a UFS file system, use the following command:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>archive_location local_device c0t0d0s0 <FILENAME>/archives/$HOST</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>To retrieve an archive from a local CD-ROM that has an HSFS file system,
use the following command:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>archive_location local_device c0t0d0s0 <FILENAME>/archives/usrarchive</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-7">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a Local File</TITLE>
<PARA>You can retrieve an archive that you stored in the miniroot from which
you booted the clone system as a local file. When you perform a custom JumpStart
installation, you boot the system from a DVD, CD, or an NFS-based miniroot.
 The installation software is loaded and run from this miniroot.  Therefore,
a Solaris Flash archive that you stored in the DVD, CD, or NFS-based
miniroot is accessible as a local file. Use the following syntax for the <LITERAL>archive_location</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>archive_location local_file <REPLACEABLE>path/filename</REPLACEABLE> </SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The location of the archive. The path must be accessible to
the system as a local file while the system is booted from the Solaris Software - 1 CD
or from the Solaris Operating System DVD. The system cannot access <FILENAME>/net</FILENAME> or
any other automounted directory when it is booted from the Solaris Software - 1 CD
or from the Solaris Operating System DVD.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>filename</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXG">
<TITLE>Archive Stored on a Local File</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>archive_location local_file <FILENAME>/archives/usrarchive</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-97">
<TITLE><LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>backup_media</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>backup_media keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">backup_media <REPLACEABLE>type path</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL> only with the upgrade option
when disk space reallocation is required.</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL> defines the media that is to be used
to back up file systems if space needs to be reallocated during an upgrade
because of insufficient space. If multiple tapes or diskettes are required
for the backup, you are prompted to insert tapes or diskettes during the upgrade.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1">
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="125*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="100*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="171*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Valid <REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE> Value</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Valid <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> Value</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Specification</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>local_tape</LITERAL>	</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><FILENAME>/dev/rmt/</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A local tape drive on the system that is being upgraded. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> must
be the character (raw) device path for the tape drive. <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE> is
the number of the tape drive.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>local_diskette</LITERAL>	</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><FILENAME>/dev/rdiskette</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A local diskette drive on the system that is being upgraded. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> must be the character (raw) device path for the diskette drive. <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE> is the number of the diskette drive.</PARA>
<PARA>Diskettes that you use for the backup must be formatted.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>local_filesystem</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><FILENAME>/dev/dsk/c</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>t</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>d</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>s</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
<PARA><FILENAME>/</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A local file system on the system that is being upgraded. You cannot
specify a local file system that is being changed by the upgrade. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> can be a block device path for a disk slice. For example, the <FILENAME>t</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE> in <FILENAME>/dev/dsk/c</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>t</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>d</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>s</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> might not
be needed. Or, <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> can be the absolute path to
a file system that is mounted by the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>remote_filesystem</LITERAL>	</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>host</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>:/</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>An NFS file system on a remote system. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> must
include the name or IP address of the remote system, <REPLACEABLE>host</REPLACEABLE>,
and the absolute path to the NFS file system, <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE>.
The NFS file system must have read/write access.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>remote_system</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>user</REPLACEABLE><FILENAME>@</FILENAME><REPLACEABLE>host</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>:/</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>directory</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A directory on a remote system that can be reached by a remote shell, <LITERAL>rsh</LITERAL>. The system that is being upgraded must have access to the remote
system through the remote system's <FILENAME>.rhosts</FILENAME> file. <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> must include the name of the remote system <REPLACEABLE>host</REPLACEABLE> and
the absolute path to the directory <REPLACEABLE>directory</REPLACEABLE>. If
a user login ID <REPLACEABLE>user</REPLACEABLE> is not specified, <LITERAL>root</LITERAL> is
used by default.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXI">
<TITLE><LITERAL>backup_media</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>backup_media local_tape /dev/rmt/0

backup_media local_diskette /dev/rdiskette1

backup_media local_filesystem /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s4

backup_media local_filesystem /export

backup_media remote_filesystem system1:/export/temp

backup_media remote_system user1@system1:/export/temp</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-113">
<TITLE><LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">boot_device <REPLACEABLE>device eeprom</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> designates the device where the JumpStart
program is to install the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system and the
system's boot device. <LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> must match any <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords that specify the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system
and the <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>boot_device keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>boot_device</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>If you do not specify the <LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> keyword
in a profile, the following <LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> keyword is specified
by default during the installation:</PARA>
<SCREEN>boot_device any update</SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following values.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>SPARC: <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The disk slice where the JumpStart program places the root
(<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system, for example, <LITERAL>c0t0d0s0</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>x86: <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The disk where the JumpStart program places the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system, for example, <LITERAL>c0d0</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>existing</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program places the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system on the system's existing boot device.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>any</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program chooses where to place the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system. The JumpStart program attempts to use the system's
existing boot device. The JumpStart program might choose a different boot
device if necessary.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>eeprom</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Choose to update or preserve the system's EEPROM.</PARA>
<PARA>The <EMPHASIS>eeprom</EMPHASIS> value enables you to update the system's
EEPROM if you change the system's current boot device. By updating the system's
EEPROM, the system can automatically boot from the new boot device.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>x86: You must specify the <LITERAL>preserve</LITERAL> value.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>update</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program updates the system's EEPROM to the specified
boot device so that the installed system automatically boots from it.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>preserve</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The boot device value in the system's EEPROM is not changed.
If you specify a new boot device without changing the system's EEPROM, you
need to change the system's EEPROM manually so it can automatically boot from
the new boot device.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXK">
<TITLE><LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>boot_device c0t0d0s2 update</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-1130">
<TITLE><LITERAL>bootenv createbe</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">bootenv createbe bename <REPLACEABLE>new_BE_name</REPLACEABLE> filesystem <REPLACEABLE>mountpoint</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>fs_options</REPLACEABLE> 
[filesystem...]</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>bootenv createbe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>bootenv createbe</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>bootenv createbe</LITERAL> keyword enables you to quickly
create an empty-and-inactive boot environment at the same time you are installing
the Solaris OS. At the least, you must create the root  (<LITERAL>/</LITERAL>)
file system.  The slices are reserved for the file systems specified, but
no file systems are copied.  The boot environment is named, but not actually
created until installed with a Solaris Flash archive.  When the empty
boot environment is installed with an archive, file systems are installed
on the reserved slices. The following lists the values for <REPLACEABLE>bename</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>filesystem</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST TERMLENGTH="WHOLELINE">
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>bename</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>new_BE_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>bename</LITERAL> specifies the name of the new boot
environment to be created. <REPLACEABLE>new_BE_name</REPLACEABLE> can be no
longer than 30 characters, can contain only alphanumeric characters, and can
contain no multibyte characters. The name must be unique on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>filesystem</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>mountpoint</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>fs_options</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>filesystem</LITERAL> determines the type and number
of file systems that are to be created in the new boot environment. At least
one slice that contains the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system must
be defined. File systems can be on the same disk or spread across multiple
disks.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>mountpoint</REPLACEABLE> can be any valid mount
point or &ndash; (hyphen), indicating a swap slice. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE>  must be available when
the operating system that is being installed is first booted. The device has
no relation to JumpStart special storage devices such as <EMPHASIS>free</EMPHASIS>.
The device cannot be a Solaris Volume Manager volume or Veritas Volume Manager
volume. <REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE> is the name of a disk device, of
the form <FILENAME>/dev/dsk/c<REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE>t<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>d<REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE>s<REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE></FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>fs_options</REPLACEABLE>  can be one of the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>ufs</LITERAL>, which  indicates a UFS file system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>swap</LITERAL>, which  indicates a swap file system.
The swap mount point must be a <LITERAL>&ndash;</LITERAL> (hyphen).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>For a profile example and background about using this keyword, see the
following references:</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For an example of a profile</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-960">Example 3&ndash;11</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For background about using Solaris Live Upgrade that creates, upgrades,
and activates inactive boot environments</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="LUOVERVIEW-1">Chapter 2, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For background about using a Solaris Flash archive</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLFLASH" TARGETPTR="FLASH-24">Chapter 1, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Flash (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and Installation)</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-81">
<TITLE><LITERAL>client_arch</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">client_arch <REPLACEABLE>karch_value</REPLACEABLE> ...</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><LITERAL>client_arch</LITERAL> specifies that the operating system server
is to support a different platform group than the server uses. If you do not
specify <LITERAL>client_arch</LITERAL> in the profile, any diskless client
 that uses the operating system server must contain the same platform group
as the server. You must specify each platform group that you want the operating
system server to support.</PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>client_arch keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>diskless clients</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>platforms</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>diskless client</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>client_arch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Valid values for <REPLACEABLE>karch_value</REPLACEABLE> are  <LITERAL>sun4u</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>i86pc</LITERAL>. For a detailed list of platform
names and various systems, see <CITETITLE>Solaris Sun Hardware Platform Guide</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="URL">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK>.  </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>client_arch</LITERAL> only when <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> is specified as <LITERAL>server</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-98">
<TITLE><LITERAL>client_root</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">client_root <REPLACEABLE>root_size</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>client_root profile keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>root space</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>client_root</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>servers</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>root space</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>root space</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>client_root</LITERAL> defines
the amount of root space, <REPLACEABLE>root_size</REPLACEABLE> in Mbytes,
to allocate for each client. If you do not specify <LITERAL>client_root</LITERAL> in
a server's profile, the installation software allocates 15 Mbytes of root
space per client. The size of the client root area is used in combination
with the <LITERAL>num_clients</LITERAL> keyword to determine how much space
to reserve for the <FILENAME>/export/root</FILENAME> file system.    </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>client_root</LITERAL> only when <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> is specified as <LITERAL>server</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-99">
<TITLE><LITERAL>client_swap</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">client_swap <REPLACEABLE>swap_size</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>diskless client</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>diskless
clients</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>client_swap</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>diskless client</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>swap file
systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>diskless client swap space</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>client_swap</LITERAL> defines the amount of swap space, <REPLACEABLE>swap_size</REPLACEABLE> in
Mbytes, to allocate for each diskless client. If you do not specify <LITERAL>client_swap</LITERAL> in the profile, 32 Mbytes of swap space is allocated by default.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>client_swap</LITERAL> only when <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> is specified as <LITERAL>server</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXJ">
<TITLE><LITERAL>client_swap</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PARA>The following example specifies that each diskless client is to have
a swap space of 64 Mbytes.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>client_swap 64</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<SECT4 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-2">
<TITLE>How the Size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> Is
Determined</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>maximum size</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>memory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space size and</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>swap space</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>maximum size</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>swap file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memory size and</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>swap file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size
determination</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>If a profile does not specify the size
of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME>, the JumpStart program determines the size of
the swap space, based on the system's physical memory. <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-3">Table 8&ndash;5</OLINK> shows how the
size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is determined during a custom JumpStart
installation.     </PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-3">
<TITLE>Determining <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> Size</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="158*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="238*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Physical Memory (in Mbytes)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Swap Space (in Mbytes)</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>16&ndash;64</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>32</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>64&ndash;128</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>64</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>128&ndash;512</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>128</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Greater than 512</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>256</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<PARA>The JumpStart program makes the size of <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> no
more than 20 percent of the disk where <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> is located.
The allocation is different if the disk contains free space after laying out
the other file systems. If free space exists, the JumpStart program allocates
the free space to <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME>, and if possible, allocates the
amount that is shown in <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-3">Table
8&ndash;5</OLINK>. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Physical memory plus swap space must total a minimum of 32 Mbytes.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT4>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-100">
<TITLE><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> Profile Keyword
(Adding Software Groups)</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX464">
<PRIMARY>cluster profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX465">
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>cluster</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX466">
<PRIMARY>Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>groups</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>software groups</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>for profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Reduced Network Support Software Group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>SUNWCrnet group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX469">
<PRIMARY>Core Solaris Software Group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX470">
<PRIMARY>SUNWCreq group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX471">
<PRIMARY>End User Solaris
Software Group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX472">
<PRIMARY>SUNWCuser group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX473">
<PRIMARY>Developer Solaris Software Group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX474">
<PRIMARY>SUNWCprog group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX475">
<PRIMARY>Entire Solaris Software Group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX476">
<PRIMARY>SUNWCall group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX477">
<PRIMARY>Entire Solaris Software
Group Plus OEM Support</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX478">
<PRIMARY>SUNWCXall group</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>groups</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX468">
<PRIMARY>software groups</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>for
profiles</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">cluster <REPLACEABLE>group_name</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> designates the software group to add to the
system. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>A software group is a metacluster that contains a collection of
clusters and packages. The software group is installed by using the <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> keyword and <REPLACEABLE>group_name</REPLACEABLE> variable. This
cluster keyword can only be installed in an initial installation. This <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> keyword refers to metaclusters found in the <FILENAME>clustertoc(4)</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
<PARA>A cluster is a collection of packages that is named SUNW<REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>. A cluster is installed by using the <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> keyword
and <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> variable. A cluster can be added
or removed from a software group (metacluster) in an initial install or an
upgrade.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>The <REPLACEABLE>group_name</REPLACEABLE> for each software group is
listed in the following table.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="162*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="234*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Software Group</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><EMPHASIS>group_name</EMPHASIS></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Reduced Network Support Software Group</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNWCrnet</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Core System Support Software Group</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNWCreq</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>End User Solaris Software Group</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNWCuser</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Developer Solaris Software Group</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNWCprog</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Entire Solaris Software Group</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNWCall</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Entire Solaris Software Group Plus OEM Support</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNWCXall</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The following limitations apply:</PARA>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX479">
<PRIMARY>defaults</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>software group installed</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>You can specify
only one software group in a profile.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The software group must be specified before other <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> entries. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you do not specify a software group with <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> in
the profile, the end&ndash;user software group, <LITERAL>SUNWCuser</LITERAL>,
is installed on the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>For more information about software groups, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="ESIMO"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Disk Space Recommendations for Software Groups</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-85">
<TITLE><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> Profile Keyword
(Adding or Deleting Clusters)</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">cluster <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>add_delete_switch</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>cluster profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>cluster</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> designates whether a cluster is to
be added or deleted from the software group that is to be installed on the
system. </PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the cluster that must be in the form <LITERAL>SUNWC</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>add_delete_switch</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>An optional keyword that  indicates whether to add or delete
the cluster that is specified. Use the value <LITERAL>add</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>. If you do not specify <LITERAL>add</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>add</LITERAL> is used by default.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX485">
<PRIMARY>Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>groups</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>upgrading</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX486">
<PRIMARY>adding</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>clusters when
upgrading</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX487">
<PRIMARY>deleting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>clusters when upgrading</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX488">
<PRIMARY>software groups</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>upgrading</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX489">
<PRIMARY>upgrade</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>When you use <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> during
an upgrade, the following conditions apply:    </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>All clusters that are already on the system are automatically
upgraded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> <LITERAL>add</LITERAL>, and <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> is not installed on
the system, the cluster is installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>, and <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> is installed on the
system, the package is deleted <EMPHASIS>before</EMPHASIS> the upgrade begins.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>A software group is a metacluster that contains a collection of
clusters and packages. The software group is installed by using the <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> keyword and <REPLACEABLE>group_name</REPLACEABLE> variable. This
cluster keyword can only be installed in an initial installation. This <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> keyword refers to metaclusters found in the <FILENAME>clustertoc(4)</FILENAME> file. </PARA>
<PARA>A cluster is collection of packages. Clusters can be grouped
together to form a software group (metacluster). A cluster name is always
in the form of SUNW&lt;name>. A cluster is installed by using the <LITERAL>cluster</LITERAL> keyword and <REPLACEABLE>cluster_name</REPLACEABLE> variable. A
cluster can be added or removed from a software group (metacluster) in an
initial install or an upgrade.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-86">
<TITLE><LITERAL>dontuse</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>defaults</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>excluding disks</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>dontuse
profile keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>excluding for partitioning default</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>partitioning</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>excluding
disks</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>dontuse</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>excluding disks</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">dontuse <REPLACEABLE>disk_name</REPLACEABLE> ...</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>By default, the JumpStart program uses all of the operational disks
on the system when <LITERAL>partitioning default</LITERAL> is specified. <LITERAL>dontuse</LITERAL> designates one or more disks that you do not want the JumpStart
program to use. <REPLACEABLE>disk_name</REPLACEABLE> must be specified in
the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>, for example, <LITERAL>c0t0d0</LITERAL>.   </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You cannot specify the <LITERAL>dontuse</LITERAL> keyword and
the <LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL> keyword in the same profile.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-87" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>partitioning</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL></SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">fdisk <REPLACEABLE>disk_name type size</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> defines how the <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions
are set up on an x86 based system. You can specify <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> more
than once. When <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions an x86 based system, the
following occurs:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>All <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions on the disk are preserved
unless you delete the partitions with the <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> keyword
by assigning <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> the value of <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>0</LITERAL>. Also, all existing <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions are deleted
when <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> is set to <LITERAL>all</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition that contains
a root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is always designated as the active
partition on the disk. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The system boots from the active partition by default.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> keyword is not specified in
a profile, the following <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> keyword is used by default
during the installation.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>fdisk all solaris maxfree</PROGRAMLISTING>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> entries are processed in the order
in which the entries are listed in the profile.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>disk_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use the following values to specify where the <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition
is to be created or deleted:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; A
specific disk, for example, <LITERAL>c0t3d0</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> &ndash; The variable that contains
the value of the system's root disk, which is where the installation takes
place. The root disk is determined by the JumpStart program as described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">How the System's Root Disk Is Determined</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>all</LITERAL> &ndash; All the selected disks.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use the following values to specify the type of <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition
that is to be created or deleted on the specified disk:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>solaris</LITERAL> &ndash; A Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition
(<LITERAL>SUNIXOS fdisk</LITERAL> type).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>dosprimary</LITERAL> &ndash; An alias for primary
DOS <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions, not for <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions
that are extended or reserved for data DOS. When you delete <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions
by assigning <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> the value <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>dosprimary</LITERAL> is an alias for the DOSHUGE, DOSOS12, and DOSOS16 <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> types. When you create an <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition, <LITERAL>dosprimary</LITERAL> is an alias for the DOSHUGE <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>DDD</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; An integer <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition. <REPLACEABLE>DDD</REPLACEABLE> is an integer between 1 and 255 inclusive.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can specify this value only if <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>0x<REPLACEABLE>HH</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; A hexadecimal <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition. <REPLACEABLE>HH</REPLACEABLE> is a hexadecimal number
between 01 and FF.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can specify this value only if <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>The following table shows the integer and hexadecimal numbers for some
of the <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> types.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="65*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="65*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN3" COLWIDTH="65*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> Type</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>DDD</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>HH</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>DOSOS12</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>1</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>01</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>PCIXOS</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>2</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>02</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>DOSOS16</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>4</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>04</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>EXTDOS</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>5</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>05</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>DOSHUGE</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>6</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>06</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>DOSDATA</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>86</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>56</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>OTHEROS</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>98</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>62</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>UNIXOS</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>99</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>63</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following values:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>DDD</REPLACEABLE> &ndash; An <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition
of size <REPLACEABLE>DDD</REPLACEABLE> in Mbytes is created on the specified
disk. <REPLACEABLE>DDD</REPLACEABLE> must be an integer, and the JumpStart
program automatically rounds the number up to the nearest cylinder boundary.
Specifying a value of <LITERAL>0</LITERAL> is the same as specifying <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>all</LITERAL> &ndash; An <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition
is created on the entire disk. All existing <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions
are deleted.</PARA>
<NOTE ARCH="X86">
<PARA>The <LITERAL>all</LITERAL> value can be specified only
if <REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>solaris</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>maxfree</LITERAL> &ndash; An <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition
is created in the largest contiguous free space on the specified disk. If
an <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition of the specified <REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE> already
exists on the disk, the existing <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition is used.
A new <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition is <EMPHASIS>not</EMPHASIS> created
on the disk.</PARA>
<NOTE ARCH="X86">
<PARA>The disk must contain at least one unused <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition.
Also, the disk must have free space or the installation fails. The <LITERAL>maxfree</LITERAL> value can be specified only if <REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>solaris</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>dosprimary</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>delete</LITERAL> &ndash; All <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions
of the specified <REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE> are deleted on the specified
disk.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-88">
<TITLE><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> Profile Keyword
(Mounting Remote File Systems)</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>filesys profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>filesys</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>mounting
remote file systems</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>mounting</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>mounting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>remote file systems</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>filesys</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>remote file systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>remote file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>mounting</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">filesys <REPLACEABLE>server</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>path server_address mount_pt_name</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>mount_options</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>By using <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> with the listed values, the JumpStart
program sets up the installed system to automatically mount remote file systems
when the system boots. You can specify <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> more than
once.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the server where the remote file system is located,
followed by a colon.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The remote file system's mount-point name. For example, <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> or <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_address</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The IP address of the server that is specified in <REPLACEABLE>server</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE>. If a naming service is not
running on the network, the <REPLACEABLE>server_address</REPLACEABLE> value
can be used to populate the <FILENAME>/etc/hosts</FILENAME> file with the
server's host name and IP address. If you are not specifying the server's
IP address, you must specify a minus sign (<LITERAL>-</LITERAL>).  For example,
if you have a naming service that is running on the network, you do not need
to specify the server's IP address.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>mount_pt_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The name of the mount point on which the remote file system
is to be mounted.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>mount_options</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One or more mount options, which is the same as the <OPTION>o</OPTION> option
of the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="MOUNT-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>mount</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command.
The mount options are added to the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> entry
for the specified <REPLACEABLE>mount_pt_name</REPLACEABLE>. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you need to specify more than one mount option, the mount options
must be separated by commas and no spaces (<LITERAL>ro,quota</LITERAL> for
example).</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXL">
<TITLE><LITERAL>filsys</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>filesys sherlock:/export/home/user2 - /home</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-89">
<TITLE><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> Profile Keyword
(Creating Local File Systems)</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>filesys keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>local file systems</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>files and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>local file systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>filesys</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>local file systems</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">filesys <REPLACEABLE>slice size</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_parameters</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>By using <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> with the values that are listed,
the JumpStart program creates local file systems during the installation.
You can specify <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> more than once.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following values: </PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>any</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program places the file system on any disk.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You cannot specify <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> when <LITERAL>size</LITERAL> is <LITERAL>existing</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>all</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>free</LITERAL>, <REPLACEABLE>start</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE>, or <LITERAL>ignore</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The disk slice where the JumpStart program places the file
system, for example, <LITERAL>c0t0d0s0</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c0d0s0</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>rootdisk.s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="FAPUK">
<PRIMARY>rootdisk</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>slice
value for filesys</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>The variable that contains the value
for the system's root disk, which is determined by the JumpStart program as
described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">How the System's Root
Disk Is Determined</OLINK>. The <LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE> suffix
indicates a specific slice on the disk. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The root disk is determined by the JumpStart program and determines
where the OS is to be installed. The rules file uses a probe keyword "<LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>,&rdquo; but this keyword is used differently than the "rootdisk"
keyword used in the JumpStart profile. You cannot set the place of installation
by using the probe keyword &ldquo;<LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>&rdquo; in the
rules file. The probe keyword, <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>, determines where
to boot from during the installation. See <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-7">Table 8&ndash;10</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following values:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>num</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The size of the file system is set to <REPLACEABLE>num</REPLACEABLE> in
Mbytes.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>existing</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The current size of the existing file system is used.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>When you use the <LITERAL>existing</LITERAL> value, you can change
the name of an existing slice by specifying <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE> as
a different <REPLACEABLE>mount_pt_name</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>auto</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The size of the file system is automatically determined, depending
on the software that is selected.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>all</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The specified <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> uses the entire
disk for the file system. When you specify the <LITERAL>all</LITERAL> value,
no other file systems can be placed on the specified disk.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>free</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The remaining unused space on the disk is used for the file
system.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>free</LITERAL> is used as the value to <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL>,
the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> entry must be the last entry in a profile.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>start</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system is explicitly partitioned. <REPLACEABLE>start</REPLACEABLE> is
the cylinder where the slice begins.  <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> is the
number of cylinders for the slice.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE> value is optional
and used when <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is specified as <LITERAL>any</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>.
If <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE> is not specified, <LITERAL>unnamed</LITERAL> is
set by default. If <LITERAL>unnamed</LITERAL> is set, you cannot specify the <REPLACEABLE>optional_parameters</REPLACEABLE> value. Use one of the following values:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>mount_pt_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system's mount-point name, for example, <FILENAME>/var</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>swap</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The specified <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is used as <LITERAL>swap</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>overlap</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The specified <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is defined
as a representation of a disk region. The VTOC value is V_BACKUP. By default,
slice 2 is an overlap slice that is a representation of the whole disk.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can specify <LITERAL>overlap</LITERAL> only when <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>existing</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>all</LITERAL>, or <REPLACEABLE>start</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>unnamed</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The specified <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is defined
as a raw slice, so <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> does not have a mount-point
name. If you do not specify <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE>, <LITERAL>unnamed</LITERAL> is used by default.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>ignore</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The specified <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is not used
or recognized by the JumpStart program. You can use this option to specify
that you want a file system to be ignored on a disk during installation. The
JumpStart program creates a new file system on the same disk with the same
name. You can use <LITERAL>ignore</LITERAL> only when <LITERAL>partitioning
existing</LITERAL> is specified.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_parameters</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following values:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>preserve</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The file system on the specified <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is
preserved.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><LITERAL>preserve</LITERAL> can be specified only when <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>existing</LITERAL> and <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> is <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>mount_options</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One or more mount options, which is the same as the <OPTION>o</OPTION> option
of the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="MOUNT-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>mount</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command.
The mount options are added to the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> entry
for the specified <REPLACEABLE>mount_pt_name</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you need to specify more than one mount option, the mount options
must be separated by commas and no space (<LITERAL>ro,quota</LITERAL>, for
example).</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-MIRROR">
<TITLE><LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword (Creating RAID-1 Volumes)</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>filesys keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>creating</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>RAID-1 volumes</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>files
and file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>RAID-1
volumes</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>filesys</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>RAID-1 volumes</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">filesys mirror[:<REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>]<REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> [<REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE>] <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_parameters</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>By using the <LITERAL>filesys mirror</LITERAL> keywords with the values
that are listed, the JumpStart program creates the RAID-1 and RAID-0 volumes
that are necessary to create a mirrored file system. You can specify <LITERAL>filesys
mirror</LITERAL> more than once to create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) for different
file systems.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>filesys mirror</LITERAL> keyword is only supported
for initial installations.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>This optional keyword enables you to name the RAID-1 volume
(mirror). Mirror names must start with the letter &ldquo;d&rdquo;, followed
by a number between 0 and 127, for example, <LITERAL>d100</LITERAL>. If you
do not specify a mirror name, the custom JumpStart program assigns a mirror
name for you. For guidelines about how to name mirrors, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="EPUDH"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">RAID Volume Name Requirements and Guidelines for Custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>This value specifies the disk slice where the custom JumpStart
program places the file system you want to duplicate. The slice value must
follow the format c<REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE>t<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>d<REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE>s<REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>, for example <LITERAL>c0t0d0s0</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c0t0d0s5</LITERAL>. The custom JumpStart program creates a RAID-0 volume (single-slice
concatenation) on the slice, and creates a RAID-1 volume to mirror the concatenation.
You can specify up to two slices for two RAID-0 volumes.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>This value specifies the size, in Mbytes, of the file system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>This value specifies the file system that you are duplicating.
The custom JumpStart program creates the RAID-1 volume from the slices that
are specified and mounts the RAID-1 volume on the specified file system. In
addition to critical file systems, such as root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>), <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME>, and <FILENAME>/var</FILENAME>, you can also specify <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> as the file system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_parameters</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>One or more mount options, which is the same as the <OPTION>o</OPTION> option
of the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="MOUNT-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>mount</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> command.
The mount options are added to the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> entry
for the specified <REPLACEABLE>file_system</REPLACEABLE>. If you need to specify
more than one mount option, the mount options must be separated by commas
and no spaces, for example, <LITERAL>ro,quota</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>For more information about creating mirrored file systems during your
installation, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="MIRROROVERVIEW-1">Chapter 8, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-702">
<TITLE><LITERAL>forced_deployment</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword (Installing Solaris Flash Differential Archives)</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">forced_deployment </PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>forced_deployment,
description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>forced_deployment</LITERAL> forces
the installation of a Solaris Flash differential archive onto a clone
system that is different than the software expects. </PARA>
<CAUTION>
<PARA>If you use <LITERAL>forced_deployment</LITERAL>, all new files
are deleted to bring the clone system to the expected state. If you are not
certain that you want files deleted, use the default, which protects new files
by stopping the installation. </PARA>
</CAUTION>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-1">
<TITLE><LITERAL>geo</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">geo <REPLACEABLE>region</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>geo keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>geo</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>geo</LITERAL> designates the regional locale or locales
that  you want to install on a system or to add when upgrading a system. <REPLACEABLE>region</REPLACEABLE> designates a geographical area that contains the locales
that you want to install. Values you can specify for <REPLACEABLE>region</REPLACEABLE> are
listed in the following table. </PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="100*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="296*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>N_Africa</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Northern Africa, including Egypt</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>C_America</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Central America, including Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Mexico,
Nicaragua, Panama</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>N_America</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>North America, including Canada, United States</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>S_America</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>South America, including Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia,
Ecuador, Paraguay, Peru, Uruguay, Venezuela</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>Asia</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Asia, including Japan, Republic of Korea, People's Republic of China,
Taiwan, Thailand</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>Ausi</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Australasia, including Australia, New Zealand</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>C_Europe</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Central Europe, including Austria, Czech Republic, Germany, Hungary,
Poland, Slovakia, Switzerland</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>E_Europe</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Eastern Europe, including Albania, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia,
Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania, Russia, Serbia, Slovenia, Turkey</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>N_Europe</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Northern Europe, including Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway, Sweden</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>S_Europe</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Southern Europe, including Greece, Italy, Portugal, Spain</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>W_Europe</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Western Europe, including Belgium, France, Great Britain, Ireland, Netherlands</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>M_East</LITERAL></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Middle East, including Israel</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
<PARA>A complete list of the component locale values that compose each regional
locale that is listed previously is presented in <OLINK TARGETDOC="I18NDG"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">International Language Environments Guide</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can specify a <LITERAL>geo</LITERAL> keyword for each locale
you need to add to a system.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-90">
<TITLE><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">install_type <REPLACEABLE>initial_upgrade_flash_switch</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> defines whether to erase and install
a new Solaris OS on a system, upgrade the existing Solaris OS on a system,
or install a Solaris Flash archive on the system.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You must specify <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> in a profile,
and <LITERAL>install_type</LITERAL> must be the first profile keyword in every
profile.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>install_type keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>install_type</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description
and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>upgrade</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>You must use one of the
following options for the <REPLACEABLE>initial_upgrade_flash_switch</REPLACEABLE>:
 </PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>initial_install</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies to perform an initial installation of the Solaris
OS</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>upgrade</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies to perform an upgrade of the Solaris OS</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>flash_install</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies to install a Solaris Flash archive that overwrites
all files</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>flash_update</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies to install a Solaris Flash differential archive
that overwrites only the files that are specified</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Some profile keywords can only be used with the <LITERAL>initial_install</LITERAL> option. Some profile keywords can only be used with the <LITERAL>upgrade</LITERAL> option. Some profile keywords can only be used with the <LITERAL>flash_install</LITERAL> option.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-91">
<TITLE><LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>layout_constraint keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>layout_constraint, description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">layout_constraint <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>constraint</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> designates the constraint auto-layout
has on a file system if auto-layout needs to reallocate space during an upgrade
because of space problems. </PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="33.49*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="66.51*">
<THEAD>
<ROW>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1" VALIGN="TOP">
<PARA>Limitation</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY ROWSEP="1" VALIGN="TOP">
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>This keyword is used only with upgrade option.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> only for the upgrade
option when you need to reallocate disk space.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If you do not specify the <LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> keyword </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The JumpStart program lays out the disk as follows:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>File systems that require more space for the upgrade are marked
changeable.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>File systems that are on the same disk as the file system
that requires more space and that are mounted by the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file
are marked changeable.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Remaining file systems are marked fixed because auto-layout
cannot change the file systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If you specify one or more <LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> keywords</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The JumpStart program lays out the disk as follows:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>File systems that require more space for the upgrade are marked
changeable.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>File systems for which you specified a <LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> keyword are marked with the specified constraint.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The remaining file systems are marked fixed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If the file system is not marked changeable</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>You cannot change the constraint on file systems that require more space
for the upgrade because the file systems must be marked changeable. You can
use the <LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> keyword to change the <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE> values on file systems that require more space for the upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If file systems require more space for upgrade</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>To help auto-layout reallocate space, select more file systems to be
changeable or movable, especially those file systems that are located on the
same disks as the file systems that require more space for the upgrade.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the file system's disk slice on which to specify
the constraint. You must specify the system's disk slice in the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>constraint</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following constraints for the specified file
system:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>changeable</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Auto-layout can move the file system to another location and
it can change the file system size. The <LITERAL>changeable</LITERAL> constraint
can only be specified on file systems that are mounted by the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file. You can change the file system's size by specifying the <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE> value.</PARA>
<PARA>When you mark a file system as changeable and <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE> is
not specified, the file system's minimum size is set to 10 percent more than
the minimum size that is required. For example, if the minimum size for a
file system is 100 Mbytes, the changed size is 110 Mbytes. If <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE> is specified, any free space that remains, original size minus
minimum size, is used for other file systems.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>movable</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Auto-layout can move the file system to another slice on the
same disk or different disk. The file system size remains the same.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>available</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Auto-layout can use all of the space on the file system to
reallocate space. All of the data in the file system is lost. The <LITERAL>available</LITERAL> constraint can only be specified on file systems that are not mounted
by the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>collapse</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Auto-layout moves and collapses the specified file system
into the parent file system.  You can use the <LITERAL>collapse</LITERAL> option
to reduce the number of file systems on a system as part of the upgrade. For
example, if a system has the <LITERAL>/usr</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>/usr/share</LITERAL> file
systems, collapsing the <LITERAL>/usr/share</LITERAL> file system moves the
file system into <LITERAL>/usr</LITERAL>, the parent file system. You can
specify the <LITERAL>collapse</LITERAL> constraint only on file systems that
are mounted by the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the size of the file system after auto-layout reallocates
space. The <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE> option enables you to change
the size of a file system. The size of the file system might be larger if
unallocated space is added to the file system. But, the size is never less
than the value you specify. The <REPLACEABLE>minimum_size</REPLACEABLE> value
is optional. Use this value only if you have marked a file system as changeable
and the minimum size cannot be less than what the file system needs for the
existing file system contents.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXM">
<TITLE><LITERAL>layout_constraint</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>layout_constraint c0t3d0s1 changeable 200

layout_constraint c0t3d0s4 movable

layout_constraint c0t3d1s3 available

layout_constraint c0t2d0s1 collapse</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-701">
<TITLE><LITERAL>local_customization</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword (Installing Solaris Flash Archives)</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">local_customization <REPLACEABLE>local_directory</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>local_customization,
description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>Before you install a Solaris Flash archive
on a clone system, you can create custom scripts to preserve local configurations
on the clone system. The <LITERAL>local_customization</LITERAL> keyword designates
the directory where you have stored these scripts. <REPLACEABLE>local_directory</REPLACEABLE> is
the path to the script on the clone system.</PARA>
<PARA>For information about predeployment and postdeployment scripts, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLFLASH" TARGETPTR="FLASHCREATE-65"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Creating Customization Scripts</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and Installation)</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-92">
<TITLE><LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">locale <REPLACEABLE>locale_name</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> with both the initial installation
and upgrade options.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>locale keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>locale, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> designates the locale packages you want
to install or add when upgrading for the specified <REPLACEABLE>locale_name</REPLACEABLE>.
The <REPLACEABLE>locale_name</REPLACEABLE> values are the same as those values
that are used for the <ENVAR>$LANG</ENVAR> environment variable. <OLINK TARGETDOC="I18NDG"><CITETITLE REMAP="book">International Language Environments Guide</CITETITLE></OLINK> contains a list of valid locale values.  </PARA>
<PARA>When you use the <LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> keyword, consider the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you have preconfigured a default locale, the locale is
automatically installed. The English language packages are installed by default.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You can specify a <LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> keyword for each
locale you need to add to a system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-METADB">
<TITLE><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword (Creating State Database Replicas)</TITLE>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY><LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL> profile keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>metadb</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>creating state database replicas (meatball)</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>
<PROGRAMLISTING>metadb <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> [size <REPLACEABLE>size-in-blocks</REPLACEABLE>] [count <REPLACEABLE>number-of-replicas</REPLACEABLE>]</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL> keyword enables you to create Solaris
Volume Manager state database replicas (mediates) during your custom JumpStart
installation. You can use the <LITERAL>metadb</LITERAL> keyword multiple times
in your profile file to create state database replicas on different disk slices.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You must specify the disk slice on which you want the custom
JumpStart program to place the state database replica. The <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> value
must follow the format c<REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE>t<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>d<REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE>s<REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>size</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>size-in-blocks</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <LITERAL>size</LITERAL> optional keyword enables you to
specify the size, in blocks, of the state database replica to be created.
If you do not specify a <LITERAL>size</LITERAL> value, the custom JumpStart
program uses a default size of 8192 blocks for the state database replica.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>count</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>number-of-replicas</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You can specify the number of state database replicas you
are creating by setting the optional <LITERAL>count</LITERAL> keyword value
in your profile. If you do not specify a <LITERAL>count</LITERAL> value, the
custom JumpStart program creates three state database replicas by default.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>For more information about creating Solaris Volume Manager state database
replicas during your installation, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="VOLUMES-10"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">State Database Replicas Guidelines and Requirements</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-703">
<TITLE><LITERAL>no_content_check</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword (Installing Solaris Flash Archives)</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">no_content_check</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>When installing a clone system with a Solaris Flash differential
archive, you can use the <LITERAL>no_content_check</LITERAL> keyword to ignore
file-by-file validation. File-by-file validation ensures that the clone system
is a duplicate of the master system. Avoid using this keyword unless you are
sure the clone system is a duplicate of the original master system.</PARA>
<CAUTION>
<PARA>If you use <LITERAL>no_content_check</LITERAL>, all new files
are deleted to bring the clone system to the expected state. If you are not
certain that you want files deleted, use the default, which protects new files
by stopping the installation. </PARA>
</CAUTION>
<PARA>For information about installing Solaris Flash differential archives,
see <OLINK TARGETPTR="FLASH-46">To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive
With a Custom JumpStart Installation</OLINK>.  </PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-704">
<TITLE><LITERAL>no_master_check</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword (Installing Solaris Flash Archives)</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">no_master_check</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>no_master_check keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>no_master_check, description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>When installing a clone system with a Solaris Flash differential
archive, you can use the <LITERAL>no_master_check</LITERAL> keyword to ignore
checking the clone system to make sure it was built from the original master
system. Avoid using this keyword unless you are sure the clone system is a
duplicate of the original master system. </PARA>
<PARA>For information about installing Solaris Flash differential archives,
see <OLINK TARGETPTR="FLASH-46">To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive
With a Custom JumpStart Installation</OLINK>.  </PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-93">
<TITLE><LITERAL>num_clients</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">num_clients <REPLACEABLE>client_num</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>noneuclidean profile keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>noneuclidean</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>When a server is installed, space is allocated for each diskless
client's root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) and <FILENAME>swap</FILENAME> file
systems. <LITERAL>num_clients</LITERAL> defines the number of diskless clients, <REPLACEABLE>client_num</REPLACEABLE>, that a server supports. If you do not specify <LITERAL>num_clients</LITERAL> in the profile, five diskless clients are allocated
by default. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>num_clients</LITERAL> only when <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> is specified as <LITERAL>server</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-94">
<TITLE><LITERAL>package</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> [add [<REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type location</REPLACEABLE>]| delete]</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>You can use <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> with both the initial installation
and upgrade options. The <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword enables you to
do the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Add a package to the software group from the Solaris distribution
that is to be installed. <INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>adding</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>packages
from software groups</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Add a package to the software group from outside the distribution
that is being installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Exclude or remove a package from the software group that is
to be installed or upgraded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Add a package from outside the distribution that is being
installed when installing a Solaris Flash archive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the package name in the form <LITERAL>SUNW</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>. To view detailed information about packages and their
names, on an installed system, use the <COMMAND>pkginfo -l</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>add | delete</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies to add or remove the specified package. If you do
not specify <LITERAL>add</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>add</LITERAL> is
used by default.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You can add more than one package by adding another package entry
to the profile and omitting the location. The location of the previous package
is used for all subsequent packages if the location is left blank.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>[<REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type location</REPLACEABLE>]</TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the addition of a package or packages that are located
outside the Solaris distribution that is being installed. The values of <REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>location</REPLACEABLE> depend
on where the package is stored. The following sections contain the values
you can use for <REPLACEABLE>retrieval_type</REPLACEABLE> and <REPLACEABLE>location</REPLACEABLE> and examples of how to use the <LITERAL>package_name</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-400">
<TITLE>Packages Stored on an NFS Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the package is stored on an NFS server, use one of the following
syntaxes for the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword. </PARA>
<SCREEN>package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> add nfs <REPLACEABLE>server_name:/path</REPLACEABLE> [retry <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE>]
package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> add nfs://<REPLACEABLE>server_name:/path</REPLACEABLE> [retry <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE>]</SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the package name in the form <LITERAL>SUNW</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>. To view detailed information about packages and their
names, on an installed system, use the <COMMAND>pkginfo -l</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the server where you stored the package.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the package directory on the specified
server.  If the path contains $HOST, $HOST is replaced with the name of the
host system that you are installing.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>retry <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Is an optional keyword. <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE> is the
maximum number of times the installation process attempts to mount the directory.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-EX-29">
<TITLE>Adding a Package by Using NFS</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword adds
the SUNWnew package from the NFS location <FILENAME>nfs://golden/packages/Solaris_11/</FILENAME>. If a mount fails, the NFS mount is tried five times.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>package SUNWnew add nfs <FILENAME>golden:/packages/Solaris_11 retry 5</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-3001">
<TITLE>Packages Stored on an HTTP Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the package is stored on an HTTP server, use one of the following
syntaxes for the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> add http://<REPLACEABLE>server_name[:port] path</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE>
package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> add http <REPLACEABLE>server_name[:port] path</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the package name in the form <LITERAL>SUNW</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>. To view detailed information about packages and their
names, on an installed system, use the <COMMAND>pkginfo -l</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the server where you stored the package. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies an optional port.  <REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE> can
be a port number or the name of a TCP service that has a port number that
is determined at runtime.</PARA>
<PARA>If you do not specify a port, the default HTTP port number 80 is used.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the package to be retrieved from
the specified server. When using an HTTP server, the package must be in package
datastream format. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the optional keywords to use when you retrieve a
package from an HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="FLASH-TBL-6201">
<TITLE>Optional <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> Keywords to Use With HTTP</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="29.69*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC3" COLWIDTH="70.31*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value Definition</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC2">
<PARA><LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>min</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC3">
<PARA>The <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify, in minutes,
the maximum length of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data
from the HTTP server. If a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened,
and resumed. If you specify a <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> value of 0 (zero),
the connection is not reopened.</PARA>
<PARA>If a timeout reconnection occurs, the package is retried from the beginning
of the package and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC2">
<PARA><LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>host:port</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC3">
<PARA>The <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify a proxy
host and proxy port.  You can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris package
from the other side of a firewall.  You must supply a proxy port when you
specify the <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-EX-16">
<TITLE>Adding a Package by Using HTTP</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword adds
all the packages listed in the <FILENAME>Solaris 11</FILENAME> directory
from the HTTP location <FILENAME>http://package.central/Solaris_11</FILENAME>.
If five minutes pass and no data is received, the package data is retrieved
again. Previous package data is discarded. Either of the following formats
can be used.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100">package SUNWnew add http package.central/Solaris_11 timeout 5 </PROGRAMLISTING>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100">package SUNWnew add http://package.central/Solaris_11 timeout 5 </PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-EX-26">
<TITLE>Adding a Package by Using HTTP
with a Proxy Port</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword adds
all the packages listed in the <FILENAME>Solaris_11</FILENAME> directory
from the HTTP location <FILENAME>http://package.central/Solaris_11</FILENAME>.
The package is retrieved across a firewall by using the <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING WIDTH="100">package SUNWnew add http://package.central/Solaris_11 proxy webcache.east:8080</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-611">
<TITLE>Packages Stored on a Local Device</TITLE>
<PARA>You can retrieve a Solaris package from a local device if you stored
the package on a file system-oriented, random-access device, such as a diskette
or a DVD-ROM. Use the following syntax for the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> add local_device <REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>file_system_type</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the package name in the form <LITERAL>SUNW</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>. To view detailed information about packages and their
names, on an installed system, use the <COMMAND>pkginfo -l</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the drive where the Solaris package
resides. If the device name is a canonical path, the device is mounted directly.
  If you supply a device name that is not a canonical path, the installation
utility adds <FILENAME>/dev/dsk/</FILENAME> to the path. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the path to the Solaris package, relative to the
root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system on the device you specified. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>file_system_type</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the type of file system on the device.  If you do
not supply a file system type, the installation utility attempts to mount
a UFS file system.  If the UFS mount fails, the installation utility attempts
to mount an HSFS file system. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-EX-20">
<TITLE>Adding a Package by Using a
Local Device With a UFS File System</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword adds
the <LITERAL>SUNWnew</LITERAL> package from the directory <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Product</FILENAME> from the local device c0t6d0s0. This is a UFS file system.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>package SUNWnew add local_device c0t6d0s0 <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Product</FILENAME> ufs</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-EX-21">
<TITLE>Adding a Package by Using a
Local Device From an HSFS File System</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword adds
the <LITERAL>SUNWnew</LITERAL> package from the directory <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Product</FILENAME> from the local device c0t6d0s0. This is an HSFS file system.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>package SUNWnew add local_device c0t6d0s0 <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Product</FILENAME>  hsfs</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-711">
<TITLE>Packages Stored on a Local File</TITLE>
<PARA>A package can be installed from the miniroot from which you booted the
system. When you perform a custom JumpStart installation, you boot the system
from a DVD, CD, or an NFS-based miniroot.  The installation software is loaded
and run from this miniroot.  Therefore, a package that you stored in the DVD,
CD, or NFS-based miniroot is accessible as a local file. Use the following
syntax for the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>package <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> add local_file <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> </SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the package name in the form <LITERAL>SUNW</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>name</REPLACEABLE>. To view detailed information about packages and their
names, on an installed system, use the <COMMAND>pkginfo -l</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the package. The path must be accessible
to the system as a local file while the system is booted from the Solaris Software - 1 CD
or from the Solaris Operating System DVD. The system cannot access <FILENAME>/net</FILENAME> when
it is booted from the Solaris Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris Operating System DVD.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-EX-12">
<TITLE>Adding a Package by Using a
Local File</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword adds
the <LITERAL>SUNWnew</LITERAL> package from the <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Product</FILENAME> directory. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>package SUNWnew add local_file <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/Product</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-3">
<TITLE>Limitations When Using the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> Keyword</TITLE>
<PARA>Note these limitations when using the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> keyword:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Some packages are required and cannot be deleted.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You cannot individually add or delete localization packages
by using the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> profile keyword. To add localization
packages, use the <LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> profile keyword.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Packages cannot be retrieved from an FTP server location or
local backup, such as tape.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Packages within the Solaris distribution being installed cannot
be added from alternate locations. If a package from the Solaris distribution
is specified, the package cannot be followed by an alternative location in
order to maintain consistency with the resulting installed system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>In order to install without manual intervention, the package
must be installable by using the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command. The same <LITERAL>admin</LITERAL> file must be used to install the software group packages and
the package that resides in another location. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the retrieval_type is HTTP, then the package must be in
stream format.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the retrieval_type is NFS server, local device, or local
file, then the package should follow standard packaging format with the directory
name being the same as the package being installed. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a package is being added from a separate location and a
package depends on another package that is not currently installed, the package
is not installed. An error message is logged into the install or upgrade log
file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the package is being installed with a Solaris Flash archive,
follow these guidelines.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Any package installed must be compatible with the archive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a package is present in the archive, the JumpStart overwrites
the existing package.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-41">
<TITLE>Upgrade Behavior When Using
the <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> Keyword</TITLE>
<PARA>When you use <LITERAL>package</LITERAL> for an upgrade, the JumpStart
program performs the following actions: <INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX571">
<PRIMARY>upgrade</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM></PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>All packages already on the system are automatically upgraded.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> <LITERAL>add</LITERAL> and <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> is not installed on
the system, the package is installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL> and <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> is installed on the
system, the package is deleted <EMPHASIS>before</EMPHASIS> the upgrade begins.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> <LITERAL>delete</LITERAL> and <REPLACEABLE>package_name</REPLACEABLE> is not installed on
the system, the package is not installed if the package is part of a cluster
that is designated to be installed.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT4>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-95">
<TITLE><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">partitioning <REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>partitioning keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>profile
keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>partitioning</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description
and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL> defines how
the disks are divided into slices for file systems during the installation.
 </PARA>
<PARA>If you do not specify <LITERAL>partitioning</LITERAL> in the profile,
the <LITERAL>default</LITERAL> type of partitioning is used by default.</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>type</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Use one of the following values:</PARA>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>default</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program selects the disks and creates the file
systems on which to install the specified software,  except for any file systems
that are specified by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords. <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is
selected first. The JumpStart program uses additional disks if the specified
software does not fit on <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>existing</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program uses the existing file systems on the
system's disks. All file systems except <FILENAME>/</FILENAME>, <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME>, <FILENAME>/usr/openwin</FILENAME>, <FILENAME>/opt</FILENAME>, and <FILENAME>/var</FILENAME> are
preserved. The JumpStart program uses the last mount-point field from the
file system superblock to determine which file-system mount point the slice
represents. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>When you use both the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> and <LITERAL>partitioning
existing</LITERAL> profile keywords, you must set size <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> to <LITERAL>existing</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><LITERAL>explicit</LITERAL></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The JumpStart program uses the disks and creates the file
systems that are specified by the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords. If
you specify only the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system with the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keyword, all of the Solaris software is installed in the
root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you use the <LITERAL>explicit</LITERAL> profile value, you
must use the <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keyword to specify the disks to use
and file systems to create.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="EGKCA">
<TITLE><LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">patch <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE>]</PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The
list should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches are
installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add a space after the
comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A file with a list of patches that is found in the <REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE>. The patches are installed in the order specified in the file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location where the patches reside. The locations
allowed are the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>NFS server</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>HTTP server</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Local device</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Local file</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Optional keywords depend on where patches are stored. The
following sections describe the possible locations and optional keywords.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<SECT4 ID="EGKBU">
<TITLE>Patches Stored on an NFS Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the patch is stored on an NFS server, use one of the following syntaxes
for the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">patch <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> nfs <REPLACEABLE>server_name:/patch_directory</REPLACEABLE> [retry <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE>]
patch <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> nfs://<REPLACEABLE>server_name/patch_director</REPLACEABLE>  [retry <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE>]</SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The
list should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches are
installed in the order specified in the list. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A file with a list of patches that is found in the <REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE>. The patches are installed in the order specified in the file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the server where you stored the patches.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_directory</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the patch directory on the specified
server. The patches must be in standard patch format. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>retry <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Is an optional keyword. <REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE> is the
maximum number of times the install utility attempts to mount the directory.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKCB">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using NFS</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds all
the patches listed in the <FILENAME>patch</FILENAME> file from the NFS patch
directory <FILENAME>nfs://patch_master/Solaris/v11/patches</FILENAME>.
Patches are installed in the order listed in the <FILENAME>patch</FILENAME>.
If a mount fails, the NFS mount is tried five times.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch patch_file <FILENAME>nfs://patch_master/Solaris/v11/patches retry 5</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKAV">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch by Using NFS</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds the
patches 112467&ndash;01 and 112765&ndash;02 from the patch directory <FILENAME>/Solaris/v11/patches</FILENAME> on the server <LITERAL>patch_master</LITERAL>.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch 112467-01,112765-02 nfs patch_master:<FILENAME>/Solaris/v11/patches</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="EGKBS">
<TITLE>Patches Stored on an HTTP Server</TITLE>
<PARA>If the patch is stored on an HTTP server, use one of the following syntaxes
for the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">patch  <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> http://<REPLACEABLE>server_name [:port]</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>patch_directory</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_http_keywords</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<SCREEN WIDTH="100">patch  <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> http <REPLACEABLE>server_name [:port]</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>patch_directory</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>optional_http_keywords</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The
list should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches are
installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add a space after the
comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A file with a list of patches that is found in the <REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE>. The patches are installed in the order specified in the file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>server_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the server where you stored the patch. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies an optional port.  <REPLACEABLE>port</REPLACEABLE> can
be a port number or the name of a TCP service that has a port number that
is determined at runtime.</PARA>
<PARA>If you do not specify a port, the default HTTP port number 80 is used.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_directory</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the patch directory to be retrieved
from the specified server. When using an HTTP server, the patch must be in
JAR format. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>optional_keywords</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the optional keywords to use when you retrieve a
patch from an HTTP server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="EGKBZ">
<TITLE>Optional <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> Keywords
to Use With HTTP</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="29.69*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC3" COLWIDTH="70.31*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value Definition</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC2">
<PARA><LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>min</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC3">
<PARA>The <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify, in minutes,
the maximum length of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data
from the HTTP server. If a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened,
and resumed. If you specify a <LITERAL>timeout</LITERAL> value of 0 (zero),
the connection is not reopened.</PARA>
<PARA>If a timeout reconnection occurs, the package is retried from the beginning
of the package and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC2">
<PARA><LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>host:port</REPLACEABLE></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY COLNAME="COLSPEC3">
<PARA>The <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword enables you to specify a proxy
host and proxy port.  You can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris package
from the other side of a firewall.  You must supply a proxy port when you
specify the <LITERAL>proxy</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKCZ">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using HTTP</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds all
the patches listed in the <FILENAME>patch_file</FILENAME> file from the HTTP
location <FILENAME>http://patch.central/Solaris/v11/patches</FILENAME>. The patches are installed in the order specified in the file
the <FILENAME>patch</FILENAME> file. If five minutes pass and no data is received,
the patch data is retrieved again. Previous patch data is discarded.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch patch_file http://patch.central<FILENAME>/Solaris/v11/patches timeout 5</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKCV">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch by Using HTTP</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword entry
adds the patches 112467&ndash;01 and 112765&ndash;02 from the patch location <FILENAME>http://patch_master/Solaris/v11/patches</FILENAME>.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch 112467-01,112765-02 http://patch.central<FILENAME>/Solaris/v11/patches</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="EGKAZ">
<TITLE>Patches Stored on a Local Device</TITLE>
<PARA>You can retrieve a Solaris package from a local device if you stored
the package on a file system-oriented, random-access device, such as a diskette
or a DVD-ROM. Use the following syntax for the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<SCREEN>patch <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> local_device \
<REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>file_system_type</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The
list should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches are
installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add a space after the
comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A file with a list of patches that is found in the <REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE>. The patches are installed in the order specified in the file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>device</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the drive where the Solaris package
resides. If the device name is a canonical path, the device is mounted directly.
  If you supply a device name that is not a canonical path, the installation
utility adds <FILENAME>/dev/dsk/</FILENAME> to the path.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the path to the Solaris patch, relative to the root
(<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system on the device you specified. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>file_system_type</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the type of file system on the device.  If you do
not supply a file system type, the installation utility attempts to mount
a UFS file system.  If the UFS mount fails, the installation utility attempts
to mount an HSFS file system. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKCG">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using a
Local Device</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds all
the patches listed in the <FILENAME>patch_file</FILENAME> file from the directory <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME> from the local device
c0t6d0s0. The <FILENAME>patch</FILENAME> file determines the order of patches
to be installed. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch patch_file c0t6d0s0 <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKDL">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch by Using a Local Device</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds the
patches 112467&ndash;01 and 112765&ndash;02 from the patch directory <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME> from local device c0t6d0s0. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch 112467-01,112765-02 local_device c0t6d0s0 <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="EGKDB">
<TITLE>Patches Stored on a Local File</TITLE>
<PARA>A patch can be installed from the miniroot from which you booted the
system. When you perform a custom JumpStart installation, you boot the system
from a DVD, CD, or an NFS-based miniroot.  The installation software is loaded
and run from this miniroot.  Therefore, a patch that you stored in the DVD,
CD, or NFS-based miniroot is accessible as a local file. Use the following
syntax for the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> keyword.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch <REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE> | <REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE> local_file <REPLACEABLE>patch _directory</REPLACEABLE> </PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_id_list</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The
list should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches are
installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add a space after the
comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_file</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>A file with a list of patches that is found in the <REPLACEABLE>patch_location</REPLACEABLE>. The patches are installed in the order specified in the file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>patch_directory</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the location of the patch directory. The patch directory
must be accessible to the system as a local file while the system is booted
from the Solaris Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris Operating System DVD. The system cannot
access <FILENAME>/net</FILENAME> when it is booted from the Solaris Software - 1 CD
or from the Solaris Operating System DVD.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKCY">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using a
Local File</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds all
the patches that are listed in the <FILENAME>patch_file</FILENAME> file from
the <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME> directory.
The <FILENAME>patch</FILENAME> file determines the order of patches to be
installed. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch patch_cal_file <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE ID="EGKBT">
<TITLE>Adding a Patch by Using a Local File</TITLE>
<PARA>In this example, the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> profile keyword adds the
patches 112467&ndash;01 and 112765&ndash;02 from the patch directory <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME>. </PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>patch 112467-01,112765-02 local_file <FILENAME>/Solaris_11/patches</FILENAME></PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT4>
<SECT4 ID="EGKBV">
<TITLE>Limitations When Using the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> Keyword</TITLE>
<PARA>Note the following limitations when using the <LITERAL>patch</LITERAL> keyword:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Patches cannot be retrieved from FTP locations or local backup,
such as tape.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Signed patches cannot be added.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Patches must be installable with the <COMMAND>patchadd</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a patch depends on a patch that is not currently installed,
the patch is not installed. An error message is logged into the installation
or upgrade log file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You must determine the correct order of the patches for a
correct installation of the patches.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</SECT4>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-101">
<TITLE><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">root_device <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>root_device keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>root_device</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> designates the system's root disk. <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">How the System's Root Disk Is Determined</OLINK> contains
additional information.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The root disk is determined by the JumpStart program and determines
where the OS is to be installed. The rules file uses a probe keyword "<LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>," but this keyword is used differently than the "rootdisk" keyword
used in the JumpStart profile. You cannot set the place of installation by
using the probe keyword &ldquo;<LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>&rdquo; in the rules
file. The probe keyword, <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>, determines where to
boot from during the installation. See <OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-7">Table 8&ndash;10</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>When you are upgrading a system, <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> designates
the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system and the file systems that are
mounted by its <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file to be upgraded. You must
specify <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> if more than one root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system can be upgraded on a system. You must specify <REPLACEABLE>slice</REPLACEABLE> in
the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
<PARA>When you use the <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> keyword, consider the
following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you specify <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> on a system
with only one disk, the <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> and the disk must match.
Also, any <LITERAL>filesys</LITERAL> keywords that specify the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system must match <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you are upgrading a RAID-1 volume (mirror), the value that
is specified for <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> should be one side of the
mirror. The other side of the mirror is automatically upgraded. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<EXAMPLE ID="FXJXN">
<TITLE><LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING>root_device c0t0d0s2</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
<SECT4 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">
<TITLE>How the System's Root Disk Is Determined</TITLE>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX596">
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX597">
<PRIMARY>matching</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX598">
<PRIMARY>(<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>value set by JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX599">
<PRIMARY>rootdisk</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>definition</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX600">
<PRIMARY>rootdisk</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>value set by JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX601">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk matching
rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX602">
<PRIMARY>hard
disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX603">
<PRIMARY>matching</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX604">
<PRIMARY>(<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>value set by JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX605">
<PRIMARY>rootdisk</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>value set by
JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="PREPARECUSTOM-IX606">
<PRIMARY>rules</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk matching rules</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>A system's
root disk is the disk on the system that contains the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system. In a profile, you can use the <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> variable
in place of a disk name, which the JumpStart program sets to the system's
root disk. <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-28241">Table 8&ndash;8</OLINK> describes
how the JumpStart program determines the system's root disk for the installation.
         </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>The JumpStart program only determines a system's root disk size
during an initial installation. You cannot change a system's root disk during
an upgrade.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="PREPARECUSTOM-28241">
<TITLE>How JumpStart Determines
a System's Root Disk (Initial Installation)</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="38*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN3" COLWIDTH="358*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Stage</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Action</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>1</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If the <LITERAL>root_device</LITERAL> keyword is specified in the profile,
the JumpStart program sets <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> to the root device. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>2</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is not set and the <LITERAL>boot_device</LITERAL> keyword
is specified in the profile, the JumpStart program sets <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> to
the boot device.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>3</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is not set and a <LITERAL>filesys c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>w</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL></LITERAL> <REPLACEABLE>size</REPLACEABLE> <LITERAL>/</LITERAL> entry is specified in the profile,
the JumpStart program sets <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> to the disk that is
specified in the entry.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>4</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is not set and a <LITERAL>rootdisk.s</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>n</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL></LITERAL> entry is specified in the profile, the
JumpStart program searches the system's disks in kernel probe order for an
existing root file system on the specified slice. If a disk is found, the
JumpStart program sets <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> to the found disk.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>5</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is not set and <LITERAL>partitioning
existing</LITERAL> is specified in the profile, the JumpStart program searches
the system's disks in kernel probe order for an existing root file system.
If a root file system is not found or more than one is found, an error occurs.
If a root file system is found, the JumpStart program sets <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> to
the found disk.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>6</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is not set, the JumpStart program sets <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> to the disk where the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file
system is installed.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT4>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-102">
<TITLE><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> Profile
Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">system_type <REPLACEABLE>type_switch</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system_type</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>description and values</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>system_type
profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> defines the type of system on which
the Solaris OS is to be installed. </PARA>
<PARA><REPLACEABLE>type_switch</REPLACEABLE> represents the option <LITERAL>standalone</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>server</LITERAL>, which you use to indicate the type
of system on which the Solaris software is to be installed. If you do not
specify <LITERAL>system_type</LITERAL> in a profile, <LITERAL>standalone</LITERAL> is
used by default.</PARA>
</SECT3>
<SECT3 ID="PREPARECUSTOM-103">
<TITLE><LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL> Profile Keyword</TITLE>
<PROGRAMLISTING ROLE="COMPLETE">usedisk <REPLACEABLE>disk_name</REPLACEABLE> ...</PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>By default, the JumpStart program uses all of the operational disks
on the system when you specify <LITERAL>partitioning default</LITERAL>. The <LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL> profile keyword designates one or more disks that you want
the JumpStart program to use. You must specify <REPLACEABLE>disk_name</REPLACEABLE> in
the form <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>t</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE> or <LITERAL>c</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>d</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>z</REPLACEABLE>, for example, <LITERAL>c0t0d0</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>c0d0s0</LITERAL>. </PARA>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>designating for partitioning default</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>defaults</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>designating
disks</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>partitioning</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>profile keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>partitioning</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>designating
disks</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>usedisk, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>usedisk profile keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>dontuse</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>usedisk and</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>dontuse profile
keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>profile keywords</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>If you specify <LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL> in a profile, the JumpStart
program uses only the disks that you specify after the <LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL> keyword.
        </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You cannot specify the <LITERAL>usedisk</LITERAL> keyword and
the <LITERAL>dontuse</LITERAL> keyword in the same profile.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</SECT3>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-4">
<TITLE>Custom JumpStart Environment Variables</TITLE>
<PARA>You can use environment variables in your begin and finish scripts.
For example, a begin script might extract the disk size, <ENVAR>SI_DISKSIZES</ENVAR>,
and install or not install particular packages on a system, based on the actual
disk size the script extracts.</PARA>
<PARA>Information that is gathered about a system is stored in these environment
variables, which are generally set or not, depending on the rule keywords
and values you use in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
<PARA>For example, information about which operating system is already installed
on a system is only available in <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR> after the <LITERAL>installed</LITERAL> keyword is used.</PARA>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-5">Table 8&ndash;9</OLINK> describes
these variables and their values.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-5">
<TITLE>Installation
Environment Variables</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="116.00*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="280.00*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Environment Variable</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Value</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_ARCH</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The hardware architecture of the install client. The <ENVAR>SI_ARCH</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>arch</LITERAL> keyword is used in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_BEGIN</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The name of the begin script, if one is used.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_CLASS</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The name of the profile that is used to install the install client.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_DISKLIST</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A comma-separated list of disk names on the install client. The <ENVAR>SI_DISKLIST</ENVAR> variable is set when the <FILENAME>disksize</FILENAME> keyword is
used and matched in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file. The <ENVAR>SI_DISKLIST</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>SI_NUMDISKS</ENVAR> variables are used to determine the physical disk to use
for the <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is described
in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">How the System's Root Disk Is Determined</OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_DISKSIZES</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A comma-separated list of disk sizes on the install client. The <ENVAR>SI_DISKSIZES</ENVAR> variable is set when the <LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL> keyword is used
and matched in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_DOMAINNAME</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The domain name. The <ENVAR>SI_DOMAINNAME</ENVAR> variable is set when
the <LITERAL>dommainname</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_FINISH</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The name of the finish script, if one is used.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_HOSTADDRESS</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The install client's IP address.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_HOSTNAME</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The install client's host name. The <ENVAR>SI_HOSTNAME</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The device name of a disk with a specific operating system on the disk,
for example, Solaris, SunOS, or System V. The <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>installed</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file. <ENVAR>SI_INST_OS</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>SI_INST_VER</ENVAR> are used to determine the value of <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_INST_OS</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The name of the operating system. <ENVAR>SI_INST_OS</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>SI_INST_VER</ENVAR> are used to determine the value of <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_INST_VER</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The version of the operating system. <ENVAR>SI_INST_OS</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>SI_INST_VER</ENVAR> are used to determine the value of <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_KARCH</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The install client's kernel architecture. The <ENVAR>SI_KARCH</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>karch</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_MEMSIZE</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The amount of physical memory on the install client. The <ENVAR>SI_MEMSIZE</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_MODEL</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The install client's model name. The <ENVAR>SI_MODEL</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>model</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_NETWORK</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The install client's network number. The <ENVAR>SI_NETWORK</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>network</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_NUMDISKS</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The number of disks on an install client. The <ENVAR>SI_NUMDISKS</ENVAR> variable
is set when the <LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL> keyword is used and matched in
the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file. The <ENVAR>SI_NUMDISKS</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>SI_DISKLIST</ENVAR> variables are used to determine the physical disk to use for the <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> is described in <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">How the System's Root Disk Is Determined</OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_OSNAME</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The operating system release on the Solaris software image. For example,
you can use the <ENVAR>SI_OSNAME</ENVAR> variable in a script if you are installing
the Solaris software on systems that are based on the version of the operating
system on the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD image.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_ROOTDISK</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The device name of the disk that is represented by the logical name <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. The <ENVAR>SI_ROOTDISK</ENVAR> variable is set when the <LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL> or the <LITERAL>installed</LITERAL> keyword is set to <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.  The <LITERAL>SI_ROOTDISK</LITERAL> variable sets  the device to boot from during the installation. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>You cannot set the place of installation by using the probe keyword &ldquo;<LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>&rdquo; in the rules file. For information on the "<LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>" variable that is set in a JumpStart profile, see <OLINK TARGETPTR="PREPARECUSTOM-25766">How the System's Root Disk Is Determined</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_ROOTDISKSIZE</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The size of the disk that is represented by the logical name <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL>. The <ENVAR>SI_ROOTDISKSIZE</ENVAR> variable is set when the <LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL> or the <LITERAL>installed</LITERAL> keyword is set to <LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><ENVAR>SI_TOTALDISK</ENVAR></PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>The total amount of disk space on the install client. The <ENVAR>SI_TOTALDISK</ENVAR> variable is set when the <LITERAL>totaldisk</LITERAL> keyword is
used and matched in the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-6">
<TITLE>Probe Keywords and Values</TITLE>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-7">Table 8&ndash;10</OLINK> describes
each rule keyword and its equivalent probe keyword.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Always place probe keywords at or near the beginning of the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="JUMPSTARTREFERENCE-TBL-7">
<TITLE>Descriptions
of Probe Keywords</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN1" COLWIDTH="61*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN2" COLWIDTH="61*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLUMN3" COLWIDTH="274*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Rule Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Equivalent Probe Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description of Probe Keyword</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>any</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword, description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>any, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>any</LITERAL> </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>None </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>arch rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>CPUs (processors)</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>microprocessors</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>processors</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule
keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>arch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>arch</LITERAL>     </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>arch probe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>CPUs (processors)</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>microprocessors</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe
keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>processors</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe
keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>arch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>arch</LITERAL> 
   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Determines the kernel architecture, i386 or SPARC, and sets <ENVAR>SI_ARCH</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>disksize rule keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>disksize, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>disks probe keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>probe keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>disks</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>probe keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>disks</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns the size of a system's disks in Mbytes in kernel probe order,
c0t3d0s0, c0t3d0s1, c0t4d0s0. <LITERAL>disksize</LITERAL> sets <ENVAR>SI_DISKLIST</ENVAR>, <ENVAR>SI_DISKSIZES</ENVAR>, <ENVAR>SI_NUMDISKS</ENVAR>, and <ENVAR>SI_TOTALDISK</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>domainname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>domains</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>domainname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>domainname</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>domainname probe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>domains</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>domainname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>domainname</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns a system's NIS or NIS+ domain name or blank and sets <ENVAR>SI_DOMAINNAME</ENVAR>. The <LITERAL>domainname</LITERAL> keyword returns the output of <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="DOMAINNAME-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>domainname</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hostaddress rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>IP addresses</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostaddress</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>hostaddress</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hostaddress probe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>IP addresses</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostaddress</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>hostaddress</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns a system's IP address, the first address that is listed in the
output of <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="IFCONFIG-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>ifconfig</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> <COMMAND>-a</COMMAND> that is not lo0, and sets <ENVAR>SI_HOSTADDRESS</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hostname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>host name</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hostname probe keyword</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>host name</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hostname</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>hostname</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns a system's host name that is the output from <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="UNAME-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>uname</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> <COMMAND>-n</COMMAND> and
sets <ENVAR>SI_HOSTNAME</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>installed rule keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>release of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed
rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed, description and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>slices</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>release or version</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installed rule keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>version
of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>installed</LITERAL>      </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>installed probe keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>release of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed
probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>slices</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>release or version</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>installed
probe keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>version of Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>installed probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>installed</LITERAL>      </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns the version name of the Solaris OS that is installed on a system
and sets <ENVAR>SI_ROOTDISK</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>SI_INSTALLED</ENVAR>.</PARA>
<PARA>If the JumpStart program finds a Solaris release but is unable to determine
the version, the version that is  returned is <LITERAL>SystemV</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>karch rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>karch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>karch</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>karch probe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keywords</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>karch</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>karch</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns a system's platform group, for example i86pc or sun4u, and sets <ENVAR>SI_KARCH</ENVAR>. For a list of platform names, see <CITETITLE>Solaris Sun
Hardware Platform Guide</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="URL">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>memory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>memsize rule keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memsize</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>memory</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>memsize probe keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memsize</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>memory</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>memsize</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns the size of physical memory on a system in Mbytes and sets <ENVAR>SI_MEMSIZE</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>model rule keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system model
names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system
model names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>model</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>model</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>model probe keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>names/naming</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system model
names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>platforms</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>system
model names</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>model</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>model</LITERAL>    </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns a system's platform name and sets <ENVAR>SI_MODEL</ENVAR>. 
For a list of platform names, see the <CITETITLE>Solaris Sun Hardware Platform
Guide</CITETITLE> at <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="URL">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>network number</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>network rule keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>network</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>network</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>network number</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>network probe keyword, description and values</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>network</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>network</LITERAL>   </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns a system's network number, which the JumpStart program determines
by performing a logical AND between the system's IP address and the subnet
mask. The system's IP address and the subnet mask are extracted from the first
address that is listed in the output of <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="IFCONFIG-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>ifconfig</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> <COMMAND>-a</COMMAND> that
is not lo0. The <LITERAL>network</LITERAL> keyword sets <ENVAR>SI_NETWORK</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>osname rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>release of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL> rule
keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL></SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>release or version</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>osname
rule keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>version of Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL> rule keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL>     </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>osname probe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>release of Solaris software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL> probe
keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL></SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>release or version</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>osname
probe keyword</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>version of Solaris
software</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL> probe keyword</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>osname</LITERAL>     </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns the version and operating system name of the Solaris OS that
is found on a CD and sets <ENVAR>SI_OSNAME</ENVAR>.</PARA>
<PARA>If the JumpStart program finds a Solaris release but is unable to determine
the version, the version that is returned is <LITERAL>SystemV</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>&nbsp;</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>any</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>probe keyword, description
and values</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rootdisk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>rootdisk</LITERAL> </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns the name and size  in Mbytes of a system's root disk and sets <ENVAR>SI_ROOTDISK</ENVAR>.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>rule keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>totaldisk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>rule keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>totaldisk rule keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>totaldisk</LITERAL> 
  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>hard disks</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>size</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>probe keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>probe keywords</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>totaldisk</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>size</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>hard disk</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>probe keywords</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>totaldisk probe keyword</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><LITERAL>totaldisk</LITERAL> 
  </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Returns the total disk space on a system (in Mbytes) and sets <ENVAR>SI_TOTALDISK</ENVAR>. The total disk space includes all of the operational disks that
are attached to a system.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT1>
</CHAPTER><?Pub *0000197871 0><?Entity End jumpstartreference.sgm>
</PART>
<PART ID="EPUCZ">
<TITLE>Appendixes</TITLE>
<PARTINTRO>
<PARA>This part contains troubleshooting and reference information.</PARA>
</PARTINTRO><?Entity Ref troubleshooting><?Entity Start troubleshooting.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<APPENDIX ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-9"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="3"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="vs145730"
fullname="Lynne Thompson">
<TITLE>Troubleshooting (Tasks)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA>This chapter contains a list of specific error messages and general
problems you might encounter when installing Solaris Express 5/07 software.
The chapter also explains how to fix the problems. Start by using this list
of sections to determine where in the installation process the problem occurred.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-40341">Problems With Setting
Up Network Installations</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-32526">Problems With Booting
a System</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-15934">Initial Installation
of the Solaris OS</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-16510">Upgrading the Solaris
OS</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>When you see the phrase &ldquo;bootable media,&rdquo; this means
the Solaris installation program and JumpStart installation method.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-40341">
<TITLE>Problems With Setting Up Network
Installations</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Unknown client &ldquo;<REPLACEABLE>host_name</REPLACEABLE>&rdquo;</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The <REPLACEABLE>host_name</REPLACEABLE> argument
in the <LITERAL>add_install_client</LITERAL> command is not a host in the
naming service.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1011">
<PRIMARY>Unknown client error message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Add the host <REPLACEABLE>host_name</REPLACEABLE> to the naming service and execute the <LITERAL>add_install_client</LITERAL> command again.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Error: &lt;system name> does not exist
in the NIS ethers map</PARA>
<PARA>Add it, and rerun the add_install_client command</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>When you run the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command,
the command fails with the above error.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The client you are adding to the install server
does not exist in the server's <FILENAME>/etc/ethers</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Add the needed information to the <FILENAME>/etc/ethers</FILENAME> file on the install server and run the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command
again.</PARA>
<ORDEREDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>On the client, find the ethers address.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>ifconfig -a grep ethers</USERINPUT>
ether 8:0:20:b3:39:1d</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>On the install server, open the <FILENAME>/etc/ethers</FILENAME> file
in an editor. Add the address to the list.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>On the client, run <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> again
as in this example.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>./add_install_client bluegill sun4u</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ORDEREDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-32526">
<TITLE>Problems With Booting a System</TITLE>
<SECT2 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-7">
<TITLE>Booting From Media, Error Messages</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>le0: No carrier - transceiver cable
problem<INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1012">
<PRIMARY>le0: No carrier - transceiver
cable problem message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1013">
<PRIMARY>No carrier - transceiver cable problem message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1014">
<PRIMARY>transceiver cable problem message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1017">
<PRIMARY>boot: cannot open
/kernel/unix message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>Can't boot from
file/device message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1023">
<PRIMARY>clock gained xxx days message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1024">
<PRIMARY>WARNING: clock gained xxx days message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1025">
<PRIMARY>Not a UFS filesystem
message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM></PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The system is not connected to the network.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>If this is a nonnetworked system, ignore
this message. If this is a networked system, ensure that the Ethernet cabling
is attached securely.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The file just loaded does not appear
to be executable</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The system cannot find the proper media for
booting.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Verify that the system has been set up properly
to install the Solaris Express 5/07 software from the network from an
install server. The following are examples of checks you can make.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you copied the images of the Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software CDs
to the install server, ensure that you specified the correct platform group
for the system when you set it up. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you are using DVD or CD media, ensure that the Solaris Operating System DVD or Solaris Software - 1 CD
is mounted and accessible on the install server.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>boot: cannot open &lt;<EMPHASIS>filename</EMPHASIS>>
(<EMPHASIS>SPARC based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>This error occurs when you override the location
of the <FILENAME>boot</FILENAME> <OPTION>file</OPTION> by explicitly setting
it.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA><EMPHASIS>filename</EMPHASIS> is a variable for the name of the
file affected.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Follow these instructions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Reset the <FILENAME>boot</FILENAME> <OPTION>file</OPTION> in
the PROM to  &ldquo; &ldquo; (blank).</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Ensure that the diag-switch is set to off and to true.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Can't boot from file/device </PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The installation media cannot find the bootable
media.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ensure that the following conditions are
met:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive is installed properly and turned
on.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Operating System DVD or the Solaris Software - 1 CD is inserted into
the drive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The disc is free of damage or dirt.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>WARNING: clock gained <REPLACEABLE>xxx</REPLACEABLE> days
-- CHECK AND RESET DATE! (<EMPHASIS>SPARC based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>This is an informational message.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ignore the message and continue with the
installation.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Not a UFS file system (<EMPHASIS>x86
based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>When Solaris Express 5/07 software was installed
(either through the Solaris installation program or custom JumpStart), no
boot disk was selected. You now must edit the BIOS to boot the system.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Select the BIOS to boot. See your BIOS documentation
for instructions.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-23">
<TITLE>Booting From Media, General Problems</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The system does not boot.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>When initially setting up a custom JumpStart
server, you might encounter  boot problems that do not return an error message.
 To verify information about the system and how the system is booting, run
the boot command with the <OPTION>v</OPTION> option.  When you use the <OPTION>v</OPTION> option,
the boot command  displays verbose debugging information about the screen.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If this flag is not given, the messages are still printed, but
the output is directed to the system log file. For more information, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="SYSLOGD-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>syslogd</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>For SPARC based systems, at the <LITERAL>ok</LITERAL> prompt,
type the following command.</PARA>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>ok boot net -v - install</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Boot from DVD media fails on systems
with Toshiba SD-M 1401 DVD-ROM</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>If your system has a Toshiba SD-M1401
DVD-ROM with firmware revision 1007, the system cannot boot from the Solaris Operating System DVD.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Apply patch 111649&ndash;03, or later version,
to update the Toshiba SD-M1401 DVD-ROM drive's firmware. The patch 111649&ndash;03
is available at <ULINK URL="http://sunsolve.sun.com" TYPE="TEXT">sunsolve.sun.com</ULINK>.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The system hangs or panics when nonmemory
PC cards are inserted. (<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>Nonmemory PC cards cannot use the same memory
resources that are used by other devices.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>To correct this problem, see the instructions
for your PC card and check for the address range.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The system hangs before displaying
the system prompt. (<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>You have hardware that is not supported.
Check your hardware manufacturer's documentation.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-2">
<TITLE>Booting From the Network, Error Messages</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>WARNING: getfile: RPC failed: error
5 (RPC Timed out).</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>This error occurs when you have two or
more servers on a network responding to an install client's boot request.
The install client connects to the wrong boot server, and the installation
hangs. The following specific reasons might cause this error to occur:</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1:</EMPHASIS><FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> files might exist on different servers with an entry for this
install client.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1:</EMPHASIS> Ensure that
servers on the network do not have multiple <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> entries
for the install client. If they do have multiple entries, remove duplicate
client entries in the <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> file on all install
servers and boot servers except the one you want the install client to use.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2:</EMPHASIS> Multiple <FILENAME>/tftpboot</FILENAME> or <FILENAME>/rplboot</FILENAME> directory entries might exist
for this install client.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2:</EMPHASIS> Ensure that
servers on the network do not have multiple <LITERAL>/tftpboot</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>/rplboot</LITERAL> directory entries for the install client. If they do have
multiple entries, remove duplicate client entries from the <LITERAL>/tftpboot</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>/rplboot</LITERAL> directories on all install servers and boot servers except
the one you want the install client to use.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 3:</EMPHASIS> An install client
entry might exist in the <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file on a server
and an entry in another <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file that enables
all systems to access the profile server. Such an entry resembles the following:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING><LITERAL>* install_config=</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>profile_server</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL>:</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>A line that resembles the previous entry in the NIS or NIS+ <LITERAL>bootparams</LITERAL> table can also cause this error.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 3:</EMPHASIS> If a wildcard
entry is in the naming service <LITERAL>bootparams</LITERAL> map or table
(for example, <LITERAL>* install_config=</LITERAL>), delete it and add it
to the <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> file on the boot server. </PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>No network boot server. Unable to install
the system.  See installation instructions. (<EMPHASIS>SPARC based systems
only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>This error occurs on a system that you are attempting
to install from the network. The system is not set up correctly.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ensure that you correctly set up the system
to install from the network. See <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="NETINSTALL-40778"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a CD Image</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>prom_panic: Could not mount file system
(<EMPHASIS>SPARC based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>This error occurs when you are installing Solaris
from a network, but the boot software cannot locate the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Operating System DVD, either the DVD or a copy of the DVD image on
the install server</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Software - 1 CD image, either the Solaris Software - 1 CD
or a copy of the CD image on the install server</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ensure that the installation software is
mounted and shared. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If you are installing Solaris from the install server's DVD-ROM
or CD-ROM drive, ensure that the Solaris Operating System DVD or Solaris Software - 1 CD is
inserted in the CD-ROM drive, is mounted, and is shared in the <LITERAL>/etc/dfs/dfstab</LITERAL> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If installing from a copy of the Solaris Operating System DVD image or Solaris Software - 1 CD
image on the install server's disk, ensure that the directory path to the
copy is shared.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>Use
either the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility or the <COMPUTEROUTPUT>share</COMPUTEROUTPUT> command
as follows:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Using the <COMMAND>share</COMMAND> command, edit the <FILENAME>/etc/dfs/dfstab</FILENAME> file by adding the following entry.</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 <REPLACEABLE>cdrom/xxx</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA>Then, type <COMMAND>shareall</COMMAND> and press Enter.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Using the <COMMAND>sharemgr</COMMAND> utility, enter the following commands:</PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr
add-share</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/cdrom/xxx</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr set</USERINPUT> <OPTION>P</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>nfs</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>S</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>sys</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>p</OPTION> <USERINPUT>ro="*"</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/cdrom/xxx</USERINPUT></PARA>
<PARA><LITERAL>#</LITERAL> <USERINPUT>sharemgr set</USERINPUT> <OPTION>P</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>nfs</REPLACEABLE> <OPTION>p</OPTION> <USERINPUT>anon=0</USERINPUT> <OPTION>s</OPTION> <USERINPUT>/cdrom/xxx</USERINPUT></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Timeout waiting for ARP/RARP packet...(<EMPHASIS>SPARC based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1:</EMPHASIS> The client is
trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a system that knows about
the client.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1:</EMPHASIS> Verify the
system's host name is in the NIS or NIS+ naming service. Also, verify the <LITERAL>bootparams</LITERAL> search order in the boot server's <LITERAL>/etc/nsswitch.conf</LITERAL> file. </PARA>
<PARA>For example, the following line in the <LITERAL>/etc/nsswitch.conf</LITERAL> file indicates that JumpStart or the Solaris installation program
first looks in the NIS maps for <LITERAL>bootparams</LITERAL> information.
If the program does not find any information, the installer looks in the boot
server's <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> file.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>bootparams: nis files</PROGRAMLISTING>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2:</EMPHASIS> The client's
Ethernet address is not correct.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2:</EMPHASIS> Verify that
the client's Ethernet address in the install server's <FILENAME>/etc/ethers</FILENAME> file
is correct.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 3:</EMPHASIS> In a custom JumpStart
installation, the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> command specifies
the platform group that uses a specified server as an install server. If the
wrong architecture value is used when using the <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND>,
this problem occurs. For example, the machine you want to install is a sun4u,
but you used i86pc instead.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 3:</EMPHASIS> Rerun <COMMAND>add_install_client</COMMAND> with the correct architecture value.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>ip: joining multicasts failed on tr0
- will use link layer broadcasts for multicast (<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems
only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1043">
<PRIMARY>token
ring card, booting error with</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>This error message is displayed
when you boot a system with a token ring card. Ethernet multicast and token
ring multicast do not work the same way. The driver returns this error message
because an invalid multicast address was provided to it. </PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ignore this error message. If multicast does
not work, IP uses layer broadcasts instead and does not cause the installation
to fail.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Requesting Internet address for <REPLACEABLE>Ethernet_Address</REPLACEABLE> (<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The client is trying to boot from the network,
but it cannot find a system that knows about the client. </PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Verify the system's host name is listed in
the naming service. If the system's host name is listed in the NIS or NIS+
naming service, and the system continues to print this error message, try
rebooting.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>RPC: Timed out No bootparams (whoami)
server responding; still trying... (<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The client is trying to boot from the network,
but it cannot find a system with an entry in the <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> file
on the install server.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1048">
<PRIMARY>RPC Timed out message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1049">
<PRIMARY>timed out RPC error</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Use <LITERAL>add_install_client</LITERAL> on the install server. Using this command adds
the proper entry in the <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> file, enabling
the client to boot from the network.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Still trying to find a RPL server...
(<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The system is trying to boot from the network,
but the server is not set up to boot this system.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>On the install server, execute <LITERAL>add_install_client</LITERAL> for the system to be installed. The <LITERAL>add_install_client</LITERAL> command
sets up an <LITERAL>/rplboot</LITERAL> directory, which contains the necessary
network boot program.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>troubleshooting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>booting from network with DHCP</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>troubleshooting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>general installation problems</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>booting from the network with DHCP</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>CLIENT MAC ADDR error message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>CLIENT MAC ADDR:
FF FF FF FF FF FF (<EMPHASIS>network installations with DHCP only</EMPHASIS>) </PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The DHCP server is not configured correctly.
This error might occur if the options or macros are not correctly defined
in the DHCP Manager software.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>In the DHCP Manager software, verify that
the options and macros are correctly defined. Confirm that the Router option
is defined, and that the value of the Router option is correct for the subnet
you are using for the network installation.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-24">
<TITLE>Booting From the Network, General Problems</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1051">
<PRIMARY>troubleshooting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>booting from wrong server</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1052">
<PRIMARY>troubleshooting</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>general installation problems</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>booting the
system</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM>The system boots from the network, but from a
system other than the specified install server.  </PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>An <FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> and
perhaps an <FILENAME>/etc/ethers</FILENAME> entry exist on another system
for the client.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1053">
<PRIMARY>bootparams file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>updating</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY SORTAS="etc/bootparams file"><FILENAME>/etc/bootparams</FILENAME> file</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>enabling JumpStart directory access</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>On the
name server, update the <LITERAL>/etc/bootparams</LITERAL> entry for the system
that is being installed. The entry should conform to the following syntax:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING><REPLACEABLE>install_system</REPLACEABLE> root=<REPLACEABLE>boot_server</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE> install=<REPLACEABLE>install_server</REPLACEABLE>:<REPLACEABLE>path</REPLACEABLE></PROGRAMLISTING>
<PARA>Also, ensure that only one <LITERAL>bootparams</LITERAL> entry is on
the subnet for the install client. </PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The system does not boot from the network
(<EMPHASIS>network installations with DHCP only</EMPHASIS>).</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The DHCP server is not configured correctly.
This error might occur if the system is not configured as an installation
client on the DHCP server.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>In the DHCP manager software, verify that
installation options and macros are defined for the client system. For more
information, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLNET" TARGETPTR="DHCP-ADMIN-38"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Preconfiguring System Configuration Information With the DHCP Service (Tasks)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-15934">
<TITLE>Initial Installation of the Solaris
OS</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Initial installation fails</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>If the Solaris installation fails, you must
restart the installation. To restart the installation, boot the system from
the Solaris Operating System DVD, the Solaris Software - 1 CD, or from  the network.</PARA>
<PARA>You cannot uninstall the Solaris software after the software has been
partially installed. You must restore your system from a backup or begin the
Solaris installation process again.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>/media/cdrom/SUNW<REPLACEABLE>xxxx</REPLACEABLE>/reloc.cpio: Broken pipe</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>This error message is informational and
does not affect the installation. The condition occurs when a write on a pipe
does not have a reading process. </PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ignore the message and continue with the
installation.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>WARNING: CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT DEVICE <EMPHASIS>(x86 based systems only)</EMPHASIS></PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>This is an informational message. The default
boot device set in the system's BIOS might be set to a device that requires
you to use the Solaris Device Configuration Assistant to boot the system.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT DEVICE
message</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>WARNING: CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT
DEVICE</PRIMARY>
</INDEXTERM>Continue with the installation and, if necessary,
change the system's default boot device specified in the BIOS after you install
the Solaris software to a device that does not require the Solaris Device Configuration Assistant.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<NOTE ARCH="X86">
<PARA>If you are using the <LITERAL>locale</LITERAL> keyword
to test a custom JumpStart profile for an initial installation, the <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> <OPTION>D</OPTION> command fails to test the profile. For a workaround,
see the error message &ldquo;could not select locale,&rdquo; in the section, <OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-16510">Upgrading the Solaris OS</OLINK>.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<TASK ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-3" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>To Check IDE Disk for Bad Blocks</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>IDE disk drives do not automatically map out bad blocks like other drives
supported by Solaris software. Before installing Solaris on an IDE disk, you
might want to perform a surface analysis on the disk. To perform surface analysis
on an IDE disk, follow this procedure.     </PARA>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP>
<PARA>Boot to the installation media.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>When you are prompted to select an installation type, select option
6, Single user shell.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-5">
<PARA>Start the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="FORMAT-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>format</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> program.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>format</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-6">
<PARA>Specify the IDE disk drive on which
you want to perform a surface analysis.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>c<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE>d<REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE></USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>c<REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Is the controller number</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM>d<REPLACEABLE>y</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Is the device number</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-7">
<PARA>Determine if you have an <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition already exists,
proceed to <OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-8">Step&nbsp;7</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition does not exist,
use the <COMMAND>fdisk</COMMAND> command to create a Solaris partition on
the disk. </PARA>
<SCREEN>format> <USERINPUT>fdisk</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-8">
<PARA>To begin the surface analysis, type:</PARA>
<SCREEN>format> <USERINPUT>analyze</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-9">
<PARA>Determine the current settings, type: </PARA>
<SCREEN>analyze> <USERINPUT>config</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>(Optional) To change settings, type:</PARA>
<SCREEN>analyze> <USERINPUT>setup</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-10">
<PARA>To find bad blocks, type: </PARA>
<SCREEN>analyze> <REPLACEABLE>type_of_surface_analysis</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>type_of_surface_analysis</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Is read, write, or compare</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<PARA>If <LITERAL>format</LITERAL> finds bad blocks, it remaps them.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-11">
<PARA>To exit the analysis, type:</PARA>
<SCREEN>analyze> <USERINPUT>quit</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-12">
<PARA>Determine if you want to specify
blocks to remap.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no, go to <OLINK TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-13">Step&nbsp;13</OLINK>. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If yes, type:</PARA>
<SCREEN>format> <USERINPUT>repair</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-13">
<PARA>To exit the format program, type:</PARA>
<SCREEN><USERINPUT>quit</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Restart the media in multiuser mode by typing the following command.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>exit</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-16510">
<TITLE>Upgrading the Solaris OS</TITLE>
<SECT2 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-15">
<TITLE>Upgrading, Error Messages</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>No upgradable disks</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>A swap entry in the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file
is causing the upgrade to fail.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Comment out the following lines in the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>All swap files and slices on disks not being upgraded</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Swap files that are no longer present</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Any unused swap slices</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>usr/bin/bzcat not found</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>Solaris Live Upgrade fails because of needing
a patch cluster.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>A patch is needed to install Solaris Live
Upgrade. Ensure that you have the most recently updated patch list by consulting <ULINK URL="http://sunsolve.sun.com" TYPE="TEXT">http://sunsolve.sun.com</ULINK>.
Search for the info doc 72099 on the SunSolve web site.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Upgradeable Solaris root devices were
found, however, no suitable partitions to hold the Solaris install software
were found. Upgrading using the Solaris Installer is not possible. It might
be possible to upgrade using the Solaris Software 1 CDROM. (x86 based systems
only)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>You cannot upgrade with the Solaris Software - 1 CD
because you do not have enough space.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>To upgrade, you can either create a swap
slice that is larger than or equal to 512 Mbytes or use another method of
upgrading such as the Solaris installation program   from Solaris Operating System DVD, a net installation image,
or JumpStart.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>ERROR: Could not select locale (<EMPHASIS>x86 based systems only</EMPHASIS>)</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>When you test your JumpStart profile by using
the <COMMAND>pfinstall</COMMAND> <OPTION>D</OPTION> command, the dry run test
fails under the following conditions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The profile contains the locale keyword.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>You're testing a release that contains GRUB   software. <EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">Starting with the Solaris 10 1/06 release</EMPHASIS>, the GRUB
boot loader facilitates booting different operating systems installed on your
system with the GRUB menu. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>With the introduction of GRUB software, the miniroot is compressed.
The software can no longer find the list of locales from the compressed miniroot.
The miniroot is the smallest possible Solaris root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system and is found on the Solaris installation media.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Perform the following steps. Use the following
values.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>MEDIA_DIR</LITERAL> is <FILENAME>/media/cdrom</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>MINIROOT_DIR</LITERAL> is <LITERAL>$MEDIA_DIR</LITERAL><FILENAME>/Solaris_10/Tools/Boot</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>MINIROOT_ARCHIVE</LITERAL> is <LITERAL>$MEDIA_DIR</LITERAL><FILENAME>/boot/x86.miniroot</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><LITERAL>TEMP_FILE_NAME</LITERAL> is <FILENAME>/tmp/test</FILENAME></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<ORDEREDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles
contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information about
roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Uncompress the miniroot archive.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>/usr/bin/gzcat $MINIROOT_ARCHIVE > $TEMP_FILE_NAME</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Create the miniroot device by using the <COMMAND>lofiadm</COMMAND> command.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>LOFI_DEVICE=/usr/sbin/lofiadm -a $TEMP_FILE_NAME</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>echo $LOFI_DEVICE</USERINPUT>
/dev/lofi/1</SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Mount the miniroot with the <COMMAND>lofi</COMMAND> command
under the Miniroot directory.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>/usr/sbin/mount -F ufs  $LOFI_DEVICE  $MINIROOT_DIR</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Test the profile.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>/usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -D -c $MEDIA_DIR $path-to-jumpstart_profile</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>After the testing is completed, unmount the lofi device.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>umount  $LOFI_DEVICE</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Delete the <LITERAL>lofi</LITERAL> device.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>lofiadm -d $TEMP_FILE_NAME</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ORDEREDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-4">
<TITLE>Upgrading, General Problems</TITLE>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The upgrade option is not presented
even though there is a version of Solaris software that's  upgradable on the
system.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1:</EMPHASIS> The <LITERAL>/var/sadm</LITERAL> directory is a symlink or it is mounted from another file system.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1:</EMPHASIS> Move the <LITERAL>/var/sadm</LITERAL> directory into the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) or <FILENAME>/var</FILENAME> file system.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2:</EMPHASIS> The <LITERAL>/var/sadm/softinfo/INST_RELEASE</LITERAL> file is missing.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2:</EMPHASIS> Create a new <LITERAL>INST_RELEASE</LITERAL> file by using the following template:</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>OS=Solaris
<LITERAL>VERSION=</LITERAL><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE><LITERAL></LITERAL> 
REV=0</PROGRAMLISTING>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>x</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Is the version of Solaris software on the system</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 3:</EMPHASIS> SUNWusr is missing
from <FILENAME>/var/sadm/softinfo</FILENAME>.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Solution 3:</EMPHASIS> You need
to do an initial installation. The Solaris software is not upgradable.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Couldn't shut down or initialize the
md driver</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Follow these instructions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the file system is not a RAID-1 volume, comment out in
the <FILENAME>vsftab</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the file system is a RAID-1 volume, break the mirror and
reinstall. For information about unmirroring, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="LOGVOLMGRADMIN" TARGETPTR="TASKS-MIRRORS-26"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Removing RAID-1 Volumes (Unmirroring)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The upgrade fails because the Solaris
installation program cannot mount a file system.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1070">
<PRIMARY>failed
upgrade</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>rebooting problems</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-IX1071">
<PRIMARY>upgrade</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>failed upgrade</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>During an upgrade, the script attempts to mount all the file systems
that are listed in the system's <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file on the
root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system that is being upgraded. If the installation
script cannot mount a file system, it fails and exits.  </PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Ensure that all file systems in the system's <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file can be mounted. Comment out any file systems in
the <FILENAME>/etc/vfstab</FILENAME> file that cannot be mounted or that might
cause the problem so that the Solaris installation program does not try to
mount them during the upgrade. Any system-based file systems that contain
software to be upgraded (for example, <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME>) cannot be
commented out.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The upgrade fails</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>The system does not have enough space
for the upgrade.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>Check <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLPBIU" TARGETPTR="ESIMX"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Upgrading With Disk Space Reallocation</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide: Planning for Installation and Upgrade</CITETITLE></OLINK> for the space problem
and see if you can fix it without using auto-layout to reallocate space.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Problems upgrading RAID&ndash;1 volume
root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file systems</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>If you have problems upgrading when using
Solaris Volume Manager RAID-1 volumes that are the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="LOGVOLMGRADMIN" TARGETPTR="TROUBLESHOOTTASKS-33506">Chapter 27, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Troubleshooting Solaris Volume Manager (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-47">
<TITLE>To Continue Upgrading After a Failed
Upgrade</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>The upgrade fails and the system cannot be soft-booted. The failure
is for reasons beyond your control, such as a power failure or a network connection
failure.  </PARA>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-51">
<PARA>Reboot the system from the Solaris Operating System DVD,
the Solaris Software - 1 CD, or from the network.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-18">
<PARA>Choose the upgrade option for installation.</PARA>
<PARA>The Solaris installation program determines if the system has
been partially upgraded and continues the upgrade.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="GBDWZ" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Problems With Solaris Live Upgrade When
You Use GRUB</TITLE>
<PARA>The following errors can occur when you use Solaris Live Upgrade and
the GRUB boot loader on an x86 based system.</PARA>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>ERROR: The media product tools installation
directory <REPLACEABLE>path-to-installation-directory</REPLACEABLE> does not
exist.</PARA>
<PARA>ERROR: The media <REPLACEABLE>dirctory</REPLACEABLE> does not contain
an operating system upgrade image.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ARCH="X86" ROLE="DESCRIPTION">
<PARA>The error messages are seen
when using the <COMMAND>luupgrade</COMMAND> command to upgrade a new boot
environment.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>An older version of Solaris Live Upgrade is
being used. The Solaris Live Upgrade packages you have installed on your system
are incompatible with the media and the release on that media.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Always use the Solaris Live Upgrade packages
from the release you are upgrading to.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="EXAMPLE">
<PARA>In the following example, the error message
indicates that the Solaris Live Upgrade packages on the system are not the
same version as on the media.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>luupgrade -u -n s10u1 -s /mnt</USERINPUT>
	Validating the contents of the media &lt;/mnt>.
	The media is a standard Solaris media.
	ERROR: The media product tools installation directory 
&lt;/mnt/Solaris_10/Tools/Boot/usr/sbin/install.d/install_config> does 
not exist.
	ERROR: The media &lt;/mnt> does not contain an operating system upgrade 
image.</SCREEN>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>ERROR: Cannot find or is not executable:
&lt;/sbin/biosdev>.</PARA>
<PARA>ERROR: One or more patches required by Solaris Live Upgrade has not
been installed.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>One or more patches required by Solaris Live
Upgrade are not installed on your system. 	Beware that this error message
does not catch all missing patches.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Before using Solaris Live Upgrade, always
install all the required patches. Ensure that you have the most recently updated
patch list by consulting <ULINK URL="http://sunsolve.sun.com" TYPE="TEXT">http://sunsolve.sun.com</ULINK>. Search for the info doc 72099 on the SunSolve web site.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>ERROR: Device mapping command &lt;/sbin/biosdev>
failed. Please reboot and try again.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1</EMPHASIS>: Solaris Live
Upgrade is unable to map devices because of previous 	administrative tasks.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 1</EMPHASIS>: Reboot the
system and try Solaris Live Upgrade again</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2</EMPHASIS>: If you reboot
your system and get the same error message, you have two or more identical
disks. The device mapping 	command is unable to distinguish between them.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA><EMPHASIS>Reason 2</EMPHASIS>: Create a new
dummy <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition on one 	of the disks. See the <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="FDISK-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>fdisk</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> man page. Then reboot the
system.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>Cannot delete the boot environment
that contains the GRUB menu</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>Solaris Live Upgrade imposes the restriction
that a boot environment cannot be deleted if the boot environment contains
the GRUB menu.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Use <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="LUMAKE-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>lumake</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> or <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="LUUPGRADE-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>luupgrade</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> commands to reuse that boot
environment.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The file system containing the GRUB
menu was accidentally remade. However, the disk has the same slices as before.
For example, the disk was not re-sliced.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="CAUSE">
<PARA>The file system that contains the GRUB menu
is critical to keeping the system bootable. Solaris Live Upgrade commands
do not destroy the GRUB menu. But, if you accidentally remake or otherwise
destroy the file system containing the GRUB menu with a command other than
a Solaris Live Upgrade command, the recovery software attempts to reinstall
the GRUB menu. The recovery software puts the GRUB menu back in the same file
system at the next reboot. For example, you might have used the <COMMAND>newfs</COMMAND> or <COMMAND>mkfs</COMMAND> commands on the file system and accidentally destroyed the
GRUB menu. To restore the GRUB menu correctly, the slice must adhere to the
following conditions:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Contain a mountable file system</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Remain a part of the same Solaris Live Upgrade boot environment
where the slice resided previously</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>Before rebooting the system, make any necessary corrective actions on
the slice.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Reboot the system. A backup copy of the GRUB
menu is automatically installed.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
<MSGSET>
<SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
<MSGTEXT>
<PARA>The GRUB menu's <FILENAME>menu.lst</FILENAME> file
was accidentally deleted.</PARA>
</MSGTEXT>
<MSGEXPLAN ROLE="SOLUTION">
<PARA>Reboot the system. A backup copy of the GRUB
menu is automatically installed.</PARA>
</MSGEXPLAN>
</SIMPLEMSGENTRY>
</MSGSET>
</SECT2>
<TASK ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-48">
<TITLE>System Panics When Upgrading With Solaris
Live Upgrade Running Veritas VxVm</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>When you use Solaris Live Upgrade while upgrading and running Veritas
VxVM, the system panics on reboot unless you upgrade by using the following
procedure. The problem occurs if packages do not conform to Solaris advanced
packaging guidelines.</PARA>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure><?Entity Ref suStepA><?Entity Start suStepA.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part()part(title()partintro()chapter()chapter(title()highlights()sect1()sect1(title()para()task()task(title()procedure(step()>
<STEP><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2" restricted="off"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<PARA>Become superuser or assume
an equivalent role.</PARA>
<PARA>Roles contain authorizations and privileged
commands. For more information about roles, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV6" TARGETPTR="RBACTASK-15"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Configuring RBAC (Task Map)</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Security Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP><?Pub *0000000963 0><?Entity End suStepA.sgm>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-52">
<PARA>Create an inactive boot environment.
See <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="CHAPTER-33"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Creating a New Boot Environment</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-26">
<PARA>Before upgrading the inactive boot
environment, you must disable the existing Veritas software on the inactive
boot environment.</PARA>
<SUBSTEPS>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-53">
<PARA>Mount the inactive boot environment. </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>lumount</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>inactive_boot_environment_name</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>mount_point</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<PARA>For example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>lumount solaris8 /mnt</USERINPUT> </SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-31">
<PARA>Change to the directory that contains
the <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME>, for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd /mnt/etc</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-28">
<PARA>Make a copy of the inactive boot
environment's <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME> file, for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp vfstab vfstab.501</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-30">
<PARA>In the copied <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME>,
comment out all Veritas file system entries, for example: </PARA>
<SCREEN>#  <USERINPUT>sed  '/vx\/dsk/s/^/#/g'  &lt; vfstab >  vfstab.novxfs</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>The first character of each line is changed to #, which makes the line
a comment line. Note that this comment line is different than the system file-comment
lines.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-32">
<PARA>Copy the changed <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME> file,
for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp vfstab.novxfs vfstab</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-34">
<PARA>Change directories to the inactive
boot environment's system file, for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd /mnt/etc</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-33">
<PARA>Make a copy of the inactive boot
environment's system file, for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp system system.501</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-35">
<PARA>Comment out all &ldquo;forceload:&rdquo;
entries that include <FILENAME>drv/vx</FILENAME>.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>sed '/forceload:   drv\/vx/s/^/*/' &lt;system> system.novxfs</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>The first character of each line is changed to *, which makes the line
a command line. Note that this comment line is different than the <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME> file comment lines.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-37">
<PARA>Create the Veritas <FILENAME>install-db</FILENAME> file,
for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>touch vx/reconfig.d/state.d/install-db</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-60">
<PARA>Unmount the inactive boot environment.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>luumount</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>inactive_boot_environment_name</REPLACEABLE> </SCREEN>
</STEP>
</SUBSTEPS>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-38">
<PARA>Upgrade the inactive boot environment.
See <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="LIVEUPGRADE-1">Chapter 5, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade (Tasks),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-39">
<PARA>Activate the inactive boot environment.
See <OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="LUUPGRADE-84"><CITETITLE REMAP="section">Activating a Boot Environment</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-40">
<PARA>Shut down the system.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>init 0</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-41">
<PARA>Boot the inactive boot environment
in single-user mode:</PARA>
<SCREEN>OK <USERINPUT>boot -s</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>Several messages and error messages that contain &ldquo;vxvm&rdquo;
or &ldquo;VXVM&rdquo; are displayed that can be ignored. The inactive boot
environment becomes active.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-54">
<PARA>Upgrade Veritas.</PARA>
<SUBSTEPS>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-55">
<PARA>Remove the Veritas VRTSvmsa package
from the system, for example:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgrm VRTSvmsa</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-44">
<PARA>Change directories to the Veritas
packages.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cd /</USERINPUT><REPLACEABLE>location_of_Veritas_software</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-43">
<PARA>Add the latest Veritas packages to
the system:</PARA>
<SCREEN>#  <USERINPUT>pkgadd -d `pwd` VRTSvxvm VRTSvmsa VRTSvmdoc VRTSvmman VRTSvmdev</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
</SUBSTEPS>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-45">
<PARA>Restore the original <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME> and
system files:</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>cp /etc/vfstab.original /etc/vfstab</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>cp /etc/system.original /etc/system</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP>
<STEP ID="TROUBLESHOOTING-STEP-46">
<PARA>Reboot the system.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>init 6</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<SECT2 ID="ESXHI" ARCH="X86">
<TITLE>Service Partition  Not Created by Default
on Systems With No Existing Service Partition</TITLE>
<PARA>If you install the Solaris Express 5/07 OS on a system that does
not  currently include a service or diagnostic partition, the installation
program might not  create a service partition by default. If you want to include
a  service partition on the  same disk as the Solaris partition, you must
re-create the service partition before  you install the Solaris Express 5/07 OS.</PARA>
<PARA>If you installed the Solaris 8 2/02 OS on a  system with a service partition,
the installation program might not have preserved the  service partition.
If you did not manually edit the <FILENAME>fdisk</FILENAME> boot  partition
layout to preserve the service partition, the installation program deleted
the  service partition during the installation. </PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>If you did not specifically preserve the service partition  when
you installed the Solaris 8 2/02 OS, you might not be able to  re-create the
 service partition and upgrade to the Solaris Express 5/07 OS.</PARA>
</NOTE>
<PARA>If you want to include a service partition on the disk that  contains
the Solaris partition, choose one of the following workarounds.</PARA>
</SECT2>
<TASK>
<TITLE>To Install Software From a Network Installation Image or From
the  Solaris Operating System DVD</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>To install the software from a net installation image or from the  Solaris Operating System DVD over
the network, follow these steps.</PARA>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP>
<PARA>Delete the contents of the disk.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Before you install, create the service partition by  using the
diagnostics CD for your system.</PARA>
<PARA>For information about how to create
the  service partition, see your hardware documentation.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Boot the system from the network.</PARA>
<PARA>The  Customize <FILENAME>fdisk</FILENAME> Partitions screen is displayed.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>To load the default boot disk partition layout, click  Default.</PARA>
<PARA>The installation program preserves the service partition and  creates
the Solaris  partition.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
<TASK>
<TITLE>To Install From the Solaris Software - 1 CD or From a Network
 Installation Image</TITLE>
<TASKSUMMARY>
<PARA>To use the Solaris installation program to install from the Solaris Software - 1 CD
or from a network  installation image on a boot server, follow these steps.</PARA>
</TASKSUMMARY><procedure>
<STEP>
<PARA>Delete the contents of the disk.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Before you install, create the service partition by  using the
diagnostics CD for your system.</PARA>
<PARA>For information about how to create
the  service partition, see your hardware documentation.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>The installation program  prompts you to choose a method for creating
the Solaris partition.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Boot the system.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Select the <LITERAL>Use rest of disk for Solaris  partition</LITERAL> option.</PARA>
<PARA>The installation program preserves the service partition  and
creates the Solaris partition.</PARA>
</STEP>
<STEP>
<PARA>Complete the  installation.</PARA>
</STEP></procedure>
</TASK>
</SECT1>
</APPENDIX><?Pub *0000058163 0><?Entity End troubleshooting.sgm><?Entity Ref package><?Entity Start package.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(book(title()bookinfo()part(3)part(title()partintro()appendix()>
<APPENDIX ID="PACKAGE-9"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2"
restricted="off"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="lynnet" fullname="Steve Cogorno"><?Pub Tag
atict:user user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin">
<TITLE>Additional
SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference)</TITLE>
<HIGHLIGHTS>
<PARA><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>packages</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>Solaris Live Upgrade</SECONDARY>
<TERTIARY>requirements</TERTIARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>packages</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>requirements when using custom JumpStart</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM><INDEXTERM>
<PRIMARY>root (/) file systems</PRIMARY>
<SECONDARY>package requirements for an inactive boot environment</SECONDARY>
</INDEXTERM>This appendix is for system administrators who install or remove
packages, especially third-party packages. Following these packaging requirements
enables the following:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Avoids modifying the currently running system so you can upgrade
with Solaris Live Upgrade and create and maintain non-global zones and diskless
clients</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Prevents a package from being interactive to automate installations
when using installation programs such as custom JumpStart</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>This chapter contains the following sections:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PACKAGE-12">Preventing Modification of the
Current OS</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PACKAGE-90">Preventing User Interaction
When Installing or Upgrading</OLINK>.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="GCBHP">Setting Package Parameters For Zones</OLINK></PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</HIGHLIGHTS>
<SECT1 ID="PACKAGE-12">
<TITLE>Preventing Modification of the Current OS</TITLE>
<PARA>Following the requirements in this section keeps the currently running
OS unaltered.</PARA>
<SECT2>
<TITLE>Using Absolute Paths</TITLE>
<PARA>For an installation of an operating system to be successful, packages
must recognize and correctly respect alternate root (/) file systems, such
as a Solaris Live Upgrade inactive boot environment. </PARA>
<PARA>Packages can include absolute paths in their <FILENAME>pkgmap</FILENAME> file
(package map). If these files exist, they are written relative to the <OPTION>R</OPTION> option
of the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command. Packages that contain both absolute
and relative (relocatable) paths can be installed to an alternative root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system as well. <ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> is prepended
to both absolute and relocatable files so all paths are resolved properly
when being installed by <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND>.</PARA>
</SECT2>
<SECT2>
<TITLE>Using the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> <OPTION>R</OPTION> Command</TITLE>
<PARA>Packages being installed by using the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> <OPTION>R</OPTION> option
or being removed using the <COMMAND>pkgrm</COMMAND> <OPTION>R</OPTION> option
must not alter the currently running system. This feature is used by custom
JumpStart, Solaris Live Upgrade, non-global zones and diskless client.</PARA>
<PARA>Any procedure scripts that are included in the packages being installed
with the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command <OPTION>R</OPTION> option or being
removed by using the <COMMAND>pkgrm</COMMAND> command <OPTION>R</OPTION> option
must not alter the currently running system. Any installation scripts that
you provide must reference any directory or file that is prefixed with the <ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> variable. The package must write all directories
and files with the <ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> prefix. The package must
not remove directories without a <ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> prefix. </PARA>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETPTR="PACKAGE-TBL-11">Table B&ndash;1</OLINK> provides examples
of script syntax.</PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="1" ID="PACKAGE-TBL-11">
<TITLE>Examples of Installation
Script Syntax</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="26.95*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="61.53*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC2" COLWIDTH="61.53*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Script Type</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Correct Syntax</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Incorrect Syntax</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Bourne shell &ldquo;if&rdquo; statement fragments</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PROGRAMLISTING>if [ -f ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\
/etc/myproduct.conf ] ; then</PROGRAMLISTING>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PROGRAMLISTING>if [ -f /etc/myproduct.conf ] ; \
 then</PROGRAMLISTING>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Removing a file</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PROGRAMLISTING>/bin/rm -f ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\
/etc/myproduct.conf</PROGRAMLISTING>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PROGRAMLISTING>/bin/rm -f /etc/myproduct.conf </PROGRAMLISTING>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Changing a file</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PROGRAMLISTING>echo "test=no" > ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\
/etc/myproduct.conf</PROGRAMLISTING>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PROGRAMLISTING>echo "test=no" > \
/etc/myproduct.conf</PROGRAMLISTING>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2 ID="PACKAGE-2">
<TITLE>Differences Between <ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> and <ENVAR>$BASEDIR</ENVAR> Overview</TITLE>
<PARA><ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> is the location of the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system of the machine to which you are adding the package. The location
is set to the <OPTION>R</OPTION> argument of the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command.
For example, if the following command is invoked, then <ENVAR>$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT</ENVAR> becomes <FILENAME>/a</FILENAME> during the installation of the package.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgadd -R /a SUNWvxvm</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA><ENVAR>$BASEDIR</ENVAR> points to the <EMPHASIS>relocatable</EMPHASIS> base
directory into which relocatable package objects are installed. Only relocatable
objects are installed here. Nonrelocatable objects (those that have <EMPHASIS>absolute</EMPHASIS> paths in the <FILENAME>pkgmap</FILENAME> file) are always installed
relative to the inactive boot environment,  but not relative to the <ENVAR>$BASEDIR</ENVAR> in effect. If a package has no relocatable objects, then the package
is said to be an absolute package (or nonrelocatable), and <ENVAR>$BASEDIR</ENVAR> is
undefined and not available to package procedure scripts.</PARA>
<PARA>For example, suppose a package's <FILENAME>pkgmap</FILENAME> file has
two entries:</PARA>
<SCREEN>1 f none sbin/ls 0555 root sys 3541 12322 1002918510
1 f none /sbin/ls2 0555 root sys 3541 12322 2342423332</SCREEN>
<PARA>The <FILENAME>pkginfo</FILENAME> file has a specification for <ENVAR>$BASEDIR</ENVAR>:</PARA>
<SCREEN>BASEDIR=/opt</SCREEN>
<PARA>If this package is installed with the following command, then <FILENAME>ls</FILENAME> is
installed in <FILENAME>/a/opt/sbin/ls</FILENAME>, but <FILENAME>ls2</FILENAME> is
installed as <FILENAME>/a/sbin/ls2</FILENAME>.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgadd -R /a SUNWtest</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</SECT2>
<SECT2>
<TITLE>Guidelines for Writing Scripts</TITLE>
<PARA>Your package procedure scripts must be independent of the currently
running OS to prevent modifying the OS. Procedure scripts define actions that
occur at particular points during package installation and removal. Four procedure
scripts can be created with these predefined names: <LITERAL>preinstall</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>postinstall</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>preremove</LITERAL>, and <LITERAL>postremove</LITERAL>. </PARA>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" PGWIDE="100" ID="EYAVZ">
<TITLE>Guidelines For Creating
Scripts</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="3" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="56.17*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="7.97*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="7.86*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Guidelines</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Affects Solaris Live Upgrade</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Affects non-global zones</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Scripts must be written in Bourne shell (<FILENAME>/bin/sh</FILENAME>).
Bourne shell is the interpreter that is used by the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command
to execute the procedure scripts. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Scripts must not start or stop any processes or depend on the output
of commands such as <COMMAND>ps</COMMAND> or <COMMAND>truss</COMMAND>, which
are operating system dependent and report information about the currently
running system. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Scripts are free to use other standard UNIX commands such as <COMMAND>expr</COMMAND>, <COMMAND>cp</COMMAND>, and <COMMAND>ls</COMMAND>  and other commands that facilitate
shell scripting. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Any commands that a script invokes must be available in all supported
releases, since a package must run on all of those releases. Therefore, you
cannot use commands that were added or removed after the Solaris 8 release. </PARA>
<PARA>To verify that a specific command or option is supported in a Solaris
8, 9, or 10 release, see the specific version of <CITETITLE>Solaris Reference
Manual AnswerBook</CITETITLE> on <ULINK URL="http://docs.sun.com" TYPE="TEXT">http://docs.sun.com</ULINK>. </PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>X</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
</SECT2>
<SECT2>
<TITLE>Maintaining Diskless Client Compatibility</TITLE>
<PARA>Packages must not execute commands delivered by the package itself.
This is to maintain diskless client compatibility and avoids running commands
that might require shared libraries that are not installed yet. </PARA>
</SECT2>
<SECT2>
<TITLE>Verifying Packages</TITLE>
<PARA>All packages must pass <COMMAND>pkgchk</COMMAND> validation. After a
package is created and before it is installed, it must be checked with the
following command.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgchk -d</USERINPUT> <REPLACEABLE>dir_name</REPLACEABLE> <REPLACEABLE>pkg_name</REPLACEABLE></SCREEN>
<VARIABLELIST>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>dir_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the directory where the package resides</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
<VARLISTENTRY>
<TERM><REPLACEABLE>pkg_name</REPLACEABLE></TERM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Specifies the name of the package</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</VARLISTENTRY>
</VARIABLELIST>
<EXAMPLE>
<TITLE>Testing a Package</TITLE>
<PARA>After a package is created, it must be tested by installing it in an
alternate root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system location by using the <OPTION>R</OPTION> <REPLACEABLE>dir_name</REPLACEABLE> option to <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND>.
After the package is installed, it must be checked for correctness by using <COMMAND>pkgchk</COMMAND>, as in this example.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgadd -d . -R /a SUNWvxvm</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>pkgchk -R /a SUNWvxvm</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>No errors should be displayed.</PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
<EXAMPLE>
<TITLE>Testing a Package on <FILENAME>/export/SUNWvxvm</FILENAME></TITLE>
<PARA>If a package exists at <FILENAME>/export/SUNWvxvm</FILENAME>, then you
would issue the following command.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgchk -d /export SUNWvxvm</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
<PARA>No errors should be displayed.</PARA>
</EXAMPLE>
<PARA>Other commands can check the package when you are creating, modifying,
and deleting files. The following commands are some examples.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>For example, the <COMMAND>dircmp</COMMAND> or <COMMAND>fssnap</COMMAND> commands
can be used to verify that packages behave properly. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Also, the <COMMAND>ps</COMMAND> command can be used for testing
daemon compliance by making sure daemons are not stopped or started by the
package. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The <COMMAND>truss</COMMAND>, <COMMAND>pkgadd <OPTION>v</OPTION></COMMAND>,
and <COMMAND>pkgrm</COMMAND> commands can test runtime package installation
compliance, but might not work in all situations. In the following example,
the <COMMAND>truss</COMMAND> command strips out all read-only, non-<ENVAR>$TEMPDIR</ENVAR> access and shows only non-read-only access to paths that do not lie
within the specified inactive boot environment. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>TEMPDIR=/a; export TEMPDIR</USERINPUT>
# <USERINPUT>truss -t open /usr/sbin/pkgadd -R ${TEMPDIR} SUNWvxvm</USERINPUT> \
<USERINPUT>2>&amp;1 > /dev/null | grep -v O_RDONLY | grep -v \</USERINPUT>
<USERINPUT>'open("'${TEMPDIR}</USERINPUT></SCREEN>
</SECT2>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PACKAGE-90">
<TITLE>Preventing User Interaction When Installing
or Upgrading</TITLE>
<PARA>Packages must be added or removed without the user being prompted for
information when using the following standard Solaris utilities. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The custom JumpStart program</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Live Upgrade</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris installation program  program</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>Solaris Zones</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>To test a package to ensure that it will install with no user interaction,
a new administration file can be set up with the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command <OPTION>a</OPTION> option. The <OPTION>a</OPTION> option defines an installation administration
file to be used in place of the default administration file. Using the default
file might result in the user being prompted for more information. You can
create an administration file that indicates to <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> that
it should bypass these checks and install the package without user confirmation.
For details, see the man page <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN4" TARGETPTR="ADMIN-4"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>admin</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>4</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> or <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PKGADD-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgadd</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>.</PARA>
<PARA>The following examples show how the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command
uses the administration file.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If no administration file is provided, <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> uses <FILENAME>/var/sadm/install/admin/default</FILENAME>. Using this file might result in
user interaction.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgadd</USERINPUT> </SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If a relative administration file is provided on the command
line, <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> looks in <FILENAME>/var/sadm/install/admin</FILENAME> for
the file name and uses it. In this example, the relative administration file
is named <FILENAME>nocheck</FILENAME> and <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> looks
for <FILENAME>/var/sadm/install/admin/nocheck</FILENAME>.  </PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgadd -a nocheck</USERINPUT> </SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If an absolute file is provided <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> uses
it. In this example, <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> looks in <FILENAME>/tmp</FILENAME> for
the <FILENAME>nocheck</FILENAME> administration file.</PARA>
<SCREEN># <USERINPUT>pkgadd -a /tmp/nocheck</USERINPUT> </SCREEN>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<EXAMPLE>
<TITLE>Installation Administration File</TITLE>
<PARA>The following is an example of an installation administration file that
requires very little user interaction with the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> utility.
Unless the package requires more space than is available on the system, the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> utility uses this file and installs the package without prompting
the user for more information.</PARA>
<PROGRAMLISTING>mail=
instance=overwrite
partial=nocheck
runlevel=nocheck
idepend=nocheck
space=ask
setuid=nocheck
confiict=nocheck
action=nocheck
basedir=default</PROGRAMLISTING>
</EXAMPLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="GCBHP">
<TITLE>Setting Package Parameters For Zones</TITLE>
<PARA>Packages have parameters that control how their content is distributed
and made visible on a system with non-global zones installed. The <LITERAL>SUNW_PKG_ALLZONES</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>SUNW_PKG_HOLLOW</LITERAL>, and <LITERAL>SUNW_PKG_THISZONE</LITERAL> package
parameters define the characteristics of packages on a system with zones installed.
These parameters must be set so that packages can be administered in a system
with non-global zones.</PARA>
<PARA>The following table lists the four valid combinations for setting package
parameters. If you choose setting combinations that are not listed in the
following table, those settings are invalid and result in the package failing
to install.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Ensure that you have set all three package parameters. You can
leave all three package parameters blank. The package tools interpret a missing
zone package parameter as if the setting were &ldquo;false,&rdquo; but not
setting the parameters is strongly discouraged. By setting all three package
parameters, you specify the exact behavior the package tools should exhibit
when installing or removing the package. </PARA>
</NOTE>
<TABLE FRAME="TOPBOT" ID="GCBGL">
<TITLE>Valid Package Parameter
Settings For Zones</TITLE>
<TGROUP COLS="4" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="21.13*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="19.83*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="22.79*">
<COLSPEC COLNAME="COLSPEC0" COLWIDTH="68.26*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNW_PKG_ALLZONES</LITERAL> Setting</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNW_PKG_HOLLOW</LITERAL> Setting</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><LITERAL>SUNW_PKG_THISZONE</LITERAL> Setting</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Package Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>This is the default setting for packages that do not specify values
for all the zone package parameters.</PARA>
<PARA>A package with these settings can be installed in either the global
zone or a non-global zone. </PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command is run in the global
zone, the package is installed in the global zone and in all non-global zones.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command is run in a non-global
zone, the package is installed in the non-global zone only. </PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA>In both cases, the entire contents of the package is visible in all
zones where the package is installed.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>true</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A package with these settings can be installed in either the global
zone or a non-global zone. If new non-global zones are created after the installation,
the package is not propagated to these new non-global zones.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command is run in the global
zone, the package is installed in the global zone only.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>If the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command is run in a non-global
zone, the package is installed in the non-global zone only.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<PARA> In both cases, the entire contents of the package is visible in the
zone where the package is installed.</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>true</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A package with these settings can be installed in the global zone only.
When the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command is run, the package is installed
in the global zone and in all non-global zones. The entire contents of the
package is visible in all zones.</PARA>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Any attempt to install the package in a non-global zone fails.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>true</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>true</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>false</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>A package with these settings can only be installed in the global zone,
by the global administrator.  When the <COMMAND>pkgadd</COMMAND> command is
run, the contents of the package is fully installed in the global zone. If
a package has the package parameters set to these values, the package content
itself is not delivered on any non-global zone. Only the package installation
information necessary to make the package appear to be installed is installed
on all non-global zones. This enables the installation of other packages to
be installed that depend on this package. For more information on &ldquo;hollow&rdquo;
packages, see <OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADRM" TARGETPTR="Z.PKGINST.OV-1">Chapter 24, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">About Packages and Patches on a Solaris System With Zones Installed (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Solaris Containers-Resource Management and Solaris Zones</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
<PARA>For package dependency checking purposes, the package appears to be
installed in all zones.</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>In the global zone, the entire contents of the package is
visible.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>In whole root non-global zones, the entire contents of the
package is not visible.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>When a non-global zone inherits a file system from the global
zone, a package installed in this file system is visible in a non-global zone.
All other files delivered by the package are not visible within the non-global
zone. </PARA>
<PARA>For example, a sparse root non-global zone shares certain
directories with the global zone. These directories are read-only. Sparse
root non-global zones share the <FILENAME>/platform</FILENAME> file system
among others. Another example is packages that deliver files relevant only
to booting hardware.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
<NOTE>
<PARA>Any attempt to install the package in a non-global zone fails.</PARA>
</NOTE>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</TABLE>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="50*">
<THEAD>
<ROW ROWSEP="1">
<ENTRY>
<PARA>Description</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For More Information</PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</THEAD>
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For more details on packages and zones</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADRM" TARGETPTR="Z.PKGINST.OV-1">Chapter 24, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">About Packages and Patches on a Solaris System With Zones Installed (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Solaris Containers-Resource Management and Solaris Zones</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For an overview of sparse and whole root zones</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADRM" TARGETPTR="ZONES.INTRO-1">Chapter 16, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Introduction to Solaris Zones,</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Solaris Containers-Resource Management and Solaris Zones</CITETITLE></OLINK> </PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For information about package characteristics and parameters</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN4" TARGETPTR="PKGINFO-4"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkginfo</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>4</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For information about displaying package parameter values</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="PKGPARAM-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgparam</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</SECT1>
<SECT1 ID="PACKAGE-1">
<TITLE>For Background Information</TITLE>
<PARA>The following references provide background information about packaging
requirements and specific command syntax.</PARA>
<INFORMALTABLE FRAME="TOPBOT">
<TGROUP COLS="2" COLSEP="0" ROWSEP="0">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="33.29*">
<COLSPEC COLWIDTH="66.71*">
<TBODY>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For more specific information about packaging requirements and definitions
of terminology</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="PACKINSTALL" TARGETPTR="CH6ADVTECH-96543">Chapter 6, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Advanced Techniques for Creating Packages,</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Application Packaging Developer&rsquo;s Guide</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For basic information about adding and removing packages and the installation
administration file</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV1" TARGETPTR="SWMGRPKGSCONCEPTS-52619">Chapter 17, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Managing Software (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Basic Administration</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For detailed information about specific commands that are referenced
in this appendix, see these man pages</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="DIRCMP-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>dircmp</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>, <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="FSSNAP-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>fssnap</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>, <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="PS-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>ps</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>, or <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1" TARGETPTR="TRUSS-1"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>truss</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK> <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PKGADD-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgadd</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>, <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PKGCHK-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgchk</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK>, or <OLINK TARGETDOC="REFMAN1M" TARGETPTR="PKGRM-1M"><CITEREFENTRY>
<REFENTRYTITLE>pkgrm</REFENTRYTITLE>
<MANVOLNUM>1M</MANVOLNUM>
</CITEREFENTRY></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For an overview of Solaris Live Upgrade</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLUPG" TARGETPTR="LUOVERVIEW-1">Chapter 2, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">Solaris Express Installation Guide:  Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For an overview of custom JumpStart</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SOLINSTALLADV" TARGETPTR="JUMPSTARTOVERVIEW-4">Chapter&nbsp;2, Custom JumpStart (Overview)</OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<ENTRY>
<PARA>For an overview of Solaris Zones</PARA>
</ENTRY>
<ENTRY>
<PARA><OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADRM" TARGETPTR="ZONES.INTRO-1">Chapter 16, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Introduction to Solaris Zones,</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: Solaris Containers-Resource Management and Solaris Zones</CITETITLE></OLINK></PARA>
</ENTRY>
</ROW>
</TBODY>
</TGROUP>
</INFORMALTABLE>
</SECT1>
</APPENDIX><?Pub *0000027390 0><?Entity End package.sgm>
</PART><?Entity Ref glossary><?Entity Start glossary.sgm><?Pub UDT _bookmark _target><?Pub CX solbook(>
<GLOSSARY ID="GLOSSARY-1"><?Pub Tag atict:info tracking="on" ref="2"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="lynnet" fullname=""><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="cf79060" fullname="Christopher Franklin"><?Pub Tag atict:user
user="vs145730" fullname="Lynne Thompson"><?Pub Tag atict:user user="barb1"
fullname="Barbara Lundquist">
<TITLE>Glossary</TITLE>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-19DDD">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>/etc</FILENAME> directory</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A directory that contains critical system configuration files
and maintenance commands.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-19SDFGS">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>/etc/netboot</FILENAME> directory</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The directory on a WAN boot server that contains the client
configuration information and security data that are required for a WAN boot
installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-20SFGHSGF">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>/export</FILENAME> file
system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file system on an OS server that is shared with other systems
on a network. For example, the <LITERAL>/export</LITERAL> file system can
contain the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system and swap space for diskless
clients and the home directories for users on the network. Diskless clients
rely on the <LITERAL>/export</LITERAL> file system on an OS server to boot
and run.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-45">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>/opt</FILENAME> file system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file system that contains the mount points for third-party
and unbundled software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-68">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME> file system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file system on a standalone system or server that contains
many of the standard UNIX programs. Sharing the large <LITERAL>/usr</LITERAL> file
system with a server rather than maintaining a local copy minimizes the overall
disk space that is required to install and run the Solaris software on a system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-69">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>/var</FILENAME> file system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file system or directory (on standalone systems) that contains
system files that are likely to change or grow over the life of the system.
These files include system logs, <LITERAL>vi</LITERAL> files, mail files,
and UUCP files.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-11">
<GLOSSTERM>3DES</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>([Triple DES] Triple-Data Encryption Standard). A symmetric-key
encryption method that  provides a key length of 168 bits. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-12">
<GLOSSTERM>AES</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Advanced Encryption Standard) A symmetric 128-bit block data
encryption technique. The  U.S. government adopted the Rijndael variant of
the algorithm as its encryption standard in  October 2000. AES replaces DES
encryption as the government standard.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-8">
<GLOSSTERM>archive</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file that contains a collection of files that were copied
from a master system. The file also contains identification information about
the archive, such as a name and the date that you created the archive. After
you install an archive on a system, the system contains the exact configuration
of the master system.</PARA>
<PARA>An archive could be a differential archive,
which is a Solaris Flash archive that contains only the differences between
two system images, an unchanged master image and an updated master image.
The differential archive contains files to be retained, modified, or deleted
from the clone system.  A differential update changes only the files specified
and is restricted to systems that contain software consistent with the unchanged
master image.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-10">
<GLOSSTERM>arrow keys</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>One of the four directional keys on the numeric keypad.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-3">
<GLOSSTERM>begin script</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A user-defined Bourne shell script, specified within the <LITERAL>rules</LITERAL> file, that performs tasks before the Solaris software is installed
on the system. You can use begin scripts only with custom JumpStart installations.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-5BOOT">
<GLOSSTERM>boot</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>To load the system software into memory and start it.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>boot archive</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: A boot archive
is a collection of critical files that is used to boot the Solaris OS. These
files are needed during system startup before the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system is mounted. Two boot archives  are maintained on a system:</PARA>
<ITEMIZEDLIST>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The boot archive that is used to boot the Solaris OS on a
system. This boot archive is sometimes called the primary  boot archive.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
<LISTITEM>
<PARA>The boot archive that is used for recovery when the primary
boot  archive is damaged. This boot archive starts the system without mounting
the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system. On the GRUB menu, this boot
   archive is called failsafe. The archive's essential purpose  is to regenerate
the primary boot archive, which is usually used to boot the system.</PARA>
</LISTITEM>
</ITEMIZEDLIST>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="CHAPTER-58">
<GLOSSTERM>boot environment</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A collection of mandatory file systems (disk slices and mount
points) that are critical to the operation of the Solaris OS. These disk slices
might be on the same disk or distributed across multiple disks. </PARA>
<PARA>The
active boot environment is the one that is  currently booted. Exactly one
active  boot environment can be booted. An inactive boot environment is not
currently booted, but can be in a state of waiting for activation on the next
reboot.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>boot loader</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: The boot loader
is the first software program that runs after you turn on a  system. This
program begins the booting process.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-BOOTLOG">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>bootlog-cgi</FILENAME> program</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The CGI program that enables a web server to collect and store
remote client-booting and installation console messages during a WAN boot
installation. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-4AA">
<GLOSSTERM>boot server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A server system that provides client systems on the same network
subnet with the programs and information that they need to start. A boot server
is required to install over the network if the install server is on a different
subnet than the systems on which Solaris software is to be installed.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-13">
<GLOSSTERM>certificate authority</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(CA) A trusted third-party organization or company that issues
 digital certificates that are used to create digital signatures and public-private
key pairs. The CA  guarantees that the individual who is granted the unique
certificate is who she or he claims to be.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-14WW">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>certstore</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file that contains a digital certificate for a specific
client system. During  an SSL negotiation, the client might be asked to provide
the certificate file to the server.  The server uses this file to verify the
identity of the client.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY SORTAS="CGI" ID="GLOSSARY-15GSD">
<GLOSSTERM>CGI</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Common Gateway Interface) An interface by which external
programs communicate with the  HTTP server. Programs that are written to use
CGI are called CGI programs or CGI scripts.  CGI programs handle forms or
parse output the server does not normally handle or parse.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-17LKII">
<GLOSSTERM>checksum</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The result of adding a group of data items that are used for
checking the group. The data items can be either numerals or other character
strings that are treated as numerals during the checksum calculation. The
checksum value verifies that communication between two devices is successful.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-50JH">
<GLOSSTERM>client</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>In the client-server model for communications, the client
is a process that remotely accesses resources of a compute server, such as
compute power and large memory capacity. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-90FF">
<GLOSSTERM>clone system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A system that you install by using a Solaris Flash archive.
The clone system has the same installation configuration as the master system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-60ASD">
<GLOSSTERM>cluster</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A logical collection of packages (software modules). The Solaris
software is divided into <EMPHASIS>software groups</EMPHASIS>, which are each
composed of clusters and <EMPHASIS>packages</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-9SADF">
<GLOSSTERM>command line</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A string of characters that begins with a command, often followed
by arguments, including options, file names, and other expressions, and terminated
by the end-of-line character.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-6ZXCV">
<GLOSSTERM>concatenation</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A RAID-0 volume. If slices are concatenated, the data is written
to the first available slice until that slice is full. When that slice is
full, the data is written to the next slice, serially. A concatenation provides
no data redundancy unless it is contained in a mirror. See also RAID-0 volume.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7VCBN">
<GLOSSTERM>Core Software Group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software group that contains the minimum software that is
required to boot and run the Solaris OS on a system. Core includes some networking
software and the drivers that are required to run the Common Desktop Environment
(CDE) desktop. Core does not include the CDE software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="CHAPTER-620">
<GLOSSTERM>critical file systems</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>File systems that are required by the Solaris OS. When you
use Solaris Live Upgrade, these file systems are separate mount points in
the <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME> file of the active and inactive boot environments.
Example file systems are <FILENAME>root</FILENAME> (/), <FILENAME>/usr</FILENAME>, <FILENAME>/var</FILENAME>, and <FILENAME>/opt</FILENAME>. These file systems are always
copied from the source to the inactive boot environment.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-8AVN">
<GLOSSTERM>custom JumpStart</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A type of installation in which the Solaris software is automatically
installed on a system that is based on a user-defined profile. You can create
customized profiles for different types of users and systems. A custom JumpStart
installation is a JumpStart installation you create.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-100VBN">
<GLOSSTERM>custom probes file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file, which must be located in the same JumpStart directory
as the <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file, that is a Bourne shell script that
contains two types of functions: probe and comparison. Probe functions gather
the information you want or do the actual work and set a corresponding <ENVAR>SI_</ENVAR> environment variable you define. Probe functions become probe keywords.
Comparison functions call a corresponding probe function, compare the output
of the probe function, and return 0 if the keyword matches or 1 if the keyword
doesn't match. Comparison functions become rule keywords. See also <EMPHASIS>rules
file</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-DECR">
<GLOSSTERM>decryption</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The process of converting coded data to plain text. See also <OLINK TARGETPTR="GLOSSARY-ENCR">encryption</OLINK>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-9AVCN">
<GLOSSTERM>derived profile</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A profile that is dynamically created by a begin script during
a custom JumpStart installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-16CVNB">
<GLOSSTERM>DES</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Data Encryption Standard) A symmetric-key encryption method
that was developed in 1975 and  standardized by ANSI in 1981 as ANSI X.3.92.
DES uses a 56-bit key.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-10ACVBN">
<GLOSSTERM>Developer Solaris Software Group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software group that contains the End User Solaris Software
Group plus the libraries, include files, man pages, and programming tools
for developing software. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-71CVBN">
<GLOSSTERM>DHCP</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) An application-layer
protocol. Enables individual computers, or clients, on a TCP/IP network to
extract an IP address and other network configuration information from a designated
and centrally maintained DHCP server or servers. This facility reduces the
overhead of maintaining and administering a large IP network.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7778">
<GLOSSTERM>differential archive</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A Solaris Flash archive that contains only the differences
between two system images, an unchanged master image and an updated master
image. The differential archive contains files to be retained, modified, or
deleted from the clone system.  A differential update changes only the files
that are specified and is restricted to systems that contain software consistent
with the unchanged master image.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-17CVBN">
<GLOSSTERM>digital certificate</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A nontransferable, nonforgeable, digital file issued from
a third  party that both communicating parties already trust.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-18">
<GLOSSTERM>disc</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>An optical disc, as opposed to a magnetic disk, which recognizes
the common spelling that is used in the compact disc (CD) market. For example,
a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM is an optical disc. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-120">
<GLOSSTERM>disk</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A round platter, or set of platters, of a magnetized medium
that is organized into concentric tracks and sectors for storing data such
as files. See also disc.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-11FGH">
<GLOSSTERM>disk configuration file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file that represents a structure of a disk (for example,
bytes/sector, flags, slices). Disk configuration files enable you to use the <LITERAL>pfinstall</LITERAL> command from a single system to test profiles on different&ndash;size
disks.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-12O">
<GLOSSTERM>diskless client</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A client on a network that relies on a server for all of its
disk storage.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-18DFG">
<GLOSSTERM>document root directory</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The root of a hierarchy on a web server machine that contains
the  files, images, and data you want to present to users who are accessing
the web server.  </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-13ERT">
<GLOSSTERM>domain</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A part of the Internet naming hierarchy. A domain represents
a group of systems on a local network that share administrative files.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-14ERT">
<GLOSSTERM>domain name</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The name that is assigned to a group of systems on a local
network that share administrative files. The domain name is required for the
Network Information Service (NIS) database to work properly. A domain name
consists of a sequence of component names that are separated by periods (for
example: <LITERAL>tundra.mpk.ca.us</LITERAL>). As you read a domain name from
left to right, the component names identify more general (and usually remote)
areas of administrative authority. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY SORTAS="encryption" ID="GLOSSARY-ENCR">
<GLOSSTERM>encryption</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The process of protecting information from unauthorized use
by making the  information unintelligible. Encryption is based on a code,
called a key, which is used to  decrypt the information. See also <OLINK TARGETPTR="GLOSSARY-DECR">decryption</OLINK>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-15FFF">
<GLOSSTERM>End User Solaris Software Group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software group that contains the Core Software Group plus
the recommended software for an end user, including the Common Desktop Environment
(CDE) and DeskSet software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-160FD">
<GLOSSTERM>Entire Solaris Software Group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software group that contains the entire Solaris release.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-170GGG">
<GLOSSTERM>Entire Solaris Software Group
Plus OEM Support</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software group that contains the entire Solaris release
plus additional hardware support for OEMs. This software group is recommended
when installing Solaris software on SPARC based servers.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>failsafe boot archive</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: A boot archive
that is used for recovery when the primary boot  archive is damaged. This
boot archive starts the system without  mounting the root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system. This boot archive is called  failsafe on the GRUB menu. The archive's
essential purpose  is to regenerate the primary boot archive, which is usually
used  to boot the system. See <EMPHASIS>boot archive</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="CHAPTER-62ASDGFAD">
<GLOSSTERM>fallback</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A reversion to the environment that ran previously. Use fallback
when you are activating an environment and the boot environment that is designated
for booting fails or shows some undesirable behavior.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-21AADSF">
<GLOSSTERM><LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A logical partition of a disk drive that is dedicated to a
particular operating system on x86 based systems. To install the Solaris software,
you must set up at least one Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition on
an x86 based system. x86 based systems allow up to four different <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partitions
on a disk. These partitions can be used to hold individual operating systems.
Each operating system must be located on a unique <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition.
A system can only have one Solaris <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition per
disk.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-22ASFD">
<GLOSSTERM>file server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A server that provides the software and file storage for systems
on a network.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY SORTAS="file server" ID="GLOSSARY-23ASDF">
<GLOSSTERM>file system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>In the <TRADEMARK>SunOS</TRADEMARK> operating system, a tree-structured
network of files and directories that you can access.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-24ASDF">
<GLOSSTERM>finish script</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A user-defined Bourne shell script, specified within the <LITERAL>rules</LITERAL> file, that performs tasks after the Solaris software is installed
on the system but before the system reboots. You use finish scripts with custom
JumpStart installations.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-30LK">
<GLOSSTERM>format</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>To put data into a structure or divide a disk into sectors
for receiving data.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-110KL">
<GLOSSTERM>function key</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>One of the 10 or more keyboard keys that are labeled F1, F2,
F3, and so on that are mapped to particular tasks.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>global zone</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>In Solaris Zones, the global zone is both the default zone
for the system and the zone used for system-wide administrative control. 
The global zone is the only zone from which a non-global zone can be configured,
installed, managed, or uninstalled.  Administration of the system infrastructure,
such as physical devices, routing, or dynamic reconfiguration (DR), is only
possible in the global zone.  Appropriately privileged processes running in
the global zone can access objects associated with other zones.  See also <EMPHASIS>Solaris Zones</EMPHASIS> and <EMPHASIS>non-global zone</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>GRUB</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: GNU GRand Unified
Bootloader (GRUB) is an open source boot loader  with a simple menu interface.
 The menu displays a list of operating systems that are installed on a system.
GRUB enables you to easily boot these various operating systems,  such as
the Solaris OS, Linux, or Microsoft Windows.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>GRUB main menu</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: A boot menu that
lists the operating systems that are installed  on a system. From this menu,
you can easily boot an operating  system without modifying the BIOS or <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition settings.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>GRUB edit menu</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: A boot menu that
is a submenu of the GRUB main menu. GRUB commands  are displayed on this menu.
These commands can be edited to change  boot behavior.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-130LK">
<GLOSSTERM>hard link</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A directory entry that references a file on disk. More than
one such directory entry can reference the same physical file.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-21KL">
<GLOSSTERM>hash</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A number that is produced by taking some input and generating
a number that is significantly shorter than the input.  The same output value
is always generated for identical inputs. Hash functions can be used in table
search algorithms, in error detection, and in tamper detection. When used
for tamper detection, hash functions are chosen such that it is difficult
to find two inputs that yield the same hash result. MD5 and SHA-1 are examples
of one-way hash functions.  For example, a message digest takes a variable-length
input such as a disk file and reduces it to a small value.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-20KL">
<GLOSSTERM>hashing</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The process of changing a string of characters into a value
or key that represents  the original string.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-22HJ">
<GLOSSTERM>HMAC</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>Keyed hashing method for message authentication. HMAC is used
with an iterative  cryptographic hash function, such as MD5 or SHA-1, in combination
with a secret shared key.  The cryptographic strength of HMAC depends on the
properties of the underlying hash  function. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-25HJ">
<GLOSSTERM>host name</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The name by which a system is known to other systems on a
network. This name must be unique among all the systems within a particular
domain (usually, this means within any single organization). A host name can
be any combination of letters, numbers, and minus signs (<LITERAL>-</LITERAL>),
but it cannot begin or end with a minus sign.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-140GH">
<GLOSSTERM>HTTP</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Hypertext Transfer Protocol) (n.) The Internet protocol that
fetches hypertext objects from remote hosts. This protocol is based on TCP/IP.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-23GH">
<GLOSSTERM>HTTPS</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A secure version of HTTP, implemented by using the Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL). </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7779">
<GLOSSTERM>initial installation</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>An installation that overwrites the currently running software
or initializes a blank disk. </PARA>
<PARA>An initial installation of the Solaris
OS overwrites the system's disk or disks with the new version of the Solaris
OS. If your system is not running the Solaris OS, you must perform an initial
installation.  If  your system is running an upgradable version of the Solaris
OS, an  initial installation overwrites the disk and does not preserve the
OS  or local modifications.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-27ER">
<GLOSSTERM>install server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A server that provides the Solaris DVD or CD images from which
other systems on a network can install Solaris (also called a <EMPHASIS>media
server</EMPHASIS>). You can create an install server by copying the Solaris
DVD or CD images to the server's hard disk.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-29WE">
<GLOSSTERM>IP address</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Internet protocol address)  In TCP/IP, a unique 32-bit number
that identifies each host in a network. An IP address consists of four numbers
that are separated by periods (192.168.0.0, for example). Most often, each
part of the IP address is a number between 0 and 225. However, the first number
must be less than 224 and the last number cannot be 0.</PARA>
<PARA>IP addresses
are logically divided into two parts: the network (similar to a telephone
area code), and the local system on the network (similar to a phone number).
The numbers in a Class A IP address, for example, represent &ldquo;<LITERAL>network.local.local.local</LITERAL>&rdquo; and the numbers in a Class C IP address represent &ldquo;<LITERAL>network.network.network.local</LITERAL>.&rdquo;</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-72SA">
<GLOSSTERM>IPv6</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>IPv6 is a version (version 6) of Internet Protocol (IP) that
is designed to be an evolutionary step from the current version, IPv4 (version
4). Deploying IPv6, by using defined transition mechanisms, does not disrupt
current operations. In addition, IPv6 provides a platform for new Internet
functionality. IPv6 is described in more detail in<OLINK TARGETDOC="SYSADV3" TARGETPTR="IPV6-OVERVIEW-7">Chapter 3, <CITETITLE REMAP="chapter">Planning an IPv6 Addressing Scheme (Overview),</CITETITLE> in <CITETITLE REMAP="book">System Administration Guide: IP Services</CITETITLE></OLINK>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-16SD">
<GLOSSTERM>job</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A user-defined task to be completed by a computer system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-31JS">
<GLOSSTERM>JumpStart directory</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>When you use a profile diskette for custom JumpStart installations,
the JumpStart directory is the root directory on the diskette that contains
all the essential custom JumpStart files. When you use a profile server for
custom JumpStart installations, the JumpStart directory is a directory on
the server that contains all the essential custom JumpStart files.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-32ASD">
<GLOSSTERM>JumpStart installation</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A type of installation in which the Solaris software is automatically
installed on a system by using the factory-installed JumpStart software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-32X">
<GLOSSTERM>Kerberos</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A network authentication protocol that uses strong, secret-key
cryptography to enable a client and server to identify themselves to each
other over an insecure network connection.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-24KEY">
<GLOSSTERM>key</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The code for encrypting or decrypting data. See also <OLINK TARGETPTR="GLOSSARY-ENCR">encryption</OLINK>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-25KEYSTORE">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>keystore</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file that contains keys shared by a client and server. During
a WAN boot  installation, the client system uses the keys to verify the integrity
of, or decrypt the  data and files transmitted from, the server.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-42LAN">
<GLOSSTERM>LAN</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(local area network) A group of computer systems in close
proximity that can communicate by way of some connecting hardware and software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-32LDAP">
<GLOSSTERM>LDAP</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) A standard, extensible
directory access protocol that is used by LDAP naming service clients and
servers to communicate with each other.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-33LOCALE">
<GLOSSTERM>locale</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A geographic or political region or community that shares
the same language, customs, or cultural conventions (English for the U.S.
is <LITERAL>en_US</LITERAL>, and English for the U.K. is <LITERAL>en_UK</LITERAL>).</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-210L">
<GLOSSTERM>logical device</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A group of physical slices on one or more disks that appear
to the system as a single device. A logical device is called a volume in Solaris
Volume Manager. A volume is functionally identical to a physical disk for
the purposes of an application or file system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7780">
<GLOSSTERM>manifest section</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A section of a Solaris Flash archive that is used to validate
a clone system. The manifest section lists the files on a system to be retained,
added to, or deleted from the clone system. This section is informational
only. The section lists the files in an internal format and cannot be used
for scripting.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-11A">
<GLOSSTERM>master system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A system that you use to create a Solaris Flash archive.
The system configuration is saved in the archive.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-26">
<GLOSSTERM>MD5</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Message Digest 5) An iterative cryptographic hash function
that is used for message authentication,  including digital signatures. The
function was developed in 1991 by Rivest.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-35">
<GLOSSTERM>media server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>See <EMPHASIS>install server</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>menu.lst</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA><EMPHASIS ROLE="STRONG">x86 only</EMPHASIS>: A file that lists
all the operating systems that are installed on a  system.  The contents of
this file dictate the list of operating systems  that is displayed on the
GRUB menu.  From the GRUB menu, you can easily  boot an operating system without
modifying the BIOS or <LITERAL>fdisk</LITERAL> partition  settings.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-70">
<GLOSSTERM>metadevice</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>See <EMPHASIS>volume</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-2">
<GLOSSTERM>miniroot</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A minimal, bootable root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system
that is included in Solaris  installation media. A miniroot consists of the
Solaris software  that is required to install and upgrade systems. On x86
based systems,  the miniroot is copied to the system to be used as the failsafe
boot archive. See <EMPHASIS>failsafe boot archive</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-5">
<GLOSSTERM>mirror</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>See <EMPHASIS>RAID-1 volume</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-36">
<GLOSSTERM>mount</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The process of accessing a directory from a disk that is attached
to a machine that is making the mount request or a remote disk on a network.
To mount a file system, you need a mount point on the local system and the
name of the file system to be mounted (for example, <LITERAL>/usr</LITERAL>).</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-37">
<GLOSSTERM>mount point</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A workstation directory to which you mount a file system that
exists on a remote machine.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-38">
<GLOSSTERM>name server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A server that provides a naming service to systems on a network. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-39">
<GLOSSTERM>naming service</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A distributed network database that contains key system information
about all the systems on a network so that the systems can communicate with
each other. With a naming service, the system information can be maintained,
managed, and accessed on a network-wide basis. Without a naming service, each
system has to maintain its own copy of the system information in the local <LITERAL>/etc</LITERAL> files. Sun supports the following naming services: LDAP, NIS,
and NIS+. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-41">
<GLOSSTERM>networked systems</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A group of systems (called hosts) that are connected through
hardware and software so that they can communicate and share information.
Referred to as a local area network (LAN). One or more servers are usually
needed when systems are networked.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-40">
<GLOSSTERM>network installation</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A way to install software over the network from a system with
a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive to a system without a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Network
installations require a <EMPHASIS>name server</EMPHASIS> and an <EMPHASIS>install
server</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-42">
<GLOSSTERM>NIS</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The SunOS 4.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. A distributed
network database that contains key information about the systems and the users
on the network. The NIS database is stored on the master server and all the
slave servers.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-43">
<GLOSSTERM>NIS+</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The SunOS 5.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. NIS+
replaces NIS, the SunOS 4.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>non-global zone</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A virtualized operating system environment created within
 a single instance of the Solaris Operating System.  One or more  applications
can run in a non-global zone without interacting with the rest of the system.
Non-global zones are also called zones. See also <EMPHASIS>Solaris Zones</EMPHASIS> and <EMPHASIS>global zone</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-44">
<GLOSSTERM>nonnetworked systems</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>Systems that are not connected to a network or do not rely
on other systems.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-46">
<GLOSSTERM>OS server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A system that provides services to systems on a network. To
serve diskless clients, an OS server must have disk space set aside for each
diskless client's root (/) file system and swap space (<LITERAL>/export/root</LITERAL>, <LITERAL>/export/swap</LITERAL>). </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-12A">
<GLOSSTERM>package</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A collection of software that is grouped into a single entity
for modular installation. The Solaris software is divided into <EMPHASIS>software
groups</EMPHASIS>, which are each composed of <EMPHASIS>clusters</EMPHASIS> and
packages.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7781">
<GLOSSTERM>panel</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A container for organizing the contents of a window, a dialog
box, or applet. The panel might collect and confirm user input. Panels might
be used by wizards and follow an ordered sequence to fulfill a designated
task. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-48">
<GLOSSTERM>patch analyzer</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A script that you can run manually or as part of the Solaris
installation program. The patch analyzer performs an analysis on your system
to determine which (if any) patches will be removed by upgrading to a Solaris
update.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-13A">
<GLOSSTERM>platform group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A vendor-defined grouping of hardware platforms for the purpose
of distributing specific software. Examples of valid platform groups are i86pc
and sun4u.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-49">
<GLOSSTERM>platform name</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The output of the <LITERAL>uname -i</LITERAL> command. For
example, the platform name for the Ultra 60 is SUNW,Ultra-60.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-14A">
<GLOSSTERM>Power Management</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>Software that automatically saves the state of a system and
turns it off after it is idle for 30 minutes. When you install the Solaris
software on a system that complies with Version 2 of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency's Energy Star guidelines, the Power Management software
is installed by default. A <LITERAL>sun4u</LITERAL> SPARC based system is
an example of a system that has Power Management installed by default. After
a subsequent reboot, you are prompted to enable or disable the Power Management
software.</PARA>
<PARA>Energy Star guidelines require that systems or monitors
automatically enter a &ldquo;sleep state&rdquo; (consume 30 watts or less)
after the system or monitor becomes inactive.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>primary boot archive</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A boot archive that is used to boot the Solaris OS on  a system.
This boot archive is sometimes called the primary boot archive. See <EMPHASIS>boot
archive</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7Z">
<GLOSSTERM>probe keyword</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A syntactical element that extracts attribute information
about a system when using the custom JumpStart method to install. A probe
keyword does not require you to set up a matching condition and run a profile
as required for a rule. See also <EMPHASIS>rule</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-500">
<GLOSSTERM>profile</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A text file that defines how to install the Solaris software
when using the custom JumpStart method. For example, a profile defines which
software group to install. Every rule specifies a profile that defines how
a system is to be installed when the rule is matched. You usually create a
different profile for every rule. However, the same profile can be used in
more than one rule. See also <EMPHASIS>rules file</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-51">
<GLOSSTERM>profile diskette</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A diskette that contains all the essential custom JumpStart
files in its root directory (JumpStart directory). </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-52">
<GLOSSTERM>profile server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A server that contains all the essential custom JumpStart
files in a JumpStart directory.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-27">
<GLOSSTERM>private key</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The decryption key used in public-key encryption.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-28">
<GLOSSTERM>public key</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The encryption key used in public-key encryption.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-29">
<GLOSSTERM>public-key cryptography</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A cryptographic system that uses two keys: a public key known
to  everyone, and a private key known only to the recipient of the message.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-31">
<GLOSSTERM>RAID-1 volume</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A class of volume that replicates data by maintaining multiple
copies. A RAID-1 volume is composed of one or more RAID-0 volumes called <EMPHASIS>submirrors</EMPHASIS>.  A RAID-1 volume is sometimes called a <EMPHASIS>mirror</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-4RAID">
<GLOSSTERM>RAID-0 volume</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A class of volume that can be a stripe or a concatenation.
These components are also called submirrors. A stripe or concatenation is
the basic building block for mirrors.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-1215">
<GLOSSTERM>Reduced Network Support Software
Group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software group that contains the minimum code that is required
to boot and run a Solaris system with limited network service support. The
Reduced Networking Software Group provides a multiuser text-based console
and system administration utilities. This software group also enables the
system to  recognize network interfaces, but does not activate network services.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-53">
<GLOSSTERM>root</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The top level of a hierarchy of items. Root is the one item
from  which all other items are descended.  See <EMPHASIS>root directory</EMPHASIS> or <EMPHASIS>root</EMPHASIS> (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) <EMPHASIS>file system</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The top-level file system from which all other file systems
stem. The root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>) file system is the base on which all
other file systems are mounted, and is never unmounted. The root (<FILENAME>/</FILENAME>)
file system contains the directories and files critical for system operation,
such as the kernel, device drivers, and the programs that are used to start
(boot) a system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>root directory</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The top-level directory from which all other directories stem.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-54">
<GLOSSTERM>rule</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A series of values that assigns one or more system attributes
to a profile. A rule is used in a custom JumpStart installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-55">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A text file that contains a rule for each group of systems
or single systems that you want to install automatically. Each rule distinguishes
a group of systems, based on one or more system attributes. The <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
links each group to a profile, which is a text file that defines how the Solaris
software is to be installed on each system in the group. A <FILENAME>rules</FILENAME> file
is used in a custom JumpStart installation. See also <EMPHASIS>profile</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-56">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A generated version of the <LITERAL>rules</LITERAL> file.
The <FILENAME>rules.ok</FILENAME> file is required by the custom JumpStart
installation software to match a system to a profile. You <EMPHASIS>must</EMPHASIS> use
the <LITERAL>check</LITERAL> script to create the <LITERAL>rules.ok</LITERAL> file.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-30">
<GLOSSTERM>Secure Sockets Layer</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(SSL) A software library establishing a secure connection
between two  parties (client and server) used to implement HTTPS, the secure
version of HTTP.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-15A">
<GLOSSTERM>server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A network device that manages resources and supplies services
to a client.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-31SHA">
<GLOSSTERM>SHA1</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Secure Hashing Algorithm) The algorithm that operates on
any input length less  than 2<SUPERSCRIPT>64</SUPERSCRIPT> to produce a message
digest.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-190">
<GLOSSTERM>shareable file systems</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>File systems that are user-defined files such as <FILENAME>/export/home</FILENAME> and <FILENAME>/swap</FILENAME>. These file systems are shared
between the active and inactive boot environment when you use Solaris Live
Upgrade. Shareable file systems contain the same mount point in the <FILENAME>vfstab</FILENAME> file in both the active and inactive boot environments. Updating
shared files in the active boot environment also updates data in the inactive
boot environment. Shareable file systems are shared by default, but you can
specify a destination slice, and then the file systems are copied. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-57">
<GLOSSTERM>slice</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The unit into which the disk space is divided by the software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-600">
<GLOSSTERM>software group</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A logical grouping of the Solaris software (clusters and packages).
During a Solaris installation, you can install one of the following software
groups: Core, End User Solaris Software, Developer Solaris Software, or Entire
Solaris Software, and for SPARC systems only, Entire Solaris Software Group
Plus OEM Support.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-58">
<GLOSSTERM>Solaris DVD or CD images</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The Solaris software that is installed on a system, which
you can access on the Solaris DVDs or CDs or an install server's hard disk
to which you have copied the Solaris DVD or CD images.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-18A">
<GLOSSTERM>Solaris Flash</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A Solaris installation feature that enables you to create
an archive of the files on a system, called the <EMPHASIS>master system</EMPHASIS>.
You can then use the archive to install other systems, making the other systems
identical in their configuration to the master system. See also <EMPHASIS>archive.</EMPHASIS></PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-16A">
<GLOSSTERM>Solaris installation program</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A graphical user interface (GUI) or command-line interface
(CLI) installation program that uses wizard panels to guide you step-by-step
through installing the Solaris software and third-party software.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7782">
<GLOSSTERM>Solaris Live Upgrade</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>An upgrade method that enables a duplicate boot environment
to be upgraded while the active boot environment is still running, thus eliminating
downtime of the production environment. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>Solaris Zones</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A software partitioning technology used to virtualize operating
system services and provide an isolated and secure environment for running
applications.  When you create a non-global zone, you produce an application
execution environment in which processes are isolated from all other zones.
 This isolation prevents processes that are running in a zone from monitoring
or affecting processes that are running in any other zones. See also <EMPHASIS>global
zone</EMPHASIS> and <EMPHASIS>non-global zone</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-61">
<GLOSSTERM>standalone</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A computer that does not require support from any other machine.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-8SD">
<GLOSSTERM>state database</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A database that stores information about the state of your
Solaris Volume Manager configuration. The state database is a collection of
multiple, replicated database copies. Each copy is referred to as a <EMPHASIS>state
database replica</EMPHASIS>. The state database tracks the location and status
of all known state database replicas.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-9ST">
<GLOSSTERM>state database replica</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A copy of a state database. The replica ensures that the data
in the database is valid.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7SUB">
<GLOSSTERM>submirror</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>See <EMPHASIS>RAID-0 volume</EMPHASIS>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-62">
<GLOSSTERM>subnet</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A working scheme that divides a single logical network into
smaller physical networks to simplify routing.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-63">
<GLOSSTERM>subnet mask</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A bit mask that is used to select bits from an Internet address
for subnet addressing. The mask is 32 bits long and selects the network portion
of the Internet address and 1 or more bits of the local portion. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>superuser</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A special user who has privileges to perform all administrative
tasks on the system. The superuser has  the ability to read and write to any
file, run all programs,  and send kill signals to any process.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-64">
<GLOSSTERM>swap space</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A slice or file that temporarily holds the contents of a memory
area till it can be reloaded in memory. Also called the <LITERAL>/swap</LITERAL> or <LITERAL>swap</LITERAL> file system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-17A">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file in which you specify a set of special system configuration
keywords that preconfigure a system.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-32">
<GLOSSTERM>system configuration file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(<FILENAME>system.conf</FILENAME>) A text file in which you
specify the locations of the <FILENAME>sysidcfg</FILENAME> file and  the custom
JumpStart files you want to use in a WAN boot installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-66">
<GLOSSTERM>time zone</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>Any of the 24 longitudinal divisions of the earth's surface
for which a standard time is kept.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-33">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>truststore</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A file that contains one or more digital certificates. During
a WAN boot  installation, the client system verifies the identity of the server
that is trying to  perform the installation by consulting the data in the <FILENAME>truststore</FILENAME> file.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-150">
<GLOSSTERM>unmount</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The process of removing access to a directory on a disk that
is attached to a machine or to a remote disk on a network. </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7783">
<GLOSSTERM>update</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>An installation, or to perform an installation, on a system
that changes software that is of the same type. Unlike an upgrade, an update
might downgrade the system.  Unlike an initial installation, software of the
same type that is being installed must be present before an update can occur.
 </PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-7784">
<GLOSSTERM>upgrade</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>An installation that merges files with existing files and
preserves modifications where possible. </PARA>
<PARA>An upgrade of the Solaris
OS merges the new version of the Solaris OS with the existing files on the
system's disk or disks. An upgrade saves as many modifications as possible
that you have made to the previous version of the Solaris OS.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-67">
<GLOSSTERM>upgrade option</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>An option that is presented by the Solaris installation program . The upgrade
procedure merges the new version of Solaris with existing files on your disk
or disks. An upgrade also saves as many local modifications as possible since
the last time Solaris was installed.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-34">
<GLOSSTERM>URL</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(Uniform Resource Locator) The addressing system used by the
server and the client to  request documents. A URL is often called a location.
The format of a URL is  <REPLACEABLE>protocol://machine:port/document</REPLACEABLE>.</PARA>
<PARA>A sample URL is <LITERAL>http://www.example.com/index.html</LITERAL>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-400">
<GLOSSTERM>utility</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A standard program, usually furnished at no charge with the
purchase of a computer, that does the computer's housekeeping.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-80">
<GLOSSTERM>volume</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A group of physical slices or other volumes that appear to
the system as a single logical device. A volume is functionally identical
to a physical disk for the purposes of an application or file system. </PARA>
<PARA>In some command-line utilities, a volume is called a metadevice. Volume
is also called <EMPHASIS>pseudo device</EMPHASIS> or <EMPHASIS>virtual device</EMPHASIS> in
standard UNIX terms.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-700">
<GLOSSTERM>removable
media services</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A program that provides a mechanism to administer and obtain
access to the data on DVD-ROMs, CD-ROMs, and diskettes.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-36WAN">
<GLOSSTERM>WAN</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>(wide area network) A network that connects multiple local
area networks (LANs) or systems at different geographical sites by using telephone,
fiber-optic, or satellite links.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-37WBI">
<GLOSSTERM>WAN boot installation</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A type of installation that enables you to boot and install
software  over a wide area network (WAN) by using HTTP or HTTPS. The WAN boot
installation method  enables you to transmit an encrypted Solaris Flash archive
over a public network and perform  a custom JumpStart installation on a remote
client.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-38WBMINI">
<GLOSSTERM>WAN boot miniroot</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A miniroot that has been modified to perform a WAN boot installation.
The WAN boot miniroot contains a subset of the software in the Solaris miniroot.
See also  <OLINK TARGETPTR="GLOSSARY-2">miniroot</OLINK>.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-39WBS">
<GLOSSTERM>WAN boot server</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A web server that provides the configuration and security
files that are used during a WAN boot installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-35WANBOOT">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>wanboot</FILENAME> program</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The second-level boot program that loads the WAN boot miniroot,
client configuration files, and installation files that are required to perform
a WAN boot  installation. For WAN boot installations, the <FILENAME>wanboot</FILENAME> binary
performs tasks similar to the  <FILENAME>ufsboot</FILENAME> or <FILENAME>inetboot</FILENAME> second-level boot programs.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-40WBCGI">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>wanboot-cgi</FILENAME> program</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>The CGI program that retrieves and transmits the data and
files that are used in a WAN boot installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY ID="GLOSSARY-41WBCONF">
<GLOSSTERM><FILENAME>wanboot.conf</FILENAME> file</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>A text file in which you specify the configuration information
and  security settings that are required to perform a WAN boot installation.</PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSENTRY>
<GLOSSTERM>zone</GLOSSTERM>
<GLOSSDEF>
<PARA>See <EMPHASIS>non-global zone</EMPHASIS></PARA>
</GLOSSDEF>
</GLOSSENTRY>
</GLOSSARY><?Pub *0000058959 0><?Entity End glossary.sgm>
<INDEX>
<TITLE>Index</TITLE>
<INDEXENTRY>
<PRIMARYIE></PRIMARYIE>
</INDEXENTRY>
</INDEX>
</BOOK><?Pub *0000005204 0>